Sony DSC-F828 Service Manual

DSC-F828
SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1

US Model
Ver 1.0 2003. 12
Canadian Model
Revision History
AEP Model
UK Model
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
Korea Model
Tourist Model
Chinese Model
Japanese Model
Link
SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS
• INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document.
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

DSC-F828
SPECIFICATIONS
x Camera [LCD screen] x AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor
[System] LCD panel used Power requirements
Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color 4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz
CCD Total number of dots Current consumption
4-color filter (RGBE) 134 400 (560×240) dots 0.35 − 0.18 A
Total pixels number of camera Power consumption
Approx. 8 314 000 pixels [Finder] 18 W
Effective pixels number of camera LCD panel used Output voltage
Approx. 8 068 000 pixels 1.1 cm (0.44 type) TFT drive 8.4 V DC, 1.5 A
Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T* Total number of dots Operating temperature range
7.1× zoom lens 235 200 (980×240) dots 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)
f=7.1 to 51 mm
Storage temperature range
(35 mm camera conversion: 28 to
[Power, general] −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
200 mm)
F2.0-2.8 Maximum dimensions
Used battery pack
Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm
Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches) NP-FM50
(2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D),
Exposure control Power requirements
7.2 V excluding projecting parts
Automatic, Shutter speed priority,
Aperture priority, Manual exposure, Power consumption (during shooting with LCD Mass Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding
Scene selection (4 modes) screen on) power cord (mains lead)
White balance 2.2 W
Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy, Operating temperature range x NP-FM50 battery pack
Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash, 0° to + 40°C (32° to +104°F) Used battery
One-push (When using the Microdrive: +5° to Lithium-ion battery
File format (DCF compliant) +40°C (41° to +104°F)) Maximum voltage
Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG Storage temperature range DC 8.4 V
compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Nominal voltage
compatible
Dimensions (lens: W-end) DC 7.2 V
Audio with still image: MPEG1
134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
compliant (Monaural)
Movies: MPEG1 compliant (5 3/8 3 × 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)
(Monaural) (W/H/D, protruding portions not
included)
Accessories
Recording medium
Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery • AC Adaptor (1)
“Memory Stick”, Microdrive,
CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII) pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,” • Power cord (mains lead) (1)
shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on • USB cable (1)
Flash Recommended distance (when ISO
included) • Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)
sensitivity is set to Auto)
0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to Microphone Electret condenser microphone • A/V connecting cable (1)
14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W) Speaker Dynamic speaker • Shoulder strap (1)
0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to
10 feet 10 inches) (T) • Lens cap (1)
Exif Print Compatible • Lens cap strap (1)
Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)
PRINT Image Matching II • Lens hood (1)
Compatible
[Output connectors] • CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)
PictBridge Compatible
A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) • CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)
Minijack • Operating Instructions (1)
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced,
sync negative Design and specifications are subject to change
Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) without notice.
Output impedance 2.2 kΩ
Accessory jack
Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
USB jack mini-B
USB communication
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 High-
Speed compliant)
—2—
DSC-F828
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered 4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
and bridges. recommend their replacement.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point during repairing.
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
—3—
DSC-F828
[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]
Self-diagnosis display
• C: ss: ss
The contents which can be handled
by customer, are displayed.
• E: ss: ss
by engineer, are displayed.
Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error
C:32:01 Turn off the main power then back on. Trouble with hardware. SYSTEM ERROR
• The type of memory stick that cannot be

Replace the memory stick. used by this machine, is inserted.
C:13:01 MEDIA ERROR
Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828. • Data is damaged.
• Unformatted memory stick is inserted.
Flash LED
Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being
E:91:01 Flash display
flash unit. charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
E:61:00 *1
Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. —
E61:10 *1
Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit.
*1: The error display is given in two ways.
—4—
DSC-F828
MAIN PARTS
Note:
• Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service.
Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• The parts numbers of such as a cabinet are also appeared in this section.
Refer to the parts number mentioned below the name of parts to order.
1. ORNAMENTAL PARTS
LCD window adhesive sheet

3-087-155-01
LCD window
3-086-480-01
Jack cover
3-087-153-01
—5—
DSC-F828
Checking supplied accessories.

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.
Power cord (Main lead) (1) AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A) A/V connecting cable (1)
(AEP, E model) 0 1-477-533-51 1-824-111-11
0 1-769-608-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1)
(AUS model)
0 1-696-819-11
(UK, HK model)
0 1-783-374-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1) NP-FM50 battery pack (1)
(US, CND model) (not supplied)
0 1-790-107-22 USB cable (1)
Power cord (Main lead) (1) 1-827-038-11
(JE, J model)
Lens cap (1)
0 1-790-732-12
X-3952-016-1
(KR model)
0 1-776-985-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1) String assy cap
(CH model) X-3953-980-1
2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
0 1-782-476-13 (JE model)
1-569-007-12
CD-ROM
(SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1)
(US, CND, J model)
3-087-331-01 Lens hood (1)
CD-ROM 3-086-481-01 2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
(SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1) (E model)
(AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS, 1-569-008-12
CH model)
3-087-330-01
S-houlder strap (1)

3-071-638-11
Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A)
CD-ROM 1-543-798-21
(Image Data Converter) (1)
3-087-661-01
Other accessories
3-084-996-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J)
3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH)
(US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK)
3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP)
• Abbreviation
3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) CND : Canadian model
(AEP,E,JE) AUS : Australian model
3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP) CH : Chinese model
HK : Hong Kong model
3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE) KR : Korea model
(E,CH,JE,HK) JE : Tourist model
3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP) J : Japanese model
3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E)
3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR)
Note : Note :
3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW
0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
(ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/ Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/ specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)
—6—
DSC-F828
Sony EMCS Co. 2003L1600-1

9-876-279-41 ©2003.12
—8— Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
3-084-996-11(1)
Getting started ________________________
Shooting still images __________________
Digital Still Camera Viewing still images ___________________
Operating Instructions Deleting still images ___________________

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and
retain it for future reference. Before advanced operations _____________
Owner’s Record Advanced still image shooting____________

The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product. Advanced still image viewing_____________
Model No. DSC-F828
Still image editing ______________________
Serial No.
Still image printing ______________________
(PictBridge printer)
Enjoying movies________________________
Enjoying images on your computer ______
Troubleshooting ________________________
Additional information ___________________

DSC-F828
Index______________________________
© 2003 Sony Corporation
CAUTION
WARNING This symbol is intended to
You are cautioned that any changes or
alert the user to the presence
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do modifications not expressly approved in this
of important operating and
not expose the unit to rain or manual could void your authority to operate
maintenance (servicing)
this equipment.
moisture. instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance. Note:
CAUTION
If you have any questions about this product, This equipment has been tested and found to
The use of optical instruments with this
you may call: comply with the limits for a Class B digital
product will increase eye hazard.
Sony Customer Information Services Center device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
1-800-222-SONY (7669) These limits are designed to provide
of procedures other than those specified
reasonable protection against harmful
herein may result in hazardous radiation
The number below is for the FCC related interference in a residential installation. This
exposure.
matters only. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
For the Customers in the U.S.A. Regulatory Information and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
Declaration of Conformity communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
Trade Name: SONY
particular installation. If this equipment does
Model No.: DSC-F828
cause harmful interference to radio or
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc.
television reception, which can be determined
Address: 680 Kinderkamack
by turning the equipment off and on, the user
Road, Oradell, NJ
is encouraged to try to correct the interference
07649 U.S.A.
by one or more of the following measures:
Telephone No.: 201-930-6972
—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
—Increase the separation between the
This device complies with Part 15 of the
equipment and receiver.
This symbol is intended to FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
alert the user to the presence following two conditions: (1) This device
circuit different from that to which the
of uninsulated “dangerous may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
receiver is connected.
voltage” within the product’s this device must accept any interference
—Consult the dealer or an experienced
enclosure that may be of received, including interference that may
radio/TV technician for help.
sufficient magnitude to cause undesired operation.
The supplied interface cable must be used
constitute a risk of electric
with the equipment in order to comply with
shock to persons.
the limits for a digital device pursuant to
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
2
If the plug supplied with this equipment has a Notice
For the Customers in the U.S.A. detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the If static electricity or electromagnetism causes
and Canada fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never data transfer to discontinue midway (fail),
use the plug without the fuse cover. If you restart the application or disconnect and
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION should lose the fuse cover, please contact your connect the USB cable again.
BATTERIES nearest Sony service station.
Lithium-Ion batteries are Certain countries or regions may regulate
recyclable. disposal of the battery used to power this
You can help preserve our For the Customers in Europe product. Please consult with your local
environment by returning your authority.
This product has been tested and found
used rechargeable batteries to
compliant with the limits sets out in the EMC
the collection and recycling location nearest
Directive for using connection cables shorter
you.
than 3 meters (9.8 feet).
For more information regarding recycling of
rechargeable batteries, call toll free
1-800-822-8837, or visit
http://www.rbrc.org/
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking

Lithium-Ion batteries.
CAUTION Attention
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, The electromagnetic fields at the specific
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO frequencies may influence the picture and
WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. sound of this digital camera.
Notice for the customers in the

United Kingdom
A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is
fitted to this equipment for your safety and
convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be
replaced, a fuse of the same rating as the
supplied one and approved by ASTA or BSI to
BS 1362, (i.e., marked with or mark)
must be used.
3
Before using your camera
Trial recording Do not shake or strike the camera Remove dirt from the surface of the
Before you record one-time events, you may In addition to malfunctions and inability to flash
want to make a trial recording to make sure record images, this may render the recording If the dirt changes color or sticks to the
that the camera is working correctly. medium unusable or image data breakdown, surface of the flash due to the heat of the flash,
damage or loss may occur. sufficient light may not be emitted.
No compensation for contents of the
recording LCD screen, LCD finder (only models Do not get the camera wet
Contents of the recording cannot be with an LCD finder) and lens When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or
compensated for if recording or playback is • The LCD screen and the LCD finder are under similar conditions, be careful not to get
not possible due to a malfunction of your manufactured using extremely high- the camera wet. If water gets inside of the
camera or recording medium, etc. precision technology so over 99.99% of the camera, it may cause the camera to
pixels are operational for effective use. malfunction, sometimes beyond repair. If
Back up recommendation However, there may be some tiny black moisture condensation occurs, see page 143
To avoid the potential risk of data loss, always points and/or bright points (white, red, blue and follow the instructions on how to remove
copy (back up) data to a disk. or green in color) that constantly appear on it before using the camera.
the LCD screen and the LCD finder. These
points are normal in the manufacturing Do not expose the camera to sand or
Notes on image data compatibility
process and do not affect the recording in dust
• This camera conforms with the Design rule
for Camera File system universal standard any way. Using the camera in sandy or dusty locations
established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics • Be careful when placing the camera near a may cause a malfunction.
and Information Technology Industries window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
screen, the finder or the lens to direct
Do not aim the camera at the sun or
Association). other bright light
• Playback of images recorded with your sunlight for long periods may cause
malfunctions. This may cause irrecoverable damage to your
camera on other equipment and playback of
• Do not press the LCD screen hardly. The eyes or the malfunction of your camera.
images recorded or edited with other
equipment on your camera are not screen may be uneven and that may cause a
Note on locations where you can
guaranteed. malfunction.
• Images may be trailed on the LCD screen in
use the camera
a cold location. This is not a malfunction. Do not use the camera near a location that
Precaution on copyright generates strong radio waves or emits
Television programs, films, video tapes, and The zoom lens radiation. The camera may not be able to
other materials may be copyrighted. This camera is equipped with zoom lens. Be record or play back properly.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may careful not to bump the lens, and be careful
be contrary to the provision of the copyright not to apply force to it.
laws.
4
The pictures used in this manual Trademarks
The photographs used as examples of pictures • “Memory Stick,” , and “MagicGate
in this manual are reproduced images, and are Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony
not actual images shot using this camera. Corporation.
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony
About the Carl Zeiss lens Corporation.
This camera is equipped with a Carl Zeiss • “Memory Stick PRO” and
lens which is capable of reproducing fine are trademarks of Sony
images. The lens for this camera uses the Corporation.
MTF# measurement system for cameras • “MagicGate” and are
developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in trademarks of Sony Corporation.
Germany, and Sony Corporation, and offers • “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony
the same quality as other Carl Zeiss lenses. Corporation.
The lens for your camera is also T*-coated • Microsoft and Windows are registered
to suppress unwanted reflection and trademarks of the U.S. Microsoft
faithfully reproduce colors. Corporation in the United States and other
#
MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation
countries.
Transfer Function, a numeric value
• Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are
indicating the amount of light from a
trademarks or registered trademarks of
specific part of the subject gathered at the
Apple Computer, Inc.
corresponding position in the image.
• Pentium is a trademark or a registered
trademark of Intel Corporation.
• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
Corporation.
• Microdrive is a registered trademark of
Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the
United States and/or other countries.
• In addition, system and product names used
in this manual are, in general, trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective
developers or manufacturers. However, the
™ or ® marks are not used in all cases in this
manual.
5
Table of contents
Before using your camera ......................... 4 Changing the lens orientation............. 32 Selecting the recording folder.............51
Identifying the parts .................................. 9 Shooting close-ups – Macro............... 33
Using the self-timer............................ 34 Advanced still image
Getting started Using the flash.................................... 34 shooting
Inserting the date and time on a still
Charging the battery pack ....................... 14 image.............................................. 36 Manual features to photo-shooting
Using the AC Adaptor ............................ 17 Shooting according to scene conditions situations .....................................52
Using your camera abroad ...................... 17 – Scene Selection ........................... 37
Turning your camera on/off .................... 18 Exposure (shutter speed, aperture, and
How to use the multi-selector ................. 18 ISO sensitivity)
Viewing still images
Setting the date and time......................... 19 Shooting with Program auto ...................54
Viewing images on the screen of your Program Shift......................................54
Shooting still images camera ............................................ 39 Shooting with shutter speed priority mode
Viewing images on a TV screen............. 41 ........................................................55
Inserting and removing a recording medium
Shooting with aperture priority mode .....56
........................................................ 21
Deleting still images Shooting with manual exposure mode ....57
Switching the recording medium........ 21
Selecting the metering mode...................58
Inserting and removing a “Memory Deleting images ...................................... 43
Adjusting the exposure
Stick” .............................................. 22 Formatting a recording medium ............. 45
– EV adjustment .............................59
Inserting and removing a Microdrive/
Displaying a histogram .......................60
CF card ........................................... 23 Before advanced operations Shooting with the exposure fixed
Setting the still image size ...................... 24
How to setup and operate your camera – AE LOCK ....................................62
Image size and quality ............................ 25
........................................................ 47 Shooting three images with the exposure
Basic still image shooting
Changing menu settings ..................... 47 shifted – Exposure Bracket.............63
– Using auto mode.......................... 27
Changing items in the SET UP screen Selecting the ISO sensitivity – ISO.........64
Checking the last image shot
........................................................ 48 Focus
– Quick Review .............................. 29
How to use the command dial ............ 48 Choosing an auto focus method ..............65
Shooting images with the finder ......... 29
Deciding the still image quality.............. 49 Choosing a focus range finder frame
Indicators on the screen during shooting
Creating or selecting a folder ................. 50 – AF range finder............................65
........................................................ 30
Using the zoom feature....................... 30 Creating a new folder ......................... 50
6
Choosing a focus operation Shooting still images with audio files
Still image printing
– AF Mode......................................66 – Voice ........................................... 81
Focusing manually ..................................67
(PictBridge printer)
Flash Advanced still image viewing Connecting to a PictBridge printer..........93
Selecting a flash mode ............................68 Preparing the camera...........................93
Adjusting the flash level – Flash Level...70 Selecting the folder and playing back Connecting the camera to the printer
Using an external flash............................71 images – Folder .............................. 83 ........................................................93
Using the Sony Flash ..........................72 Enlarging a portion of a still image ........ 84 Printing images........................................94
Using a commercially available external Enlarging an image Printing index-images .............................96
flash ................................................72 – Playback zoom ............................ 84
Color Recording an enlarged image Enjoying movies
Adjusting color tones – White Balance...73 – Trimming..................................... 85
Selecting color reproduction – Color ......74 Playing back successive images Shooting movies ....................................100
Burst – Slide show ................................... 85 Viewing movies on the screen ..............101
Rotating still images – Rotate................. 86 Deleting movies.....................................102
Shooting images in succession................75
Shooting in Multi Burst mode Playing back images shot in Multi Burst Editing movies.......................................103
– Multi Burst...................................76 mode ............................................... 87 Cutting movies ..................................104
Playing back continuously.................. 87 Deleting unnecessary portions of movies
Others
Shooting in the dark ................................77 Playing back frame by frame ............. 87 ......................................................104
NightShot ............................................77
NightFraming......................................78 Still image editing Enjoying images on your
Shooting with special effects computer
Protecting images – Protect .................... 89
– Picture Effect ...............................79 Changing image size – Resize ................ 90 Copying images to your computer
Shooting still images in RAW mode Choosing images to print – For Windows users ....................105
– RAW ............................................79 – Print (DPOF) mark ...................... 91 Installing the USB driver ..................106
Shooting still images in TIFF mode Installing “Image Transfer” ..............107
– TIFF .............................................80 Installing “ImageMixer” ...................108
Shooting still images for e-mail Connecting the camera to your computer
– E-Mail ..........................................81 ......................................................109
7
Copying images using “Image Transfer” On “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ........ 146
...................................................... 110 Specifications ....................................... 147
Changing “Image Transfer” settings Display window.................................... 149
...................................................... 111 The LCD/finder screen ......................... 150
Copying images without using Quick reference chart ........................... 155
“Image Transfer” .......................... 111
Viewing the images on your computer Index
...................................................... 113
Image file storage destinations and file Index ..................................................... 158
names............................................ 114
Viewing an image previously copied to a
computer ....................................... 116
Copying images to your computer
– For Macintosh users .................. 117
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting .................................... 119
Warnings and messages ........................ 130
Self-diagnosis display – If a code starting
with an alphabet letter appears ..... 133
Additional information
The number of images that can be saved/
shooting time ................................ 134
Menu items ........................................... 137
SET UP items........................................ 140
Precautions............................................ 143
The “Memory Stick”............................. 144
The Microdrive ..................................... 145
8
Identifying the parts S NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING
button (77)
T FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL) switch
See the pages in parentheses for details of
(67)
operation.
• Pressing the (Display window backlight)
1 button turns on the backlight in the display
q;
2 window for about seven seconds.
3 qa
4
qs
5
qd
6 qf
7 qg
8 qh
9 qj
qk
ql
w;
A Display window J Flash emitter (34)
B WB (White balance) button (73) K Infrared ray emitter (77)
C (Display window backlight) L Speaker
button M Advanced accessory shoe (71)
D (Exposure) button (57, 59) N OPEN (FLASH) switch (69)
E Shutter button (27) O (Metering mode) button (58)
F Hologram AF emitter (35, 140) P (Flash) button (68)
G Self-timer lamp (34) Q /BRK (Burst/Bracket) button
H Zoom ring (30) (63, 75, 76)
I Manual focus ring (67) R (Macro) button (33)
9
SET UP: To set the SET UP items
:To shoot movies
:To view or edit images
K AE LOCK/ (Delete) button (43,
62)
1 q;
L Command dial (48)
2 qa M OPEN (CF) lever (23)
3 qs N CF card cover (23)
qd O CF card eject lever (24)
4
5
6 qf
7
8 qg
9
A MENU button (47, 137) J Mode dial (27)

B (Flash) lamp (68) :To shoot still images in auto
C Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) (18) adjustment mode
D Jack cover (14, 17) P: To shoot still images in
E A/V OUT (MONO) jack (41) program auto mode
F (USB) jack (109) S: To shoot in shutter speed
G DC IN jack (14, 17) priority mode
H /CF (“Memory Stick”/CF A: To shoot in aperture priority
card) switch (21) mode
I Access lamp (22) M: To shoot in manual exposure
mode
SCN: To shoot in Scene
Selection mode
10
7
1
8
2
3
4 9
5
q;
6
A LCD screen
B Finder (29)
C Finder adjustment lever (29)
D FINDER/LCD switch (29)
E (Screen status) button (30)
F / (Self-timer/Index) button
(34, 40)
G POWER lamp (18)
H POWER switch (18)
I (Digital zoom/Playback zoom)
button (30, 84)
J 7 (Quick review) button (29)
11
A Hook for shoulder strap
1 5 B Tripod receptacle
C Microphone
D Lens
2 E ACC (Accessory) jack
6
F Battery/“Memory Stick” cover
(14)
7 G RESET button (119)
3
H Battery eject lever (15)
4 8 I Hook for shoulder strap
• Use the ACC (accessory) jack to connect an

9 external flash or the remote control tripod.
• Use a tripod with a screw length of less than
Attaching the lens cap and the shoulder strap 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly
secure the camera to tripods having longer
screws, and may damage the camera.
Lens cap
Shoulder strap
12
Attaching the lens hood Storing the lens hood • You can attach the lens cap with the lens hood
attached.
When you shoot in bright lighting The lens hood can be attached in the reverse
conditions, such as outdoors, we direction to store it with the camera when it
recommend that you use the lens hood to is not in use.
reduce the image quality deterioration 1 Position the lens hood as shown below,
caused by unnecessary light.
by aligning the mark on the lens hood
1 Position the lens hood as shown below, and the x mark on the lens, and attach
by aligning the mark on the lens hood the hood to the lens.
and the x mark on the lens, and attach
the hood to the lens.
2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it

clicks.
2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it
clicks.
13
Getting started
Charging the battery pack
Battery eject
lever Jack cover
3
1 DC plug
2 b mark
1
2 2 3 AC Adaptor
, Open the battery/“Memory , Install the battery pack, then , Open the jack cover and
Stick” cover. close the battery/“Memory connect the AC Adaptor
Stick” cover. (supplied) to the DC IN jack of
Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.
your camera.
Insert the battery pack with the b mark
• Be sure to turn off your camera when facing toward the battery compartment as Open the cover in the arrow direction as
charging the battery pack (page 18).
illustrated. illustrated above. Connect the plug with the
• Your camera operates with the
“InfoLITHIUM” NP-FM50 battery pack (M Make sure the battery pack is firmly v mark facing up.
Series) (supplied). You can use only M Series inserted all the way, then close the cover.
battery pack (page 146). • Do not short the DC plug of the AC Adaptor
• The battery pack is easily inserted by pushing with a metallic object, as this may cause a
the battery eject lever at the front of the battery malfunction.
compartment to the front side. • Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a
dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. Use
of the dirty plug may not properly charge the
battery pack.
14
– [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to Battery remaining indicators
Getting started
2 To a wall outlet (wall socket) [Normal]
The battery remaining indicators on the screen or
– Using a “Memory Stick”
on the display window show the remaining
Power cord – Not using the NightShot or NightFraming
(mains lead) shooting or viewing time.
function.
• After charging the battery pack, disconnect the 80min
AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack of your
1 camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).
To remove the battery pack

4
LCD screen/Finder Display window
, Connect the power cord (mains Battery eject lever • The battery remaining time on the screen or on
lead) to the AC Adaptor and the display window may not be correct under
certain circumstances or conditions.
then to a wall outlet (wall
• When you switch the FINDER/LCD switch or
socket). /CF switch, it takes about one minute for
the correct battery remaining time to appear.
During charging, the battery mark in the
display window flashes, and after charging
is completed, “Full” appears. Charging time
Approximate time to charge a completely
The available shooting time is indicated Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. discharged battery pack using the AC
Slide the battery eject lever in the direction Adaptor at a temperature of 25°C (77°F).
of the arrow, and remove the battery pack.
Battery pack Charging time
(min.)
• Be careful not to drop the battery pack when
removing it. NP-FM50 (supplied) Approx. 150
• The available shooting time on the display

window is calculated as if the camera were used
under the following conditions:
– The mode dial is set to
15
Number of images and battery Viewing still images2) • The battery life and the number of images
recordable or viewable does not depend on the
life that can be recorded/ NP-FM50 (supplied)
image size setting.
viewed Recording No. of Battery life • The number of images is almost the same
The tables show the approximate number of medium images (min.) whether you use the finder or the LCD screen
images and the battery life that can be recorded/ “Memory Stick” Approx. 9400 Approx. 470 for shooting/viewing images.
viewed when you shoot images in normal mode Microdrive Approx. 5800 Approx. 290 • When using a CF card, the battery life and the
with a fully charged battery pack at a temperature number of images recordable or viewable may
2) Viewing single images in order at about three
of 25°C (77°F). The numbers of images that can differ.
be recorded or viewed take into account changing second intervals
the optional “Memory Stick” or Microdrive as
necessary. Note that the actual numbers may be Shooting movies3)
less than indicated depending on the conditions of
NP-FM50 (supplied)
use.
“Memory Stick” Microdrive
Continuous
Shooting still images Approx. 200 Approx. 160
shooting
Under the average conditions1)
3)
NP-FM50 (supplied) Shooting continuously at [160] image size
Recording No. of Battery life • The number of images and the battery life that
medium images (min.) can be recorded/viewed are decreased under the
“Memory Stick” Approx. 370 Approx. 185 following conditions:
Microdrive Approx. 350 Approx. 175 – The surrounding temperature is low
1) Shooting
– The flash is used
in the following situations: – The camera has been turned on and off many
– (P. Quality) is set to [Fine] times
– [AF Mode] is set to [Monitor] – The zoom is used frequently
– Shooting one time every 30 seconds – The NightShot or NightFraming function is
– The zoom is switched alternately between the activated
W and T ends – [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to
– The flash strobes once every two times [Bright] in the SET UP settings
– The power turns on and off once every ten – The battery power is low.
times The battery capacity decreases as you use it
more and more and as time passes
(page 147).
16
Using the AC Adaptor Using your camera
abroad
Power sources
2 To a wall outlet
Getting started
(wall socket) You can use your camera in any country or
Jack cover
region with the supplied AC Adaptor within
Power cord
100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a
(mains lead)
commercially available AC plug adaptor
DC plug
[a], if necessary, depending on the design of
1 the wall outlet (wall socket) [b].
AC-L15A/L15B
1 AC Adaptor 2
, Open the jack cover, then , Connect the power cord (mains
connect the AC Adaptor lead) to the AC Adaptor and to
(supplied) to the DC IN jack of a wall outlet (wall socket). • Do not use an electrical transformer (travel
converter), as this may cause a malfunction.
the camera.
• When you have finished using the AC Adaptor,
Open the jack cover in the arrow direction disconnect it from the DC IN jack of the
as illustrated above. Connect the plug with camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).
the v mark facing up. • The set is not disconnected from the AC power
source (mains) as long as it is connected to the
wall outlet (wall socket), even if the unit itself
• Connect the AC Adaptor to an easily accessible
has been turned off.
wall outlet (wall socket) close by. If any trouble
occurs while using the adaptor, immediately
shut off the power by disconnecting the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket).
17
Turning your camera on/off How to use the
multi-selector
The Auto Power Off function Camera 1
If no tasks are performed for about three AF Mode:

Digital Zoom:
Monitor
Precision
Date/Time: Off
minutes when shooting, viewing images, or Red Eye Reduction: Off
Hologram AF: Auto
setting up the camera while using the Auto Review: Off
SELECT
battery pack, power is automatically shut
POWER
switch
off to preserve battery power. Setup 2
File Number:
However, in the following circumstances, USB Connect:
Video Out: OK
POWER even if the battery pack is being used to Clock Set: Cancel
lamp power the camera, the Auto Power Off

function will not work.
• Movies are being played back
, Slide the POWER switch in the To change the current settings of the
• A slide show is being shown
direction of the arrow. camera, bring up the menu or the SET UP
• A cable is connected to the (USB) jack
screen (pages 47, 48), and use the multi-
The POWER lamp lights in green and the or the A/V OUT (MONO) jack
selector to make the changes.
power is on. When you turn on the camera When setting up the menu, move the multi-
for the first time, the Clock Set screen selector to v/V/b/B to select the item or
appears (page 19). the setting and make the setting.
When setting up the SET UP, move the
To turn off the power multi-selector to v/V/b/B to select the
Slide the POWER switch in the direction of item or the setting and press the center of
the arrow again, the POWER lamp goes out, the multi-selector to make the setting.
and the camera turns off.
18
Setting the date and time
Getting started
Clock Set Clock Set
Mode dial
Y/M/D Y/M/D
M/D/Y M/D/Y
D/M/Y D/M/Y
2003 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 OK 2003 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 OK
POWER AM
Cancel
AM
Cancel
switch
1 2 3
, Set the mode dial to . , Slide the POWER switch in the , Select the desired date format
direction of the arrow to turn by moving the multi-selector to
• You can carry out this operation even when the on the power. v/V, then press the center.
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN, or
. The POWER lamp lights in green and the You can select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/
• To set the time and the date again, set the mode Clock Set screen appears on the screen. day), [M/D/Y], and [D/M/Y].
dial to SET UP, select [Clock Set] in (Setup
2) (pages 48, 142), then proceed from Step 3.
• If the rechargeable button battery, which
provides the power for saving the time data, is
ever fully discharged (page 144), the Clock Set
screen will appear again. When this happens,
reset the date and time by starting from Step 3
above.
19
Clock Set Clock Set Clock Set
Y/M/D Y/M/D Y/M/D
M/D/Y M/D/Y M/D/Y
D/M/Y D/M/Y D/M/Y
2003 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 OK 2004 / 1 / 1 10 : 00 OK 2004 / 1 / 1 10 : 30 OK
AM AM AM
Cancel Cancel Cancel
4 5 6
, Select the year, month, day, , Set the desired numerical , Move the multi-selector to B to
hour, or minute item you want value by moving the multi- select [OK], then press the
to set by moving the multi- selector to v/V, then press the center.
selector to b/B. center.
The date and time are set and the clock will
v is shown above and V is shown below the After setting the current numerical value, start to keep time.
selected item. set the next item. Repeat Steps 4 and 5
until all of the items have been set. • To cancel the setting process, select [Cancel],
then press the center.
• If you select [D/M/Y] in Step 3, set the time
on a 24- hour cycle.
• 12:00 AM stands for midnight and 12:00 PM
stands for noon.
20
Shooting still images
Inserting and removing a recording medium Switching the recording
medium

/CF switch
“Memory Stick” Microdrive/

CompactFlash
You can use a “Memory Stick,” • Copying between media cannot be done with , Select the recording medium
this camera.
Microdrive, or CompactFlash card (CF with the /CF switch.
• For more information about the “Memory
card) as a recording medium. Stick,” see page 144.
• The Microdrive is a compact and lightweight
: When recording images onto a
Microdrive hard disk drive that complies with “Memory Stick” or playing back
Hitachi Global Storage Technologies, Inc. CompactFlash Type II standards. For more images from a “Memory Stick.”
DSCM-11000 (1 GB) information about the Microdrive, see page CF : When recording images onto a
145. Microdrive/CF card or playing back
• Before using a Microdrive/CF card, be sure to
We have checked the compatibility of CF images from a Microdrive/CF card.
format it using this camera. Otherwise,
cards compliant with CompactFlash Type I satisfactory performance may not be obtained
and Type II, however, we cannot guarantee (page 45).
proper operation of all CF cards.
21
Inserting and removing a “Memory Stick”
Terminal side Label side

3
2
Access lamp
1
2 2 3
, Open the battery/“Memory , Insert the “Memory Stick.” , Close the battery/“Memory
Stick” cover. Stick” cover.
Insert the “Memory Stick” all the way in
Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow. until it clicks as shown in the illustration. To remove the “Memory Stick”
Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover,
• Whenever you insert a “Memory Stick,” push it then push the “Memory Stick” to pop it out.
as far as it can go. If you do not insert it
correctly, a proper recording or playback may
• Whenever the access lamp is lit, the
not be carried out.
camera is recording or reading out an
image. Never remove the “Memory
Stick” or turn off the power at this time.
The data may be corrupted.
22
Inserting and removing a Microdrive/CF card

Front (The v mark-
1 2 printed side) 3
, Open the CF card cover. , Insert the Microdrive/CF card. , Close the CF card cover.
Slide the OPEN (CF) lever in the Insert the Microdrive/CF card all the way in
• Close the CF card cover properly, otherwise
direction of the arrow. as shown in the illustration. you cannot record or play back images using
the Microdrive/CF card.
• Whenever you insert a Microdrive/CF card,
push it as far as it can go. If you do not insert it
correctly, a proper recording or playback may
not be carried out.
23
Setting the still image size
To remove the Microdrive/CF card

Open the CF card cover, then push the CF 8M 8M
card eject lever so that the Microdrive/CF 3:2

5M
card is ejected. 3M
1M
8M 8M 8M
Image Size 3:2 3:2
Mode 5M 5M 5M
3M 3M
1M 1M
Image Size Image Size
Mode Mode
MENU
1 2
, Set the mode dial to and , Select (Image Size) by
CF card eject turn on the power, then press moving the multi-selector to b/
Access lamp lever MENU. B, then select the desired
image size by moving the
The menu appears.
• Note that the Microdrive may be heated right
multi-selector to v/V.
after using the camera. • You can carry out this operation even when the
The image size is set.
• Whenever the access lamp is lit, the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN.
camera is recording or reading out an After the setting is completed, press
image. Never remove the Microdrive/CF MENU. The menu disappears from the
card or turn off the power at this time. screen.
The data may be corrupted or the
Microdrive/CF card may become • For more information about the image size, see
unusable. page 25.
• This setting is maintained even when the power
is turned off.
24
Image size and quality
You can choose image size (number of Image size Examples

pixels) and image quality (compression 8M 1) (3264×2448) Larger • For storing important images or printing A3 size or fine A4 size
ratio) based on the kind of images you want 3:2 2) (3264×2176) images.
to shoot. The larger you make the image

5M (2592×1944) • For printing A4 size or fine A5 size images.
size and the higher you make the image
3M (2048×1536)
quality, the better your image, but also the
1M (1280×960) • For printing postcard size images.
larger the amount of data needed to preserve
your image. This means you can save fewer VGA (640×480) • For shooting a lot of images, attaching images to e-mail, or
posting images to your home page.
images in your recording medium. Smaller
Choose an image size and quality level 1) The default setting is [8M]. This size can give the highest image quality using this camera.
appropriately for the kind of images you 2) This option records images in a horizontal to vertical proportion of 3:2 to match the size of the print
want to shoot. paper used.
The number of images that can be saved in a “Memory Stick”3)

The number of images that can be saved in Fine (Standard)4) mode are shown below. (Units:
number of images)
Capacity
Image 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
size
8M 4 (7) 8 (15) 16 (30) 32 (60) 59 (109) 121 (223) 247 (456)
3:2 4 (7) 8 (15) 16 (30) 32 (60) 59 (109) 121 (223) 247 (456)
5M 6 (11) 12 (23) 25 (48) 51 (96) 92 (174) 188 (354) 384 (723)
3M 10 (18) 20 (37) 41 (74) 82 (149) 148 (264) 302 (537) 617 (1097)
1M 24 (46) 50 (93) 101 (187) 202 (376) 357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694)
5928
VGA 97 (243) 196 (491) 394 (985) 790 (1975) 1428 (3571) 2904 (7261)
(14821)
3) When [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal]
For the number of images that can be saved in other modes, see pages 134, 135.
4) For more information about the image quality (compression ratio) mode, see page 49.
25
The number of images that can • When the images recorded using other Sony
devices are played back, the image size
be saved in a Microdrive3) indication may be different from the actual
The number of images that can be saved in image size.
Fine (Standard)4) mode are shown below. • When the images are viewed on the screen of
(Units: number of images) the camera, they all look the same size.
• Number of shooting images can differ from
Capacity these values according to shooting conditions.
Image 1G (DSCM-11000) • When the remaining number of images
size recordable is more than 9999, “>9999” is
indicated on the screen. And when it is more
8M 273 (505) than 999, “999” is indicated on the display
3:2 273 (505) window.
• You can resize the images later (Resize
5M 426 (801)
function, see page 90).
3M 684 (1217)
1M 1643 (2988)
VGA 6573 (16434)
3) When [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal]
For the number of images that can be saved in
other modes, see page 136.
4) For more information about the image quality
(compression ratio) mode, see page 49.
26
Basic still image shooting – Using auto mode
80 min 8M FINE 101

Mode dial 98

MAF 250 F2.0 0 EV
AE/AF lock indicator

Flashes in green t
1 2 3 Remains on
, Set the mode dial to , and , Hold the camera steadily with , Press and hold the shutter
turn on the camera. both hands and position a button halfway down.
subject in the center of the
The recording folder name is indicated on The camera beeps. When the AE/AF lock
the screen for about five seconds. focus frame. indicator stops flashing and remains on, the
Remove the lens cap. camera is ready for shooting. (The screen
• The minimum focal distance to a subject is may be frozen for a split second depending
50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (W)/60 cm (23 5/8 inches)
• Select the recording medium using the / on the subject.)
CF switch (page 21). (T). To shoot subjects at distances closer than
this, use the macro mode (page 33). When the surroundings are dark, the flash
• You can create a new folder in the recording
• The frame indicated on the screen shows the automatically pops up and strobes.
medium and select the folder for storing images
(page 50). focus adjustment range. (AF range finder, see
page 65.) • If you release your finger from the shutter
button, shooting will be canceled.
• When the camera does not beep, the AF
adjustment is not complete. You can continue to
shoot, but the focus is not set properly (except
in Continuous AF, page 66).
27
Mode dial for still image M (Manual exposure)
80 min 8M 101
97 shooting You can manually adjust the shutter speed
When shooting still images with your and the aperture value (page 57). In
camera, you can choose from the following addition, you can set the desired shooting
functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).
shooting methods.
MAF
(Auto adjustment mode) SCN (Scene Selection)
You can select from the following modes to
The focus, exposure and white balance are
automatically adjusted to allow easy shoot according to the scene conditions
4 shooting. The image quality is set to [Fine] (page 37).
– (Twilight mode)
(page 49).
, Press the shutter button fully – (Twilight portrait mode)
– (Landscape mode)
down. P (Program auto shooting) – (Portrait mode)
The shutter clicks, the shooting is Shooting adjustment is automatically In addition, you can set the desired shooting
completed, and the still image is saved in carried out just as in the auto adjustment functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).
the recording medium. mode. However, you can intentionally
adjust the focus, exposure, etc. In addition,
• When you are shooting with the battery pack, if you can set the desired functions using the
no tasks are performed for a while with the menu (pages 47 and 137).
camera turned on, power is automatically shut
off to preserve battery power (page 18). S (Shutter speed priority)
You can select the shutter speed (page 55).
In addition, you can set the desired shooting
A (Aperture priority)
You can select the aperture value (page 56).
In addition, you can set the desired shooting
28
Checking the last image Shooting images with the
shot – Quick Review finder
About Auto Focus 80 min 8M
101 8/8
When you try to shoot a subject that is hard Review
to focus on, the AE/AF lock indicator will

change to flashing slowly and the AE lock FINDER/LCD
beep does not sound (except in Continuous switch
AF, page 66). 101-0008 2004 1 1 10:30PM
The Auto Focus function may be difficult to

use with in the following subjects. In such Finder
adjustment
cases, release the shutter button, then try to
lever
recompose the shot and focus again.
• The subject is distant from the camera and dark
• The contrast between the subject and its , Press 7 (quick review). With the FINDER/LCD switch, you can
background is poor choose to shoot either using the finder or the
• The subject is seen through glass, such as a To return to shooting mode, press the LCD screen. When you use the finder, the
window shutter button lightly or press 7 (quick image does not appear on the LCD screen.
• A fast-moving subject review) again. Adjust the finder adjustment lever until the
• The subject has a reflection, such as that from a
mirror, or there is a luminous body and a
image appears clearly within the finder,
To delete the image displayed on the then shoot the image.
lustrous subject
screen
• A flashing subject
• A backlit subject. 1 Press (delete).
2 Select [Delete] by moving the multi-
There are two Auto Focus functions: “AF selector to v, then press the center.
range finder frame” which sets the focus The image is deleted.
position according to the subject position
and size, and “AF mode” which sets when
the camera starts and stops focusing on.
See page 65 for details.
29
Indicators on the screen during shooting Using the zoom feature
Indicators on
T (telephoto) W (wide-angle)
80min 8M 101
80 min 80 min
98 8M 101
98
8M 101
98
x5.0 x1.1
MAF
r
Histogram on
(Image information is Zoom ring
displayed during playback)
Each time you press (screen status), the 80min 8M 101 , Turn the zoom ring to choose
98
display changes in the following order. the desired image size for
shooting.
• The status of the screen changes between
indicators-on and indicators-off when playing You can zoom in up to 7.1× using the
back or shooting movies. MAF
optical zoom.
• For a detailed description of the indicators, see
r
page 150. The minimum distance needed to
Indicators off
• For a detailed description of the histogram, see focus on a subject
page 60. When the zoom is set all the way to
is turned off.
the W side:
approximately 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) from
the end of the lens
MAF When the zoom is set all the way to
the T side:
approximately 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from
the end of the lens
• When not using the camera, retract the lens in
by setting the lens to its W-end position to
protect it.
30
Digital zoom • The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting Precision digital zoom
in RAW mode (page 79). Enlarges the image two times larger than
Enlarges the image using digital processing. • AF range finder frame is not shown when using
Pressing (digital zoom) activates the the optical zoom scaling now selected. The
the digital zoom. The AF range finder frame

digital zoom. There are two modes in the indicator flashes and a centrally-located subject maximum zoom scaling is about 14×
digital zoom function. One is “Precision has priority when the camera is focusing. regardless of the selected image size. Since
digital zoom” and the other is “Smart the precision digital zoom cuts part of the
zoom.” Because each mode uses different image and enlarges the rest, the image
methods and has different magnifying quality deteriorates.
capacity, choose the mode according to Set [Digital Zoom] to [Precision] in the SET
your shooting. UP settings (page 140).
The default setting is [Precision].
The icon changes as follows according
to the zoom mode.
Optical zoom:
Precision digital zoom:
Smart zoom:
31
Changing the lens
orientation
Smart zoom
You can zoom in the image with much less image quality deterioration. You can use the smart
zoom as though it were the optical zoom.
The zoom scaling becomes the number that multiplies the following smart zoom scaling by
the optical zoom scaling now selected.
Set [Digital Zoom] to [Smart] in the SET UP settings (page 140).
The maximum zoom scale is as follows and it depends on the image size. The zoom scale
displayed on the screen is an approximate value.
Lens part
5M
x1.3 x8.9
You can adjust the angle by turning the lens
3M part upward up to 70 degrees and downward
x1.6 x11 up to 30 degrees.
1M
x2.6 x18
VGA
x5.1 x36
x5 x10 x15
• When the image size is set to [8M] or [3:2], the smart zoom does not work.
• The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting in Multi Burst mode (page 76). When using the smart
zoom, selecting (Multi Burst) using the /BRK button cancels the smart zoom.
• When using the smart zoom, the image on the screen may look rough. However, this phenomenon has no
effect on the recorded image.
To cancel the digital zoom

Press (digital zoom) again. The zoom scaling returns to the number that was in effect using
the optical zoom.
32
Shooting close-ups – Macro
80 min 8M 101 80 min 8M 101

98 97

MAF
MAF
1 2
For close-ups of subjects like flowers or , Set the mode dial to , and , Center the subject in the frame,
insects, shoot using the macro feature. You press (macro). and press and hold the shutter
can shoot subjects approaching up to 2 cm button halfway down, then
(13/16 inches) when the zoom is set to its W- The (macro) indicator appears on the
screen. press the shutter button fully
end. However, the available focus distance
depends on the zoom position. We down.
recommend that you set the zoom to its W- • You can carry out this operation even when the
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN (other than To return to normal shooting
end during shooting. Press (macro) again. The indicator
(Twilight mode) or (Landscape
When the zoom is set all the way to mode)) or . disappears from the screen.
the W side:
Approx. 2 cm (13/16 inches) from the end of • When shooting in macro mode, the focus range
is very narrow and you may not be able to focus
the lens
on the whole of the subject.
When the zoom is set all the way to • When shooting in macro mode, the focus
the T side: adjustment becomes slower to accurately focus
on a close subject.
Approx. 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from the end
of the lens
• We recommend that you use Flexible Spot AF

(page 65).
33
Using the self-timer Using the flash
80 min 8M 101 80 min 8M FINE 101 Flash emitter

98 98
Hologram AF
emitter
MAF MAF 250 F2.0 0 EV
1 2
, Set the mode dial to , and , Center the subject in the frame, The flash automatically pops up and strobes
press / (self-timer). and press and hold the shutter when the surroundings are dark. Close the
button halfway down, then flash by hand after using it.
The (self-timer) indicator appears on the
screen. press the shutter button fully
• When [ISO] is set to [Auto] in the menu
down. settings, the recommended shooting distance
• You can carry out this operation even when the using the flash is approx. 0.5 m to 4.5 m
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN or . The self-timer lamp (page 9) will flash, and (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m
you will hear a beeping sound. The image to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T).
will be shot after approximately 10 seconds. • Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks the
flash light.
• While the flash is being charged, the (flash)
To cancel the self-timer during the
lamp flashes. After charging is completed, the
operation lamp goes out.
Press / (self-timer) again. The • You can also select the following flash modes:
indicator dissapears from the screen. (Forced flash), (Slow synchro), and
(No flash). For details on these modes, see page
• If you stand in front of the camera and press the 68.
shutter button, the focus and the exposure may
not be correctly set.
34
Recording images with the may not be achieved. In this case, wipe the About Hologram AF
hologram AF emitter with a dry cloth.
hologram AF • Do not block the hologram AF emitter during “Hologram AF (Auto-Focus)” is an AF fill
The hologram AF is fill light to focus more recording. light system that applies laser holograms to

easily on a subject in dark surroundings. • The AF range finder frame is not displayed. AF enable you to shoot still images in dark
ON appears on the screen and the hologram
range finder frame indicator flashes and the places. The Hologram AF system uses
centrally-located subject has priority to focus gentler radiation than conventional high-
AF emits red light when the shutter button
on.
is pressed halfway until the focus is locked. brightness LEDs or lamps, thus satisfying
• When you attach the supplied lens hood to the
camera, the hologram AF light is blocked. Laser Class 1* specifications and
• The hologram AF does not function when maintaining higher safety for human eyes.
[SCN] (Scene) is set to (Twilight mode) or No safety problems will be caused by
(Landscape mode). looking directly into the hologram AF
emitter at a close range. However, it is not
recommended to do so, because you may
experience such effects like several minutes
of residual image and dazzling, that you
When not using this function, set
encounter after looking into a flashlight.
[Hologram AF] to [Off] in the SET UP
settings (page 140). * Hologram AF satisfies Class 1 (time base
30 000 seconds), specified in JIS (Japan), IEC
• If hologram AF light does not reach the subject
(EU), and FDA (US) industry standards.
sufficiently or the subject has weak contrast,
Complying with these standards identifies the
focus will not be achieved. (An approximate
laser product as safe, under the condition that a
distance of 0.5 m to 5.0 m (19 3/4 inches to
human can look at the laser light either directly
16 feet 4 7/8 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.5 m
or focused through a lens for 30 000 seconds.
(23 5/8 inches to 11 feet 5 7/8 inches) (T) is
recommended.)
• Focus is achieved as long as hologram AF light
reaches the subject, even if the light is slightly
off the center of the subject.
• When adjusting the focus manually (page 67),
the hologram AF does not function.
• If the hologram AF emitter is dirty, the
hologram AF light may be dimmed and focus
35
Inserting the date and time on a still image
Camera 1 Camera 1
AF Mode: Monitor AF Mode: Day&Time
Digital Zoom: Precision Digital Zoom: Date Camera 1
Date/Time: Off Date/Time: Off AF Mode: Monitor
Red Eye Reduction: Off Red Eye Reduction: Digital Zoom: Precision
Hologram AF: Auto Hologram AF: Date/Time: Date
Auto Review: Off Auto Review: Red Eye Reduction: Off
SELECT Hologram AF: Auto
Auto Review: Off
PAGE SELECT
1 2 3
, Set the mode dial to SET UP. , Select 1 (Camera 1) by , Select the date and time setting
moving the multi-selector to v, by moving the multi-selector to
The SET UP screen appears.
then move to B. v/V, then press the center.
• The date and time cannot be inserted in Multi Select [Date/Time] by moving
Day&Time: Inserts the date and the time of
Burst mode. the multi-selector to v/V, then
• When images are shot with the date and time shooting into the image
inserted, the date and time cannot be removed
move to B. Date: Inserts the year, the month and the
later. date of shooting into the image
• When shooting images with the date and time Off: Does not insert date/time data into the
inserted, the actual date and time are not image
displayed on the screen, and is displayed
on the screen instead. The actual date and time After the setting has been completed, set the
are indicated in red on the lower-right corner mode dial to to shoot your image.
when the image is played back.
• You can shoot even when the mode dial is set to
P, S, A, M or SCN.
• When you chose [Date], the date will be
inserted in the order set in “Setting the date and
time” (page 19).
is turned off.
36
Shooting according to scene conditions – Scene Selection
Twilight mode Twilight portrait mode Landscape mode Portrait mode

When shooting night scenes, shooting Twilight portrait mode Portrait mode
people at night, shooting landscapes, or Use this mode when shooting people in the Backgrounds blur away, and the subject is
shooting portraits, use the modes listed foreground at night. This mode allows you sharpened.
below to increase the quality of your to shoot images of people in the foreground
images. with distinct outlines without losing the
feeling that you are shooting at night.
Twilight mode Because the shutter speed is slow, it is
Under dark lighting conditions, you can recommended that you use a tripod.
shoot a distant night view. However, • The flash is set to (Slow synchro).
• You cannot shoot in Exposure Bracket, Burst,
because the shutter speed is slower under
or Multi Burst mode.
these conditions, we recommend you use a
tripod.
• You cannot use the following functions in Landscape mode
Twilight mode: Focuses on images far away, so is
– Macro mode shooting convenient for shooting landscapes at a
– Shooting with the flash
distance.
– Exposure Bracket
• You cannot shoot in macro mode.
– Burst mode shooting
• The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No
– Multi Burst mode shooting
flash).
37
Scene Scene
MENU SCN ISO Mode PFX SCN ISO Mode BRK
1 2 3
, Set the mode dial to SCN, then , Select [SCN] (Scene) by , Select the desired mode by
press MENU. moving the multi-selector to b. moving the multi-selector to v/
V.
The menu appears.
The mode is set.
When the setting is complete, press MENU
so that the menu disappears from the screen.
To cancel the Scene Selection

Set the mode dial to a different mode.
• When the shutter speed becomes slower than

particular time, the NR slow shutter function
(page 55) activates automatically. In such cases,
shooting may take some time.
is turned off.
38
Viewing images on the screen of your Viewing on the single-image
camera screen
80 min 8M
101 8/9
Single screen Index screen
80 min 8M
101 8/9

101-0008 2004 1 1 10:30PM
BACK/NEXT VOLUME
101-0008 2004 1 1 10:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY

BACK/NEXT VOLUME
1
You can view images shot with the camera almost immediately on the screen. You can select , Set the mode dial to , and
the following two methods for viewing images. turn on the camera.
Single screen The newest image in the selected recording
You can view one image at a time, occupying the entire screen. folder (page 83) is displayed.
Index screen
• The image may be too rough for image
Nine images are displayed simultaneously in separate panels on the screen.
processing right after it is displayed.
• To select the recording medium, use the /
• You can easily view the next/previous image by turning the command dial. CF switch (page 21).
• For details on the movies, see page 101.
• For a detailed description of the screen indicators, see page 153.
39
Viewing on the index screen
80 min 8M
101 3/9
101-0003 2004 1 1 10:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY

BACK/NEXT VOLUME
/
2
, Select the desired still image , Press / (index).
by moving the multi-selector to
The display switches to the Index screen.
b/B.
b : Displays the previous image. To display the next (previous) Index
B : Displays the next image. screen
Move the multi-selector to v/V/b/B to
move the yellow frame up/down/left/right.
To return to the single-image screen

Press / (index) again, or press the
center of the multi-selector.
40
Viewing images on a TV screen
80 min 8M
101 2/9
A/V
101-0002 2004 1 1 10:30PM
connecting BACK/NEXT VOLUME

cable
(supplied)
A/V OUT
(MONO)
1 jack 2 TV/Video switch 3
, Connect the supplied A/V , Turn on the TV, and set the TV/ , Set the mode dial to , and
connecting cable to the A/V Video switch to “Video.” turn on the camera.
OUT (MONO) jack of the
Move the multi-selector to b/B to select the
camera and the audio/video • The name and location of this switch may differ
depending on your TV. For details, refer to the desired image.
input jacks of the TV. operating instructions supplied with the TV.
• When using the camera abroad, it may be
If your TV has stereo type input jacks, necessary to switch the video output signal to
connect the audio plug (black) of the A/V match that of your TV system (page 142).
connecting cable to the Lch audio input • To select the recording medium, use the /
jack. CF switch (page 21).
• Turn off both the camera and the TV before

connecting the camera and the TV with the A/V
connecting cable.
41
Watching images on a TV screen SECAM system
If you want to view images on a TV, you Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Hungary, Iran,
need a TV having a video input jack and the Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
A/V connecting cable (supplied).
The color system of the TV must match as
that of your digital still camera. Check the
following list:
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central
America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador,
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru,
Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the
U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,
Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait,
Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal,
Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United
Kingdom, etc.
PAL-M system
Brazil
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
42
Deleting still images
Deleting images
80 min 8M 80 min 8M 80 min 8M

101 2/9 101 2/9 101 2/9
Delete Delete
101-0002 2004 1 1 10:30PM Exit Exit
BACK/NEXT VOLUME BACK/NEXT BACK/NEXT

1 2 3
, Set the mode dial to , and , Press (delete). , Select [Delete] by moving the
turn on the camera. multi-selector to v , then press
The image has not yet been deleted at this
Select the image you want to point. the center.
delete by moving the multi- “Access” appears on the screen and the
selector to b/B. • You cannot delete protected images (page 89).
image will be deleted.
• To select the recording medium, use the / To delete other images continuously
CF switch (page 21). Select the image you want to delete by
• Note that the images once deleted cannot be moving the multi-selector to b/B. Next,
recovered.
select [Delete] by moving the multi-selector
to v , then press the center.
To cancel the deletion

Select [Exit] by moving the multi-selector
to V, then press the center.
43
Deleting on the Index screen
Delete Delete
Exit Select All In This Folder Exit Select All In This Folder
• Select TO NEXT
1 2 3
, While an Index screen , Select [Select] by moving the , Select the image you want to
(page 40) is displayed, press multi-selector to b/B, then delete by moving the multi-
(delete). press the center. selector to v/V/b/B, then press
the center.
• Note that the images once deleted cannot be
recovered. The (delete) mark is indicated on the
selected image. The image has not yet been
deleted at this point. Put the mark on all
of the images you want to delete.
• To cancel your selection, select images you

want to cancel and press the center of the multi-
selector again. The mark disappears.
44
Formatting a
recording medium
To delete all the images in the folder
In Step 2, Select [All In This Folder] by
moving the multi-selector to B, then press
the center. Next, select [OK], then press the /CF
center. All of the unprotected images in the switch
Delete Exit OK
folder are deleted. To cancel the deletion,
select [Cancel], then press the center.

4 1
, Press (delete). , Insert the recording medium
Select [OK] by moving the you want to format into the
multi-selector to B, then press camera. Select the recording
the center. medium with the /CF
“Access” appears on the screen and all of switch. Set the mode dial to SET
the images with marks will be deleted. UP, and turn on the camera.
To cancel the deletion • The term “formatting” means preparing a

Select [Exit] by moving the multi-selector recording medium to record images; this
to b, then press the center. process is also called “initialization.”
• The “Memory Stick” is already formatted, and
can be used immediately.
• Be sure to format the Microdrive/CF card using
this camera. Otherwise, satisfactory
performance may not be obtained.
• When you format a recording medium,
be aware that all of the data in the
recording medium will be permanently
erased. Protected images are also
erased.
45
Memory Stick Tool Memory Stick Tool
Format: OK Format: OK Format
Create REC. Folder: Cancel Create REC. Folder: Cancel
Change REC. Folder: Change REC. Folder:
All data will be erased
Ready?
OK
Cancel
2 3 4
, When you format a “Memory , Select [OK] by moving the , Select [OK] by moving the
Stick,” select (Memory multi-selector to v , then press multi-selector to v , then press
Stick Tool) by moving the the center. the center.
multi-selector to v/V.
The “Formatting” message appears on the
When you format a Microdrive/ To cancel the formatting screen. When this message disappears, the
CF card, select (CF Card Select [Cancel] by moving the multi- format is complete.
Tool) by moving the multi- selector to V, then press the center.
selector to v/V.
Select [Format] by moving the
multi-selector to B, then move
to B.
• When formatting a recording medium, we

recommend that you use the AC Adaptor to
prevent the camera turning off.
46
Before advanced operations
Changing menu settings To turn off the menu display
How to setup and Press MENU.
a Press MENU.
operate your camera
The menu appears. • You cannot select the dim items.
This section describes how to operate the • For details on the menu items, see page 137.
8M 8M
menu and the SET UP screen. The multi- 3:2

5M
selector is used for these operation. 3M
1M
Image Size
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Mode
MENU
b Select the setting item you
Mode dial want to change by moving the
multi-selector to b/B.

RAW
TIFF
Voice
E-Mail
Normal
REC Mode
Mode
c Select the desired setting by

moving the multi-selector to v/
• For details on the mode dial, see page 28.
V.
The frame of the selected setting is
scaled up, and the setting is entered.
When the v mark is indicated

above the item or the V mark is
indicated below the item
All of the available items are not displayed
on the screen. Moving the multi-selector to
v/V displays the hidden items.
47
Changing items in the SET How to use the command Command dial
UP screen dial
WB
a Set the mode dial to SET UP. There are two methods for operating the
The SET UP screen appears. command dial. One is using only the
command dial and the other is using the
Camera 1
AF Mode: Monitor
command dial in combination with other
Digital Zoom: Precision buttons. This section describes the method
Date/Time: Off
Red Eye Reduction: Off used when operating the commnad dial in
Hologram AF: Auto
Auto Review: Off
combination with other buttons.
SELECT
Mode dial
This method is used for the following
b Select the setting item you functions.
want to change by moving the • Manual exposure (page 57) /BRK
multi-selector to v/V/b/B. • Metering mode (page 58)
NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING
The frame of the item you select turns • Exposure adjustment (page 59)
yellow. • Exposure Bracket (page 63) a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,
• Flash mode (page 68) SCN or .
Setup 2
File Number:
• White balance (page 73)
USB Connect: • Burst (page 75) b Press and hold the button you
Video Out: OK
Clock Set: Cancel • Multi Burst (page 76) want to operate and turn the
• Nightshot/Nightframing (page 77) command dial.
c Press the center of the multi-

selector to enter the setting.
The value or setting that is indicated

To turn off the SET UP screen on the screen is entered.
display
Set the mode dial to any position other than c Release the button.
SET UP. The indicators disappears from the
screen.
• For details on the SET UP items, see page 140.
48
• The following functions can be set by simply b Press MENU.
turning the command dial. Deciding the still The menu appears.
– Program shift (page 54)
– Shutter speed priority mode (page 55) image quality c Select (P. Quality) with b/B,
– Aperture priority mode (page 56)
• You can view the next/previous image during Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN then select the desired image
playback. You can select the still image quality from quality with v/V.
[Fine] or [Standard].
This camera is equipped with other methods
to select the image quality. You can select Fine FINE
Standard
these settings using the [Mode] (REC P. Quality
Mode) item in the menu. These items are as ISO Mode BRK
follows: [RAW] which records raw data

(page 79), [TIFF] which records

uncompressed data (page 80), and [E-Mail]
which records data suitable for sending e-
mail (page 81).
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)
MENU
Mode dial
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M

or SCN.
49
Creating a new folder • Images are recorded in the newly created folder
Creating or selecting until a different folder is created or selected.
a Set the mode dial to SET UP,
a folder and select the recording
Mode dial: SET UP medium with the /CF
Your camera can create multiple folders switch.
within a recording medium. You can select
b Select (Memory Stick Tool)
the folder used to store images. When not
creating a new folder, “101MSDCF” folder
or (CF Card Tool) with v/V,
is selected as the recording folder. [Create REC. Folder] with B/v/
You can create folders up to “999MSDCF.” V, and [OK] with B/v , then
press the center.
The following screen appears.
Mode dial
80 min
Create REC. Folder
Creating REC. folder 102MSDCF

Ready?
OK
Cancel
c Select [OK] with v , then press

the center.
/CF switch A new folder is created with a number
one higher than the largest number in
• Up to 4000 images can be stored in one folder. the recording medium, and the folder
When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new
becomes the recording folder.
folder is automatically created.
To cancel folder creation

In Step 2 or 3, select [Cancel].
• Once you create a new folder, you cannot delete

the new folder with the camera.
50
Selecting the recording • The image is stored in the newly selected
folder. You cannot move images to other
folder folders using the camera.
a Set the mode dial to SET UP,
and select the recording
medium with the /CF
switch.
b Select (Memory Stick Tool)
or (CF Card Tool) with v/V,
[Change REC. Folder] with B/
V, and [OK] with B/v , then

press the center.
The recording folder selection screen
appears.
Select REC. Folder

102 2/2
Folder Name:102MSDCF
No. Of Files: 0
Created:
2004 1 1 1::05:34AM
OK
Cancel
BACK/NEXT
c Select the desired folder with

b/B, and [OK] with v , then
press the center.
To cancel changing the

recording folder
• You cannot select the “100MSDCF” folder as a

recording folder.
51
Advanced still image shooting
Q: To shoot a portrait against Q: To shoot a night scene?
Manual features to light?
photo-shooting
situations
After you are familiar with your camera,
let’s shoot an image in various situations
with some settings changed. This section
describes some representative manual , Shooting with shutter speed
shooting examples. , Selecting a flash mode (page 68) priority mode (page 55)
Shooting a human subject in a bright place Using the flash in the auto adjustment mode
Q: To shoot a portrait with its can create dim facial shadows. This occurs restricts the shutter speed and the flash light
background blurred? when the background is brighter than the does not reach distant subjects. The image,
person. In such cases, set the flash to therefore, is not captured clearly. In such
(Forced flash). You can shoot both the cases, slow the shutter speed manually, set
person and the background clearly. the flash to (No flash), and reduce the
light using the EV adjustment. You can then
• You can use the flash within the reach of the shoot a clear night scene.
flash light.
, Shooting with aperture priority

mode (page 56)
When you want to enhance the person with
the background blurred, adjust the aperture
manually. The more the aperture is opened
(the aperture value becomes smaller), the
narrower the focus is. The background is
blurred accordingly.
52
Q: To shoot without flash? Q: To shoot a moving subject? Q: To shoot the beautiful
afterglow of the sunset
, Selecting the ISO sensitivity , Shooting with shutter speed

(page 64) priority mode (page 55) , Adjusting color tones (page 73)
When you cannot use the flash or set the When shooting a moving person or subject, If the image you shot is not expressed in
shutter speed slower, increase the ISO set the shutter speed higher to freeze the your favorite colors, change the white
rating. The higher rated ISO setting helps motion or set the shutter speed slower to get balance mode. Setting the white balance
maximize the effect of the surrounding light the flow of motion of the subject. Adjust the mode to (Daylight) enhances the redness
to shoot. shutter speed to express a moment that is of the sunset.

beyond the speed of the naked eye.
53
Program Shift • You may not be able to change the aperture
Shooting with value and shutter speed combination depending
You can change the aperture value and on your shooting situations.
Program auto shutter speed combination while keeping • When the flash mode setting is changed,
the brightness fixed. Program Shift is canceled.
Mode dial: P • Setting the mode dial to other than P or turning
In program auto mode, the camera a Set the mode dial to P. off the power cancels Program Shift.
automatically adjusts the shutter speed and b Select the aperture value and
the aperture according to the brightness of
shutter speed combination
the subject just as in the auto adjustment
mode (mode dial: ). In addition, the with the command dial.
program auto mode can change the shooting 80 min 8M FINE 101
P 98
settings in the menu, a feature which the
auto adjustment mode does not have
(page 137).
MAF 250 F2.0
Command dial
Shutter button is indicated while the aperture
value and shutter speed combination is
Mode dial shifted.
c Shoot the image.
To cancel Program Shift

Turn the command dial to return the
indication from to .
• You cannot shift the aperture value and shutter

speed combination when the shutter button is
pressed halfway down.
• When the brightness changes, the aperture
value and shutter speed also change while
maintaining the shift amount.
54
a Set the mode dial to S.
Shooting with shutter NR slow shutter
b Select a shutter speed with the The NR slow shutter mode removes noise
speed priority mode command dial. from recorded images, providing clear
images. When using shutter speeds of 1/25
Mode dial: S 80 min 8M FINE 101 second or slower, the camera automatically
S 98
You can adjust the shutter speed manually. works the NR slow shutter mode and “NR”
is indicated next to the shutter speed
If you shoot a moving subject at a higher indicator.
200
shutter speed, it appears as if frozen on the S 250
320
Press the shutter
image. At a lower shutter speed, the subject MAF F2.0 0 EV F2.8 button fully down.
appears as if it flowing. NR2''
Aperture value is automatically adjusted to The shutter speed can be selected from
attain correct exposure according to the 1/2000 to 30 seconds.
brightness of the subject. If you select 1/25 second or slower r
shutter speeds, the NR slow shutter Then the screen
function is automatically activated. In turns black.

Capturing
such cases, “NR” is indicated at the
left of shutter speed indicator.
c Shoot the image. r
Finally, when
High shutter speed Slow shutter speed • Shutter speeds of one second or longer are “Processing”
Processing disappears, the
indicated with ["] after the value, such as 1".
Command dial • If the proper exposure is not obtained after image has been
making the settings, the setting value indicators recorded.
Shutter button
on the screen flashes when the shutter button is
Mode dial pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this • To eliminate the effects of vibration, use of
condition, but we recommend that you adjust a tripod is recommended.
the flashing values again. • When a slow shutter speed is set, the
• The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No processing may take some time. This is
flash). because the camera works to remove noise
• When the shutter speed is high, the amount of during the time set by the shutter speed
flash light may be insufficient even if you setting.
strobes the flash.
• You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).
55
Shooting techniques Command dial
Shooting with
When shooting a moving person, car, or Shutter button
spindrift, etc., using the high shutter speed, aperture priority
you can express moment that is beyond what mode Mode dial
the human eye can see.
Mode dial: A
You can adjust the amount of light that
passes through the lens. If you open the
aperture (a smaller F-number), the amount
of light allowed into the lens increases and
the in-focus range becomes narrower. Only
When shooting a subject such as the flow of
the main subject is then in focus. When the
a river at a slower shutter speed, you can
create an image that captures the subject’s aperture is closed (a larger F-number), the
flowing movement. In such cases, use of a amount of light decreases and the in-focus a Set the mode dial to A.
tripod is recommended to prevent camera range becomes wider. The whole image is
b Select an aperture value with
shake. sharpened.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
the command dial.
to obtain correct exposure according to the 80 min 8M FINE 101
A 98
brightness of the subject.
2.0
F 2.2
2.5
MAF 250 0 EV
• When you hand-hold the camera, adjust
the shutter speed in a range where The range of values that can be
(Vibration warning indicator) is not selected varies, depending on the zoom
indicated.
Open the aperture Close the aperture position. The aperture value can be
selected from F2 to F8 (W)/ from F2.8
to F8 (T).
c Shoot the image.
56
• The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
from 1/2000 to 8 seconds. When you set an Shooting techniques Shooting with manual
aperture value of F8, the values start from The depth of field is the in-focus range.
1/3200 second. Opening the aperture makes the depth of exposure mode
• If the proper exposure is not obtained after field shallower (the in-focus range becomes
making the settings, the setting value indicators narrower) and closing the aperture makes the Mode dial: M
on the screen flashes when the shutter button is depth of field wider (the in-focus range You can manually adjust the shutter speed
pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this becomes wider).
condition, but we recommend that you adjust
and aperture values.
the flashing values again. Open the The difference between the set value and
• The flash is set to (Forced flash), (Slow aperture the appropriate exposure determined by the
The subject is clear
synchro) or (No flash).
and its background camera is displayed on the screen as the EV
• You can adjust the exposure value (page 59). value (page 59). 0EV indicates the most
is blurred.
suitable value set by the camera.
The camera maintains the setting even
M when the power is turned off. Once you set
m a value you like, you can reproduce the

same exposure by simply setting the mode
Close the
dial to M.
aperture
Both the subject
and its background
are focused on.
Adjust the aperture to suit your purpose,

either to sharpen the specific area of image,
or to focus on the entire image.
57
c Press and hold (exposure)
Command dial
and select an aperture value Selecting the
with the command dial. metering mode
Shutter button 80 min FINE 101
M
8M
98 Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/
Mode dial You can select a metering mode to
2.0 determine the exposure, depending on what
F 2.2
2.5
part of the subject is used to measure.
MAF 250 0 EV
Multi-pattern metering ( )
d Shoot the image. The image is slipt up into multiple zones,
each of which are evaluated individually.
• If the proper exposure is not obtained after The camera calculates the best-fit exposure
making the settings, the setting value indicators
on the screen flashes when the shutter button is
based on the subject’s position and
a Set the mode dial to M. background brightness.
pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this
condition, but we recommend that you adjust The default setting is multi-pattern
b Select a shutter speed with the
the flashing values again. metering.
command dial. • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No
flash).
80 min
M
8M FINE 101
98
Center-weighted metering ( )
Metering is performed with priority given
to the center of the image. The camera
200
S 250 determines the exposure based on the
320
MAF F2.0 0 EV brightness of a subject near the center.
58
Spot metering ( ) c When selecting Spot metering
Spot metering allows you to meter for the in Step 2, position the spot Adjusting the
subject directly in a small area of the whole metering cross hair on one exposure
image. This lets you adjust the exposure to point of the subject you want
the subject even when the subject is backlit – EV adjustment
to shoot.
or there is strong contrast between the Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/
subject and the background. 80 min
P
8M FINE 101
98
You can manually shift the exposure value
Command dial determined by the camera. Use this mode
Spot metering
cross hair when you do not get the proper exposure,
Mode dial
for instance, the subject and its background
MAF 250 F2.0
have high contrast (light and dark). The
value can be set a range from +2.0EV to
• When using center-weighted metering or spot –2.0EV, in 1/3EV increments.
metering, to focus on the same spot as used for

metering, we recommend using the center
weighted AF range finder frame (page 65).
• You cannot select the metering mode when
using the NightShot/NightFraming function.
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,

SCN or .
Adjust Adjust
b Press and hold (metering toward toward +
–
mode) and select the desired
metering mode with the
command dial.
59
Command dial
To reactivate auto exposure Displaying a histogram
In Step 2, select [0EV].
A histogram is a graph showing the
brightness of an image. The horizontal axis
Mode dial • When the subject is extremely bright or
extremely dark, or when you are using the shows the brightness, and the vertical axis
flash, the adjustment may not work. shows the number of pixels. The graph
display indicates a dark image when
skewed to the left side, and a bright image
when skewed to the right side. The
histogram is a useful reference for checking
the exposure during recording and playback
when the screen is hard to be seen.
80 8M FINE 101
Number of pixels
4
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A,

SCN or .
b Press and hold (exposure) Brightness 0 EV
and select the desired Dark Bright

exposure value with the
command dial. a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or
The value of the exposure adjustment SCN.
is displayed. b Press (screen status) to
Adjust the exposure value while
checking the brightness of the display the histogram.
background. c Adjust the exposure based on
80 min 8M FINE 101
the histogram.
P 98
• The histogram also appears when the mode dial

+1.0EV is set to or M, but the EV adjustment is
+1.3EV deactivated.
+1.7EV
MAF 250 F2.0
60
• The histogram also appears when you press
(screen status) while playing back a single Shooting techniques When shooting a darker overall image, the
image (page 39) or during Quick Review While shooting images, the camera camera judges that the subject is dark and may
(page 29). automatically determines the exposure. When set a brighter exposure for the image. In such
• The histogram does not appear in the following shooting a whitish overall image such as a cases, adjustment of the exposure in the –
cases: backlit subject or a snowy scene, the camera minus direction is effective.
– When the menu is displayed judges that the subject is bright and may set a
– During Quick Review of an image recorded darker exposure for the image. In such cases,
in Exposure Bracket mode adjustment of the exposure in the + plus
– When using playback zoom direction is effective.
– When shooting or playing back movies
• appears and the histogram does not appear
in the following cases:
– When recording in the digital zoom range
– When the image size is [3:2]
– When playing back Multi Burst mode images m
– When a still image is rotated
• The histogram before recording represents the Adjust in the – direction

histogram of the image displayed on the screen
at that time. A difference occurs in the m
histogram before and after you press the shutter
button. When this happens, check the histogram Adjust in the + direction
while playing back a single-image or during
Quick Review.
In particular a large difference may appear in
the following cases:
– When the flash strobes
– When using the NightFraming function You can check the exposure referring to the
– When [PFX] (P.Effect) is set to [Solarize] histogram chart. Be careful not to overexpose
– When the shutter speed is slow or high or underexpose your subject (giving a whitish
• The histogram may not appear for images or darkish image).
recorded using other cameras.
You can try to adjust the exposure to suit your
taste.
61
b Target the subject for which
Shooting with the Shooting techniques
you want to meter the
The camera automatically adjusts the
exposure fixed exposure, then press AE exposure according to the subject. If you
LOCK. change the composition of your shot, the
– AE LOCK exposure may be changed, such as by
The exposure is fixed and the changes in the brightness of the background.
Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/ indicator appears. In such cases, use the AE lock function. You
You can lock the exposure before 80 min 8M FINE 101
can shoot freely, regardless of the brightness
recomposing the image. This is useful when P 98 of the subject.
the contrast of the subject and its
To determine the exposure, measure the
background is extremely high or you shoot exposure of the desired portion of the
a backlit subject. subject using either center-weighted
MAF 250 F2.0
metering or the spot metering function.
Shutter button Press AE LOCK to lock the exposure, and
c Recompose the image and then recompose the picture and shoot.
Mode dial press and hold the shutter Portion of the image
AE LOCK button halfway down. used to determine the
exposure
The focus is automatically adjusted.
d Press the shutter button fully
down.
To release AE LOCK
Carry out one of the followings:
• Press AE LOCK again after Step 2. m
• Release your finger from the shutter
button after Step 3.
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, • Press down the shutter button in Step 4.
SCN or .
62
First shot Command dial
Shooting three (Adjusted in the + direction)
images with the Mode dial
exposure shifted Shutter button
Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN
In addition to an image with the exposure
Second shot
automatically set by the camera, two other (Proper exposure set by the camera)
images are recorded with exposure values
shifted to the + and – sides.
If you cannot shoot with the proper
brightness due to the brightness of the /BRK MENU
subject, use the Exposure Bracket mode.

You can select the image that has a suitable
or SCN.
exposure after shooting. Third shot
(Adjusted in the – direction) b Press and hold /BRK
(bracket) and select [BRK] with
the command dial.
80 min 8M FINE 101
P 98
BRK
MAF 250 F2.0
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
63
d Select [BRK] (Bracket Step) • If the subject is too bright or too dark, you may
with b/B, then select the be unable to shoot properly with the selected Selecting the ISO
bracket step value.
desired bracket step value • You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second sensitivity
with v/V. or slower.
– ISO
±1.0EV: Shifts the exposure value by
plus or minus 1.0EV. Mode dial: P/S/A/M
±0.7EV: Shifts the exposure value by You can change the camera’s sensitivity to
plus or minus 0.7EV. light. When you select a high-number
±0.3EV: Shifts the exposure value by setting, you can shoot in a dark place.
plus or minus 0.3EV. Normally, the ISO sensitivity is set to
e Shoot the image. [Auto]. When set to [Auto], the ISO
sensitivity is automatically increased in a
dark place.
To return to normal mode
In Step 2, select [Normal]. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)
MENU
• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to
[Normal], you cannot use the Exposure Bracket Mode dial
mode.
• You may not be able to use the Exposure
Bracket mode depending on the Scene
Selection mode (page 37).
• You cannot use the flash in this mode.
• During shooting in this mode, the images are
not displayed on the screen. Compose the
image before pressing the shutter button.
• The focus and white balance are adjusted for
the first image, and these settings are also used
for the other images.
• When the exposure is manually adjusted
(page 59), the exposure is shifted based on the a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or
adjusted brightness. M.
• The recording interval is approximately 0.42
second. b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
64
c Select [ISO] with b, then select Choosing a focus range
desired setting with v/V. Choosing an auto finder frame
Choose from [800], [400], [200], focus method – AF range finder
[100], [64], or [Auto].
You can set the AF range finder frame and Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/
To return to normal mode the AF mode.
In Step 3, select [Auto]. Multipoint AF ( )
AF range finder frame The camera calculates the distance in five
• To reduce camera shake, select a large number. The AF range finder frame selects the focus places to the top, the bottom, the left, the
You can shoot a subject with higher shutter position according to the subject position right, and in the center of the image, letting
speed. and size. you shoot using the auto focus function
• When selecting a large number, the image without worrying about the image
becomes noisy. To give priority to image
quality, select a small number. AF Mode composition. This is useful when it is
The AF mode is set automatically when the difficult to focus on the subject because it is
camera starts and stops focusing on a not in the center of the frame. You can

subject. check the position where the focus was
adjusted using the green frame.
The default setting is Multipoint AF.
Mode dial
Center AF ( )
The AF range finder is only the center of the
frame. You can shoot in desired image
composition using the AF lock method.
FOCUS Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
65
Flexible Spot AF ( ) d When selecting Flexible Spot Choosing a focus operation
This is useful when focusing on an AF in Step 3, move the AF
extremely small subject or a narrow area.
– AF Mode
range finder frame to the
Flexible Spot AF lets you shoot in the portion you want to focus on Mode dial: SET UP
desired image composition. This is useful
with v/V/b/B.
when you shoot using a tripod and the Single AF ( S A F )
subject is out of the center area. When 80 min
P
8M FINE 101
98
This mode is useful for shooting stationary
shooting a moving subject, take care to hold subjects. The focus is not adjusted before
the camera steady so that the subject does you press and hold the shutter button
not deviate from the range finder frame. halfway down. After you press and hold the
shutter button halfway down and AF lock is
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, MAF 250 F2.0
complete, the focus is locked.
SCN or . When you press and hold the shutter
b Set the FOCUS switch to button halfway down, and the focus is
Monitoring AF ( M A F )
adjusted, the color of the AF range
AUTO. finder frame changes from white to This shortens the time needed for focusing.
green. The camera automatically adjusts the focus
c Press the center of the multi- before you press and hold the shutter button
selector repeatedly to select • When you are shooting movies and you choose halfway down, letting you compose images
the desired mode. Multipoint AF, the distance to the center of the with the focus already adjusted. After you
80 min 8M FINE 101
screen is estimated as an average, so the AF press and hold the shutter button halfway
P 98 works even with a certain amount of vibration. down and AF lock is complete, the focus is
AF range The AF range finder frame indicator is .
locked.
finder frame Center AF and Flexible Spot AF automatically
focus only on selected frame, so this is The default setting is Monitoring AF.
AF range convenient when you want to focus only on
MAF 250 F2.0
finder frame what you aim at. • Battery consumption may be higher than in
indicator • When you use the digital zoom or hologram Single AF mode.
AF, priority AF movement is given to subjects
in or near the center of the frame. In this case,
the AF range finder frame indicator flashes and
the AF range finder frame is not displayed.
66
Continuous AF ( C AF ) a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,
The camera adjusts the focus before you Focusing manually SCN or .
press and hold the shutter button halfway
down, and then continues to adjust the focus Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/ b Set the FOCUS switch to
even after AF lock is completed. This Normally the focus is automatically MANUAL.
allows shooting of moving subjects with adjusted. However, the auto focus may not The 9 (manual focus) indicator
continued focus. However, focus work well, such as in the following cases. In appears on the screen.
adjustment may not be able to keep up when these cases, adjust the focus manually.
c Turn the manual focus ring to
shooting fast moving subjects. The AF
Subjects that are hard to be focused achieve a sharp focus.
range finder frame is Center AF.
on The focus distance information
• The focus is not adjusted after the lock is • Subjects with little contrast with indicator is displayed. You can adjust
completed in the following cases, and the backgrounds such as walls, and sky the focus in the following macro
“C AF” indicator flashes. The camera operates • Subjects in very dark places ranges.
in Monitoring AF mode.
• Metals that have great reflection, or T-side: about 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) to
– When shooting in the dark place ∞ (infinite)

subjects with the light source behind
– When shooting with a slow shutter speed W-side: 2 cm (13/16 inches) to ∞
– When using the NightShot/NightFraming them and that have great reflection.
(infinite).
functions • Subjects through a chain-link fence or
• There is no lock sound when the focus is
If [Expanded Focus] in the SET UP
glasses.
achieved. settings is set to [On], the image is
• When you press the shutter button all the way Mode dial zoomed to 2× to achieve the focus
down using the self-timer, the focus is locked. Manual focus ring
easily when recording still images.
• Battery consumption may be higher than in any The default setting is [On]. When the
other AF mode. image returns to normal size and the
9 (manual focus) indicator changes
a Set the mode dial to SET UP. from yellow to white, a sharp focus is
achieved.
b Select (Camera 1) with v ,
1
When the 9 indicator flashes, the
then select [AF Mode] with B/ focus distance has reached its limit.
v. Near
To reactivate auto focusing
c Select the desired mode with Far
Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO.
B/v/V, then press the center.
FOCUS
67
• The focus distance information indicator is
Command dial
approximate, and should be used as a reference. Selecting a flash
• The focus distance information indicator does
not appear when using the NightShot function. mode Mode dial
• When focusing manually, the following
functions cannot be used: Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN
– Macro mode shooting Normally, the flash automatically pops up
– NightFraming function
• When recording movies, the expanded focus
and strobes when the surroundings are dark.
function cannot be used. You can intentionally change the flash
mode.
Auto (No indicator)

The camera decides to use the flash based
on lighting conditions. The default setting is a Set the mode dial to , P, S,
Auto. A, M or SCN.
b Press and hold (flash) and
Forced flash ( ) select the desired mode with
The flash fires regardless of the amout of
the command dial.
ambient light.
80 min 8M 101
98
Slow synchro ( )
The flash fires regardless of the amout of
ambient light. In this mode, the shutter
speed becomes slower under dark MAF
conditions, so you can clearly shoot a

background that is out of the flash-lit area.
• Note that the surface of the flash emitter may
be hot right after you use the flash several times
No flash ( ) in succession.
The flash does not fire regardless of the • The recommended distance using the flash is
about 0.5 m to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to
amount of ambient light.
14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.3 m
(23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) (when
[ISO] is set to [Auto]).
68
• Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks a flash
light. To pop up the flash manually To reduce “red-eye” when
• Because the shutter speed is slower under dark (Pop-up Flash mode) shooting live subjects
conditions when (Slow synchro) or (No Normally, the flash strobes The flash pre-strobes before shooting
flash) is selected, it is recommended that you
automatically according to lighting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon. Set
use a tripod.
• While the flash is being charged, the lamp conditions. However, you can pop up [Red Eye Reduction] to [On] in the
flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp the flash only when you want to use it. SET UP settings (page 140).
goes out. Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Manual] in the appears on the screen.
• You can change the brightness of the flash SET UP settings (page 140).
using [Flash Level] in the menu settings
(page 70). (Except when the mode dial is set to
To strobe the flash
.)
• You can mount an external flash on this camera 1 Slide the OPEN (FLASH)
(page 71). switch in the arrow direction.
The flash pops up.
2 Set the flash mode to (Forced m

flash) or (Slow synchro).
3 Shoot the image.
OPEN (FLASH)
• The amount of red-eye reduction possible

varies according to the individual. In
addition, the distance to the subject, and
whether or not the subject has seen pre-
strobe light begin to strobe may also
To return to auto mode reduce the effectiveness of the red-eye
Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET reduction process.
UP settings.
69
Shooting techniques The (Slow synchro) is effective when you
shoot a person during a sunset and the like.
Adjusting the flash
Making the best of the flash gives you various
options. You can shoot the person clearly using the level
flash light and the background using a long
When you set the flash mode to (Forced exposure. If the camera cannot shoot clearly – Flash Level
flash), you can shoot a back-lit subject brightly. using the slow shutter, it automatically
increases the ISO number. We recommend you Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN
An effect in which the flash light reflects in the
subject’s eye is also available. use a tripod to prevent camera shake. You can adjust the amout of flash light.
MENU
Mode dial
When the flash mode is set to Auto, the flash

may strobe regardless of your intentions. In
such situations, setting the flash mode to
(No flash) slows the shutter speed
automatically. This is effective when you shoot
the trail of a car, the spectrum of a light, or the
sunset. We recommend you use a tripod to
prevent camera shake.

or SCN.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
70
c Select [ ] (Flash Level) with • You cannot have an external flash and the built-
b/B, then select the desired Using an external in flash strobe at the same time.
• If you use two or more external flashes at the
setting with v/V. flash same time, note that the camera may not be able
High: Makes the flash level higher to function properly, or that may cause a
than normal. Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN malfunction.
You can mount an optional external flash. • When the proper white balance is not set using
Normal: Normal setting.
an external flash, set the flash mode to
Low: Makes the flash level lower than Using an external flash increases the (Forced flash) or (Slow synchro), then set
normal. amount of light and that will allow you to the white balance using the (one-push
shoot more vivid flash pictures than when SET) (page 73).
using the internal flash.
For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with your flash.
Advanced Shutter button

accessory

shoe Mode dial
ACC (accessory)
jack
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
• When an external flash is mounted, the weight

prevents the lens portion from becoming steady.
We recommend supporting the lens portion
with your left hand or using a tripod for
recording.
71
Using the Sony Flash Using a commercially • Set the most appropriate aperture value
according to the guide number of the flash used
You can mount the Sony HVL-F32X or
available external flash and the distance to the subject.
HVL-F1000 flash on the advanced You can mount a commercially available • The flash guide number varies according to the
accessory shoe of your camera. The HVL- ISO sensitivity (page 64) of the camera, so be
external flash that supports the advanced sure to check the ISO number.
F32X is also equipped with automatic flash accessory shoe. • Note that the camera may not function properly
level adjustment and AF fill light shooting or may malfunction when using a flash
a Mount the external flash to the
functions. manufactured by another company for a
advanced accessory shoe. specific camera (generally a flash with multiple
a Mount the external flash on the contact points on the advanced accessory shoe),
advanced accessory shoe. b Set the mode dial to SET UP. a high-voltage type flash, or a flash accessory.
• Depending on the type of commercially
b Plug the flash into the ACC c Select (Camera 2) with v/V,
2
available external flash, you may be unable to
(accessory) jack. [Hot Shoe] with B/v/V, [On] use some functions, and other operations may
with B/v, then press the be difficult.
When using the HVL-F32X, skip Step
2. center.
c Turn on the external flash. d Turn on the external flash.
d Set the mode dial to , P, S, e Set the mode dial to M or A.
A, M or SCN. The flash also strobes when the mode
dial is set to , P, S or SCN, but we
e Shoot the image.
recommend recording with the mode
dial set to M or A.
• Check that [Hot Shoe] is set to [Off] in the SET
UP settings (page 140). f Shoot the image.
• When [ISO] is set to [800], you cannot use the
AUTO “B” mode of the HVL-F32X. • If you record with [Hot Shoe] set to [Off] in the
SET UP settings, the built-in flash may pop up.
If this happens, return the built-in flash to its
original position and set [Hot Shoe] to [On]
(page 140).
• When you set [Hot Shoe] to [On] in the SET
UP settings, is indicated. In this case, the
built-in flash is disabled.
72
(Fluorescent)
Adjusting color tones Used when shooting under fluorescent
lights. Mode dial
– White Balance (Color temperature: about 4000 K) Command
dial
Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/
(Incandescent) WB
Normally, this camera adjusts color tones
• Used when shooting, for example, at a
automatically, but you can also select the
party, where the lighting conditions
following modes according to your
change often.
shooting situations. The color of the subject
• Used in a studio, or under video lights.
that you see will be captured according to
(Color temperature: about 3200 K)
the lighting conditions. When you want to
fix the conditions under which the image is
WB (Flash)
captured, or when the color of the entire
Adjusts the white balance only to the flash
image seems to be a bit unnatural, it is
conditions. This mode cannot be used with
recommended that you adjust the white

movies.
balance. a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,
SCN or .
Auto (No indicator)
(One push) b Press and hold WB and select
The white balance is set automatically in
For adjusting the white balance depending
response to the condition of the subject. the desired setting with the
on the light source.
The default setting is Auto. command dial.
(Color temperature: about 2000-10000 K)
(Color temperature: about 3000-7000 K)
80 min 8M FINE 101
P 98
(One push SET)
(Daylight)
Memorizes the basic white color which will
Used when shooting outdoors, and for
be used in (One push) mode.
shooting at night, under neon lights, for
fireworks, sunrise, and twilight gloom. MAF 250 F2.0

To return to automatic settings
(Cloudy)
In Step 2, select [Auto].
Used when shooting under a cloudy sky.
73
• Under fluorescent lights that flicker, even if you • When the indicator flashes slowly, the
choose , the white balance may not be white balance is not set or was not able to be Selecting color
properly adjusted. set. Record in automatic white balance mode.
• When the flash strobes, the manual setting is • Do not shake or strike the camera while the reproduction
canceled, and the image is recorded in [Auto] indicator flashes quickly.
mode (except in WB (Flash) mode or • When flash mode is set to (Forced flash) or – Color
(One push) mode). (Slow synchro), the white balance is
adjusted to the condition with the flash
Mode dial: P/S/A/M
To capture the basic white color emitting. You can select the color reproduction mode.
in (one-push SET) mode
Standard (No indicator)
This mode memorizes the basic white color
Shoots to make the resulting shot easier on
in the shooting situation for the (One
the eyes. The image becomes vivid
push) mode. Use this mode when the other
compared to its real color and the contrast
modes cannot set the color properly.
becomes higher.
1 In Step 2, select [ ] (One push The default setting is [Standard].
SET).
The indicator appears. Real (REAL)
2 Frame a white object such as a piece of Shoots for faithfulness to the actual texture
paper filling the screen under the same and color, which the contrast, brightness,
lighting conditions as you will shoot the and saturation become lower. This mode is
subject. suitable for modifying the image on a
3 Press the center of the multi-selector. computer.
The screen momentarily turns black and
the indicator flashes quickly.
When the white balance has been
adjusted and stored in the memory, the
indicator lights up.
74
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Shooting images in Mode dial
MENU succession Shutter button
Mode dial Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN
You can shoot up to seven images in
succession while pressing the shutter button
only once.
Speed Burst ( )
The frame interval becomes shorter (about
0.38 second), but the images are not
/BRK Command dial
displayed on the screen.
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or a Set the mode dial to , P, S,

Framing Burst ( )
M. The images are displayed on the screen A, M or SCN.
b Press MENU. during Burst shooting, but the frame
interval becomes longer (about 0.42
b Press and hold /BRK (Burst)
The menu appears. and select (Speed Burst) or
second).
c Select COLOR (Color) with b/ (Framing Burst) with the
B, then select the desired • When the capacity of the recording medium is command dial.
used up, recording stops even if you press and
mode with v/V. hold the shutter button. 80 min 8M 101
98
BRK
MAF
75
c Shoot the image. b Press and hold /BRK (Burst)
You can shoot up to seven images Shooting in Multi and select (Multi Burst)
when you press and hold the shutter Burst mode with the command dial.
button.
80 min FINE 101
You can do the next shooting after – Multi Burst P
8M
98
“Recording” disappears from the
Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN
screen.
BRK
Pressing the shutter button once records 16
To return to normal mode frames in a row. This is convenient for Normal
MAF 250 F2.0
In Step 2, select [Normal]. checking your form in sports, for example.
Command dial c Press MENU.

• The flash cannot be used.
• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to The menu appears.
Mode dial
[Normal], you cannot use the Burst mode.
• You may not be able to use the Burst mode Shutter button d Select (Interval) with b/B,
depending on the Scene Selection mode then select the desired
(page 37). between-frame interval with v/
• When using the self-timer, pressing the shutter
button records up to seven images in V.
succession. You can choose from [1/7.5], [1/15],
• You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second [1/30].
or slower.
1/7.5
1/15
/BRK MENU
1/30 1/30"
Interval
Multi-selector ISO Mode BRK
(v/V/b/B)
a Set the mode dial to , P, S, e Shoot the image.

A, M or SCN. 16 frames in a row will be recorded in
a single image (image size: 1M).
76
• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to NightShot
[Normal], you cannot use the Multi Burst Shooting in the dark
mode. The NightShot function lets you shoot
• The following functions cannot be used in Mode dial: /P/ subjects in dark places without the flash
Multi Burst mode: such as camp scenes at night or nocturnal
– Smart zoom Shutter button
plants and animals. Note that images
– Inserting the date and time Command dial recorded using the NightShot function
– NightShot become greenish.
Mode dial
– NightFraming
• When the mode dial is set to , frame a Set the mode dial to , P or
interval is automatically set to [1/30]. .
• You cannot set the shutter speed to lower than
the frame interval time. b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/
• For the number of images that can be recorded, NIGHTFRAMING and select
see pages 135, 136.
• When you play back images recorded in Multi
(Night shot) with the command
Burst mode on the camera, see page 87. dial.

The flash emitter pops up and the
Infrared ray NIGHTSHOT/ and “Night shot” indicators light for
emitter NIGHTFRAMING about five seconds.
• The infrared ray light covers within approx. 80 min 8M 101
0.5 m to 2.1 m (19 3/4 inches to 6 feet 4
10 3/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 2.1 m

(23 5/8 inches to 6 feet 10 3/4 inches) (T). "Night shot"
• Since the infrared emitter is located below the
flash emitter, you have to pop up the flash to
MAF
shoot in these modes.
c Shoot the image.
To cancel the NightShot function

In Step 2, select [Off].
• While using the NightShot function:

– The white balance is set to Auto.
– The metering mode is set to center weighted.
77
– If you perform any invalid operation, the NightFraming • While using the NightFraming function:
indicator flashes, and the “Night shot” – The white balance is set to Auto.
indicator lights for about five seconds. The NightFraming function enables you to – The metering mode is set to multi-pattern
• While using the NightShot function, you cannot check a subject even at night and then metering.
use the following functions: record with natural colors using the flash. – The AF range finder frame is not displayed.
– AE LOCK The centrally-located subject has priority to
– Shooting with hologram AF a Set the mode dial to or P. focus on.
– Shooting with the flash – The AE lock cannot be used.
– Selecting the color reproduction mode b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/ – If you perform any invalid operation while
• While the camera is in Multi Burst mode, the NIGHTFRAMING and select using the NightFraming function, the
NightShot function cannot be used. indicator flashes and the “Night framing”
• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the (Night framing) with the indicator lights for about five seconds.
SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using command dial. • When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the
the OPEN (FLASH) switch. SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using
The flash emitter pops up and the
• When attaching the supplied lens hood, infrared the OPEN (FLASH) switch.
ray may be blocked.
and “Night framing” indicators light • When attaching the supplied lens hood, flash
• Do not use the NightShot function in bright for about five seconds. light and infrared ray may be blocked.
places (e.g. outdoors in the daytime). This may 80 min 8M 101
• When you press the shutter button halfway
cause your camera to malfunction. 4 down, you will hear a sound, but this is not the
sound of the shutter releasing. The image is not
"Night framing" recorded yet.
• When [Hologram AF] is set to [Off], you may
not get a clear focus. Setting [Hologram AF] to
MAF
[Auto] is recommended (page 35).
• When using the following functions, you
c Press and hold the shutter cannot use the NightFraming function.
button halfway down. – Manual focus
The focus is automatically adjusted.
– Burst
d Press the shutter button fully – Multi Burst
down.
The shutter sounds, the flash strobes
and the image is recorded.
To cancel the NightFraming function

78
Shooting with special Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Shutter button Shooting still images
effects MENU in RAW mode
Mode dial
– Picture Effect – RAW
Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/ Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN
You can add special effects to bring out the Used when you want to record the raw data
contrast in your images. directly onto the recording medium as it is.
The data can be reproduced with much less
Solarize deterioration in image processing and be
Like an illustration
with clearly delineated displayed using the exclusive software
bright and dark provided. A compressed JPEG format
portions image like that is recorded in normal
shooting is recorded at the same time.

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,
Shutter button
Sepia SCN or .
Colored to look like an Mode dial
old photograph b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select [PFX] (P.Effect) with b/
B, then select the desired
mode with v/V.
Neg.Art
Made to look like a
negative image
d Shoot the image.
To cancel Picture Effect MENU Multi-selector

(v/V/b/B)
a Set the mode dial to , P, S,
• You cannot select the color reproduction mode
A, M or SCN.
when using the picture effect.
79
b Press MENU. c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with
The menu appears. Shooting still images b/B, then select [TIFF] with v/
c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with in TIFF mode V.
b/B, then select [RAW] with v. – TIFF d Shoot the image.
d Shoot the image. Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN You can do the next shooting after
You can do the next shooting after Used when you record an image in screen.
“Recording” disappears from the uncompressed file format. The image
screen. quality does not deteriorate. Images To return to normal mode
recorded in this mode are suitable for fine In Step 3, select [Normal].
To return to normal mode printing. A compressed JPEG format image
In Step 3, select [Normal]. like that recorded in normal shooting is • JPEG images are also recorded in the image
recorded at the same time. size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24).
• To reproduce the RAW data file using a Uncompressed (TIFF) images are recorded in
computer, the exclusive software is required. [8M] size except when [3:2] is selected.
Shutter button
Install the exclusive software on the supplied • Writing data takes more time than in normal
CD-ROM to your computer. Since the RAW Mode dial recording mode.
data file is a special kind of file, general • For the number of images that can be recorded,
software cannot open the RAW data file. see pages 134, 136.
• The JPEG image is also recorded in the image
size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24).
(However, [3:2] cannot be selected.) RAW data
images are recorded in [8M] size.
• Writing data takes more time than in normal
recording mode.
• Digital zoom cannot be used.
• For the number of images that can be recorded,
see pages 134, 136. MENU Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)

A, M or SCN.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
80
c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with
Shooting still images b/B, then select [E-Mail] with Shooting still images
for e-mail v/V. with audio files
– E-Mail d Shoot the image. – Voice
Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN You can do the next shooting after Mode dial: /P/S/A/M/SCN
You can shoot images and save them in a screen. You can record still images with audio files.
file that is small enough (320×240) to attach
to an e-mail message. The normal mode Shutter button
image that was selected using the Image In Step 3, select [Normal]. Mode dial
Size item (page 24) is also recorded.
• For instructions on how to attach your images
Shutter button to an e-mail message, refer to the Help files of
Mode dial the e-mail software you are using.

see pages 135, 136.
MENU Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)

MENU Multi-selector A, M or SCN.
(v/V/b/B)
b Press MENU.
a Set the mode dial to , P, S, The menu appears.
A, M or SCN. c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with
b Press MENU. b/B, then select [Voice] with v/
The menu appears. V.
81
d Shoot the image.
If you press and release the
shutter button, sound is recorded
for five seconds.
If you hold down the shutter
button, sound is recorded until you
release the shutter button for up to 40
seconds.

In Step 3, select [Normal].
• To view images recorded in Voice mode, carry

out the same procedure described in “Viewing
movies on the screen” (page 101).
• Be careful not to touch the microphone
(page 12) during shooting.
see pages 134, 136.
82
Advanced still image viewing
d Select the desired folder with On the single screen
Selecting the folder b/B. 80 min VGA
and playing back Select Folder
101 9/9
images 102
Folder Name:102MSDCF
2/2
No. Of Files: 9
Created:
– Folder 2004 1 1 1::05:34AM
OK
101-0009 2004 1 1 10:30PM
Cancel
Mode dial: BACK/NEXT
BACK/NEXT VOLUME
Select the folder that images you want to On the Index screen
play back are stored. e Select [OK] with v , then press
the center of the multi-
selector.
MENU
Mode dial To cancel the selection

In Step 5, select [Cancel]. SINGLE DISPLAY

When multiple folders are • When no images are stored in the folder, “No
created in the recording medium file in this folder” appears.
When the first or last image in the folder is • You can play back images from a last-shot one
displayed, the following icons are indicated without selecting the folder.
on the screen.
: Moves to the previous folder.
: Moves to the next folder.
a Set the mode dial to . : Moves to both the previous and next
folders.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select (Folder) with b, then
press the center of the multi-
selector.
83
Enlarging an image e Adjust the zoom with the
Enlarging a portion of – Playback zoom command dial.
a still image a Set the mode dial to .
Mode dial: b Display the image you want to
You can enlarge an image up to five times enlarge with b/B.
the size of the original image. You can also
record the enlarged image as a new file. c Press (playback zoom).
The image is enlarged twice.
d Select a portion of the image
MENU to enlarge with v/V/b/B.
Mode dial To cancel enlarged viewing
Move to v Press (playback zoom) again.
• You cannot use Playback zoom with movies or

images recorded in Multi Burst mode.
Move Move • The images displayed in Quick Review
to b to B (page 29) can be enlarged using the procedures
outlined in Steps 3 to 5.
Command dial Move to V
v: To view a portion of the top of the

image
V: To view a portion of the bottom of
the image
b: To view a portion of the left side
of the image
B: To view a portion of the right side
of the image
84
Recording an enlarged c Select (Slide) with b/B,
image – Trimming Playing back then press the center of the
a After you have viewed an
successive images multi-selector.
Set the following items with v/V/b/B.
image using playback zoom, – Slide show
press MENU. Interval settings
Mode dial:
The menu appears. 3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min
You can play back recorded images in
b Select [Trimming] with B, then succession, one after another. This is useful Image
for checking your images, or for giving a Folder:Plays back all the images in the
presentation. selected folder.
selector. All:Plays back all the images in the
recording medium.
c Select the image size with v/V, Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)
then press the center of the MENU Repeat
multi-selector. On:Plays the images back repeatedly.
Mode dial Off:Plays through the images one time
The image is recorded, and the screen
and then stops.
image returns to the size it was before

enlargement. d Select [Start] with V/B, then
• The trimmed image is recorded in the recording
folder as the newest file, and the original image
selector.
is retained. The slide show begins.
• The trimmed image may suffer some
deterioration in image quality. To cancel the slide show setting
• You cannot trim to 3:2-sized image.
• You cannot trim RAW data file/uncompressed In Step 3, select [Cancel].
(TIFF) images. a Set the mode dial to .
• You cannot trim images displayed with Quick To stop slide show playback
Review. b Press MENU.
Press the center of the multi-selector, select
The menu appears.
[Exit] with B, then press the center.
85
To skip to the next/previous a Set the mode dial to , and
image during slide show Rotating still images display the image you want to
Move the multi-selector to B (next) or b rotate.
(previous). – Rotate
Mode dial: b Press MENU.
• The interval setting time is approximate, and Images shot when holding the camera The menu appears.
may vary according to the playback image size.
vertically can be rotated and displayed c Select (Rotate) with b/B,
horizontally. then press the center of the
multi-selector.
d Select with v , and rotate
the image with b/B.
e Select [OK] with v/V, then
selector.
To cancel the rotation

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) • You cannot rotate protected images, movies,

Multi Burst mode, RAW data file and
MENU uncompressed (TIFF) images.
• You may not be able to rotate images shot with
Mode dial
other cameras.
• When viewing images on a computer, the
image rotation information may not be
reflected depending on the application
software.
86
Playing back continuously Playing back frame by frame
Playing back images
a Set the mode dial to . a Set the mode dial to .
shot in Multi Burst
mode b Select the Multi Burst image b Select the Multi Burst image
with b/B. with b/B.
Mode dial: The selected Multi Burst image is The selected Multi Burst image is
You can play back Multi Burst images played back continuously. played back continuously.
continuously or play them back frame by
80 min c Press the center of the multi-
frame. This function is used for checking 101 14/14
the images.
selector when the desired
frame is displayed.
“Step” appears.
101-0014 2004 1 1 10:30PM
Mode dial PAUSE BACK/NEXT VOLUME
80 min
101 14/14
Step
3/16
To pause
Press the center of the multi-selector. To

resume playback, press the center again. 101-0014
PLAY
2004 1 1 10:30PM
FRAME BACK/NEXT VOLUME
The playback starts from the frame

displayed on the screen. d Advance the frame with b/B.
B:The next frame is displayed. When
you move the multi-selector to B
and hold it, the frame advances.
b:The previous frame is displayed.
• When Multi Burst images are played back on a When you move the multi-selector
computer or on a camera without the Multi to b and hold it, the frame advances
Burst function, the 16 frames you shot will be in the reverse direction.
displayed at the same time as part of one image.
• You cannot divide the Multi Burst image.
To return to normal playback
In Step 4, press the center of the multi-
selector. The playback starts from the frame
displayed on the screen.
87
To delete shot images
When using this mode, you cannot delete
only certain frames. When you delete
images, all 16 of the frames are deleted at
the same time.
1 Display the Multi Burst image you want
to delete.
2 Press (delete).
3 Select [Delete], then press the center of
the multi-selector.
All of the frames are deleted.
88
Still image editing
On the single screen On the Index screen
Protecting images
a Set the mode dial to . a Set the mode dial to , press
– Protect / (index) to switch to the
b Display the image you want to
Mode dial: Index screen.
protect with b/B.
To prevent accidental erasure of an b Press MENU.
important image, you can protect it. c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
The menu appears.
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) c Select - (Protect) with b/B,
d Select - (Protect) with b/B,
MENU then press the center of the
then press the center of the
Mode dial multi-selector.
multi-selector.
The image currently being displayed is d Select [Select] with b/B, then
now protected, and the - (Protect) press the center of the multi-
mark is indicated on the screen. selector.
80 min VGA
101 2/9 e Select the image you want to
protect with v/V/b/B, then
Still image editing

Protect
Exit selector.
/ BACK/NEXT
The green - (Protect) mark is

indicated on the selected image.
• Note that formatting the recording medium e To protect other images,
erases all the data in the recording medium display the image you want to
even if images are protected, and these images
cannot be recovered. protect with b/B, then press
• It may take some time to protect the images. the center of the multi-
selector.
SELECT MENU TO NEXT
To cancel the protection f To protect other images,

In Step 4 or 5, press the center of the
repeat Step 5.
multi-selector again. The - mark
disappears.
89
g Press MENU. To release protection of all the
images in the folder Changing image size
h Select [OK] with B, then press
In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], and
the center of the multi- press the center of the multi-selector. Then – Resize
selector. select [Off], and press the center. Mode dial:
The - mark turns white and the You can change the image size of a
selected image is protected. recorded image, and save it as a new file.
You can resize to the following sizes.
To cancel the protection 8M, 5M, 3M, 1M and VGA.
In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, The original image is retained even after
select [Exit]. resizing.
To release protection Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

In Step 5, select an image for which you MENU
want to release protection with v/V/b/B
Mode dial
and press the center of the multi-selector.
The - mark turns gray and repeat this
operation for all the images for which you
want to release protection. Then, press
MENU, select [OK], and press the center of
the multi-selector.
To protect all the images in the

folder
In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then
a Set the mode dial to .
press the center of the multi-selector. Next,
select [On], then press the center. b Display the image you want to
resize with b/B.
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
90
d Select (Resize) with b/B, • In E-Mail mode, the print (DPOF) mark is
then press the center of the Choosing images to marked on the normal size image that was
recorded at the same time.
multi-selector. print • When you mark images shot in Multi Burst
mode, all the images are printed on one sheet
e Select the new size with v/V, – Print (DPOF) mark divided into 16 panels.
then press the center of the Mode dial:
• If you mark an image shot in TIFF mode with a
print (DPOF) mark, only the uncompressed
multi-selector.
You can designate certain images to be (TIFF) image is printed, and the JPEG image
The resized image is recorded in the printed. recorded at the same time is not printed.
recording folder as the newest file. This function is convenient when you want • You cannot set the number of print sheets.
to print images at a shop or using a printer
To cancel the resizing that conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print
In Step 5, select [Cancel]. Order Format) standard or using
PictBridge-compliant printers.
• You cannot change the size of movies, Multi
Burst mode, RAW data file or uncompressed Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)
(TIFF) images.
• When images are resized from a smaller to a MENU
larger size, the image quality will deteriorate. Mode dial
• You cannot resize to 3:2-sized image.
• If you resize a 3:2-sized image, black bands
Still image editing

will appear at the top and bottom of the image.
• You cannot mark movies or images recorded in

RAW mode.
91
On the single screen On the Index screen f To mark other images, repeat
Step 5 for each of them.
a Set the mode dial to . a Set the mode dial to and
press / (index) to switch g Press MENU.
b Display the image you want to
to the Index screen.
print with b/B. h Select [OK] with B, then press
b Press MENU. the center of the multi-
c Press MENU.
The menu appears. selector.
The menu appears.
c Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with B, The mark turns white and the
d Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with b/ setting is completed.
B, then press the center of the
multi-selector.
multi-selector. To delete the mark
The mark is indicated on this d Select [Select] with b/B, then In Step 5, select the image you want to
image. press the center of the multi- delete the mark with v/V/b/B, and
press the center of the multi-selector.
80 min VGA
101 2/9
selector.
• You cannot mark using the [All In This
Folder] option. To delete all the marks from
the images in the folder
DPOF e Select the images you want to
Exit In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then
BACK/NEXT
mark with v/V/b/B, then press press the center of the multi-selector. Next,
the center of the multi- select [Off], then press the center.
e To mark other images, display
selector.
the image you want to mark
The green mark is indicated on the To cancel the marking
with b/B, then press the center selected image. In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8,
of the multi-selector. select [Exit].
To delete the mark

In Step 4 or 5, press the center of the
multi-selector again. The mark
disappears. SELECT MENU TO NEXT
92
Still image printing (PictBridge printer)
Preparing the camera Connecting the camera to
Connecting to a the printer
Set the USB mode on the camera to connect
PictBridge printer the camera with a printer. Connect the (USB) jack on the camera
Even if you do not have a computer, you and the USB connector on the printer using
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) a USB cable. The connection can be made
can easily print images shot using your
camera by connecting the camera to a Mode dial regardless of whether the camera is turned
PictBridge-compliant printer. For on or off.

preparation, you only need to select the When the camera is turned on, the camera
USB connection in the SET UP settings and turns to playback mode regardless of the
connect the camera to the printer. mode dial position and the newest image in
Using a PictBridge-compliant printer the selected recording folder is displayed on
allows you to easily print the Index prints*. the screen.
* An Index print function may not be provided

depending on the printer. a Set the mode dial to SET UP.
• When printing images, we recommend that you b Select (Setup 2) with V, then After the connection
use the AC Adaptor to prevent the camera is made, the
turning off. select [USB Connect] with B/ mark is indicated on
v/V. the screen.
c Select [PictBridge] with B/v, 8M

101 2/9

multi-selector.
Setup 2
101-0002 2004 1 1 10:30AM
File Number: BACK/NEXT VOLUME
USB Connect: PictBridge

Video Out: PTP
Clock Set: Normal
Printer
The USB mode is set.
93
When [USB Connect] is not set On the single screen
to [PictBridge] in the SET UP Printing images
a Select the recording medium
settings
You can select an image and print it. Set up with the /CF switch and
You cannot use the PictBridge function,
the camera following the procedure on page display the image you want to
even when you turn on the camera. Set
93, and then connect the printer. print with b/B.
[USB Connect] to [PictBridge].
1 Press MENU and select [USB Connect],
b Press MENU.
then press the center of the multi-
selector. The menu appears.
2 Select [PictBridge] with v , then press c Select (Print) with b/B, then
the center.
selector.
USB Connect d Select [This image] with v/V,

PictBridge
PTP
Normal
/ multi-selector.
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) The Print screen appears.
MENU /CF switch 8M
101 2/9
Print
Index Off
• You cannot print movies and images recorded Date Off
Quantity 1
in RAW mode. Exit OK
• When printing E-mail mode images or
uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their
corresponding JPEG files are printed. e Select [Quantity] with v/V,
• If an error message is sent from the connected
printer during the connection, flashes for select the number of images
about five seconds. In such cases, check the with b/B.
printer. You can select the number up to 20.
• Note that printing is canceled if you switch the
/CF switch while printing images.
94
f Select [OK] with V/B, then To insert the date and time on On the Index screen
press the center of the multi- images
a Select the recording medium
selector. In Step 5, select [Date], then select the
date format with b/B. You can select from with the /CF switch and
The image is printed.
[Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted press / (index) to switch
Do not disconnect the USB cable
while the (Not disconnect USB in the images printed. to the Index screen.
cable) mark is indicated on the screen. This function may not be provided The screen turns to the index screen.

depending on the printer.
8M b Press MENU.
101 2/9
The menu appears.
Printing
1/3 c Select (Print) with B, then
Exit press the center of the multi-
selector.
d Select [Select] with b/B, then
To cancel printing
In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 6,
select [Exit]. selector.
e Select the image you want to
To print other images print with v/V/b/B, then press
After Step 6, select another image, then the center of the multi-
select [Print] with v .
selector.
The mark is indicated on the
To print all the images indicated
selected image.
with the mark
In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the
images indicated with the mark are
printed in the specified number, regardless
of the image displayed.
SELECT MENU TO NEXT
95
f To print other images, repeat To cancel printing
Step 5. In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 9, Printing index-images
select [Exit].
g Press MENU. You can print some images side-by-side.
The Print screen appears. We refer to this function as an index print*.
You can lay single images side-by-side in a
with the mark specified number and print them, or lay
In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the different images side-by-side to make a set
Print
Index Off images indicated with the mark are by combining multiple different images and
Date Off
Quantity 1 printed in the specified number, regardless print the set in the specified number of
Exit OK
of the image displayed. copies.
Set up the camera following the procedure
h Select [Quantity] with v/V, To print all the images in the on page 93, and connect the printer.
select the number of images folder
In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then * An index print function may not be provided
with b/B. depending on a printer.
You can select the number up to 20.
All the images selected are printed in
the specified number. To insert the date and time on
images
i Select [OK] with V/B, then
In Step 8, select [Date], then select the
press the center of the multi- date format with b/B. You can select from
selector. [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted
The images are printed. in the images printed.
Do not disconnect the USB cable This function may not be provided
while the mark is indicated on depending on the printer.
the screen. /
MENU /CF switch
Printing
2/3
Exit
96
• You cannot print movies and images recorded On the single screen f Select [Quantity] with v/V,
in RAW mode.
select the number of images
• When printing E-mail mode images or a Select the recording medium
uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their laid side-by-side with b/B.
with the /CF switch and
corresponding JPEG files are printed. You can select the number up to 20.
• If an error message is sent from the connected display the image you want to
You can lay the specified number of
printer during the connection, flashes for print with b/B. images side-by-side.
about five seconds. In such cases, check the
printer. b Press MENU. g Select [OK] with V/B, then

• Note that printing is canceled if you switch the
The menu appears. press the center of the multi-
/CF switch while printing images.
c Select (Print) with b/B, then selector.
press the center of the multi- The image is printed.
selector.
while the (Not disconnect USB
d Select [This image] with v/V, cable) mark is indicated on the screen.
then press the center of the 8M
101 2/9
multi-selector.
The Print screen appears. Printing Index
1/1
8M Exit
101 2/9
Print
Index Off
Date
Quantity
Off
1
To cancel printing
Exit OK In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 7,
select [Exit].
e Select [Index] with v , select
[On] with b/B.
To print other images
After Step 7, select another image, then
select [Print] with v . Then repeat from
Step 4.
97
To print all the images indicated On the Index screen g Press MENU.
with the mark
a Select the recording medium h Select [Index] with v , then
images indicated with the mark are with the /CF switch and select [On] with b/B.
printed, regardless of the image displayed. press / (index) to switch
i Select [Quantity] with v/V,
to the Index screen.
select the number of copies
To insert the date and time on b Press MENU. you want to print with b/B.
images
The menu appears. You can select the number up to 20.
date format with b/B. You can select from c Select (Print) with B, then j Select [OK] with V/B, then
[Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted press the center of the multi- press the center of the multi-
in the images printed. selector. selector.
This function may not be provided
The images are printed.
depending on the printer. d Select [Select] with b/B, then
press the center of the multi- while the mark is indicated on
• All the images may not be laid on a sheet selector. the screen.
depending on the number of images.
e Select the desired image with
v/V/b/B, then press the center
of the multi-selector. Printing Index
1/3
The mark is indicated on the Exit
selected image.
To cancel printing
In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 0,
select [Exit].
SELECT MENU TO NEXT
f To print other images, repeat

Step 5.
98
with the mark
images indicated with the mark are
printed, regardless of the image displayed.
To print all the images in the

folder
In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then
To insert the date and time on

images
date format with b/B. You can select from
[Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted
in the images printed.
This function may not be provided
99
Enjoying movies
• The [640 (Fine)] image size can be used To shoot close-ups (Macro)
Shooting movies only when you record the image into the
Set the mode dial to and follow the
“Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive.
procedure on page 33.
Mode dial: d Press the shutter button fully
You can shoot movies with audio. down. To shoot with a self-timer
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) “REC” appears on the screen and the Set the mode dial to and follow the
camera starts recording the image and procedure on page 34.
MENU sound.
Mode dial • Be careful not to touch the microphone (page
80 min 101
REC 00:00:02[00:10:48] 12) during shooting.
Shutter button • The following functions cannot be used.
– Digital zoom
– Inserting date and time
• When you select [640 (Fine)] with the supplied
A/V connecting cable plugged in the A/V OUT
• When the capacity of the recording
(MONO) jack, you cannot check the shooting
medium is used up, recording stops.
image using the screen. The screen turns blue.
e Press the shutter button fully • See pages 135, 136 for the recording time
allowed for each image size.
down again to stop recording.
Indicators on the screen while

a Set the mode dial to . you are shooting movies
These indicators are not recorded.
b Press MENU.
Each time you press (screen status), the
The menu appears. status of the screen changes as follows:
c Select (Image Size) with b, Indicators off t Indicators on.
then select the desired size A histogram is not displayed.
See page 152 for a detailed description of
with v/V.
the indicated items.
You can choose from [640 (Fine)],
[640 (Standard)], or [160].
100
b Select the desired movie with To adjust the volume
Viewing movies on b/B. Adjust the volume with v/V.
the screen Movies with the image size [640
(Fine)] or [640 (Standard)] are To fast-forward / rewind
Mode dial: displayed on the full screen. Move the multi-selector to B (next) or b
You can view movies on the screen of the (previous) while playing back a movie.
80 min
camera and hear sounds from the speaker of 101 10/10
00:00:00
To return to normal playback, press the
the camera. center of the multi-selector.
Speaker
101_0010 2004 1 1 10:30PM
Indicators on the screen while
PLAY BACK/NEXT VOLUME
Mode dial you are viewing movies
Movies with the image size [160] are Each time you press (screen status),
displayed a size smaller than still the status of the screen changes as follows:
images. Indicators off t Indicators on.
c Press the center of the multi- A histogram is not displayed.
See page 154 for a detailed description of
selector.
the indicated items.
The movie images and sound are
played back. • The procedure for viewing movies on a TV is
B (playback) appears on the screen the same as that for viewing still images
while a movie is playing back. (page 41).
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) • A movie recorded using other Sony devices
80 min
101 10/10
may be displayed a size smaller than still
00:00:03 images.
Enjoying movies
a Set the mode dial to .
Playback bar
101_0010 2004 1 1 10:30PM
STOP REV/CUE VOLUME
To stop playback
Press the center of the multi-selector again.
101
On the single screen On the Index screen
Deleting movies
a Set the mode dial to . a Set the mode dial to and
Mode dial: press / (index) button to
b Select the movie you want to
You can delete unwanted movies. switch to the Index screen.
delete with b/B.
b Press (delete).
Mode dial c Press (delete).
The movie has not yet been deleted at c Select [Select] with b/B, then
this point. press the center of the multi-
d Select [Delete] with v , then selector.
press the center of the multi- d Select the movies you want to
selector. delete with v/V/b/B, then
“Access” appears on the screen and the press the center of the multi-
movie is deleted.
selector.
e To delete other movies, display The (delete) mark is indicated on
/
the movie you want to delete the selected movie.
with b/B, then repeat Step 4.
• You cannot delete the protected movies.
• Note that the movies once deleted cannot be To cancel the deletion
recovered. In Step 4 or 5, select [Exit].
SELECT TO NEXT
The movie has not yet been deleted at

this point.
e Repeat Step 4 to delete other
movies.
f Press (delete).
102
g Select [OK] with B, then press <Example> Cutting the movie numbered
the center of the multi- Editing movies 101_0002
101_0001 101_0003
selector.
Mode dial:
“Access” message appears on the
You can cut movies, or delete unnecessary 1 2 3
screen and the movie will be deleted.
portions of movies. This is the
recommended mode to use when the 101_0002
To cancel the deletion 1. Cutting scene A.
recording medium capacity is insufficient,
In Step 3 or 7, select [Exit]. or when you attach movies to your e-mail
1 A 2 B 3
messages.
To delete all the images in the
101_0002
folder The file numbers assigned when
Divide point
In Step 3, select [All In This Folder], then 2. Cutting scene B.

movies are cut 101_0004
press the center of the multi-selector. Next, The cut movies are assigned new numbers
select [OK], then press the center. To cancel and recorded as the newest files in the 1 3 A 2 B
the deletion, select [Cancel] with b, then recording folder. The original movie is
press the center. deleted and its file number is skipped. 101_0005
Divide
point
3. Deleting scenes A and B if they are
unnecessary.
101_0004 101_0007
1 3 A 2 B
Enjoying movies
Delete 101_0006 Delete
4. Only the desired scenes remain.
1 3 2
101_0006
103
Cutting movies 80 min
Deleting unnecessary
Divide
101 10/10
00:00:02 portions of movies
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Dividing
Point
a Cut an unnecessary portion of
MENU OK
Cancel
Exit a movie.
Mode dial
When you want to adjust the cutting
b Display the portion of the
point, select [c/C] (frame movie you want to delete.
forward/ rewind) and adjust the cutting
c Press (delete).
point with b/ B. If you want to change
the cutting point, select [Cancel]. The The movie has not yet been deleted at
playback of the movie starts again. this point.
f When you have decided on a d Select [Delete] with v , then

cutting point, select [OK] with press the center of the multi-
v/V, and press the center of selector.
the multi-selector. The movie currently displayed on the
a Set the mode dial to . screen is deleted.
g Select [OK] with v , then press
b Select the movie you want to the center of the multi-
cut with b/B. selector.
The movie is cut.
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
To cancel cutting
d Select (Divide) with B, then In Step 5 or 7, select [Exit]. The movie
press the center of the multi- appears on the screen again.
selector. Next, select [OK] with • You cannot cut the following images.
v , then press the center. – Still images
– Movies not long enough to cut
The playback of the movie starts.
– Protected movies
e Decide on a cutting point. • You cannot restore movies once you cut them.
• The original movie is deleted when you cut it.
Press the center of the multi-selector at • The cut movie is recorded in the selected
the desired cutting point. recording folder as the newest file.
104
Enjoying images on your computer
• Operations are not guaranteed when using a Contents of the CD-ROM
Copying images to USB hub.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the x USB Driver
your computer recommended computer environments This driver is needed in order to connect the
– For Windows users mentioned above. camera to a computer.
When using Windows XP, you need not
Recommended computer USB mode install the USB driver.
environment There are two modes for a USB connection
x Image Transfer
when connecting with a computer, This application is used to easily transfer
OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows
[Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default images from the camera to a computer.
98SE, Windows 2000 Professional,
setting is the [Normal] mode.
Windows Millennium Edition, Windows * Compatible only with Windows XP. When x ImageMixer
XP Home Edition, or Windows XP connected to a computer, only the data in the This application is used to display and edit
Professional folder selected by the camera is copied to the

images that are stored in a computer.
The above OS must be installed at the computer. To select the folder, follow the
factory. Operation is not assured in an procedure on page 83.
• The required operations may differ
environment upgraded to the operating depending on your OS.
systems described above or in a multi-boot Communication with your • Close down all applications
environment. computer running on the computer before
CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster When your computer resumes from the installing the USB driver and
USB connector: Provided as standard suspend or sleep mode, communication application.
Display: 800 × 600 dots or more between your camera and your computer • When using Windows XP or Windows
High Color (16-bit color, 65000 colors) or may not recover at the same time. 2000, log on as Administrators.
more • The display settings should be 800 × 600
When a USB connector is not dots or more and High Color (16-bit
• This camera is compliant with USB 2.0.
provided on your computer color, 65000 colors) or more. When set to
• Use with a USB 2.0 (High-Speed USB)
compatible computer environment allows high- less than 800 × 600 dots or 256 colors or
When neither a USB connector nor a
speed data transfer. less, the install title screen does not
recording medium slot is provided, you can
• If you connect two or more USB equipment to appear.
a single computer at the same time, some copy images using an additional device. See
equipment, including your camera, may not the Sony Website for details.
operate depending on the type of USB http://www.sony.net/
equipment.
105
Installing the USB driver c Click [USB Driver] on the title e Click [Yes, I want to restart my
screen. computer now], then click
When using Windows XP, you need not
install the USB driver. [Finish].
Once the USB driver is installed, you need
not install the USB driver.
a Turn on your computer, and
insert the supplied CD-ROM
into the CD-ROM drive.
Do not connect your camera to
your computer at this time. The “InstallShield Wizard” screen
appears. Your computer restarts. Then, you can
The model selection screen appears. If
it does not appear, double-click d Click [Next]. When the establish USB connection.
(My Computer) t (ImageMixer) “Information” screen appears,
in that order. click [Next].
b Click [Cyber-shot] on the
model selection screen.
The installation menu screen appears.

The USB driver installation starts.
When the installation is completed, the
screen informs you of completion.
106
Installing “Image Transfer” c Click [Next]. When “License e Select the folder to be
Agreement” screen appears, installed, then click [Next].
You can use the “Image Transfer” software
to copy images to your computer click [Yes]. Select the program folder, then
automatically when you connect the camera click [Next].
to your computer.
a Click [Cyber-shot] on the
model selection screen.

The installation menu screen appears.
Read the agreement carefully. If you
b Click [Image Transfer] on the accept the terms of the agreement,
proceed with the installation. The f Confirm if the checkbox is
installation menu screen.
“Information” screen appears. checked on the “Image
Select the desired language,
d Click [Next]. Transfer Settings” screen,
then click [OK].
then click [Next].
The “Welcome to the InstallShield When the installation is completed, the

Wizard for Image Transfer” screen screen informs you of completion.
appears.
• This section describes the English screen.

107
g Click [Finish]. Installing “ImageMixer” • If DirectX8.0a or a later version is not installed
in your computer, the “Information” screen
You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for appears. Follow the procedure on the screen.
Sony” software to copy, view and edit
c Restart your computer
images, and create video CDs. For details,
according to the screen.
see the software’s help files.
a Click [ImageMixer] on the d Remove the CD-ROM.
installation menu screen.
Select the desired language,
The “InstallShield Wizard” screen then click [OK].
closes.
If you wish to continue with the
installation of “ImageMixer,” click
[ImageMixer] on the installation menu
screen and then follow the procedure.
• The USB driver is needed in order to use

“Image Transfer.” If the necessary driver is not
already installed on your computer, a screen
that asks if you want to install the driver will
appear. Follow the instructions that appear on
the screen. The “Welcome to the InstallShield
Wizard” screen appears.
• This section describes the English screen.
b Follow instructions on each

succeeding screen.
Install “ImageMixer” according to the
screen.
• When you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP,

install “WinASPI.”
108
Connecting the camera to c Connect the supplied USB
your computer cable to the (USB) jack of
USB Mode
the camera.
a Insert the recording medium Normal
Access
with the images you want to Memory Stick indicators*
copy into the camera. Connect
Switch on MENU
the supplied AC Adaptor, and
plug the adaptor into a wall “USB Mode Normal” appears on the screen
outlet (wall socket). of the camera. When a USB connection is
established for the first time, your computer
automatically runs the used program to
recognize the camera. Wait for a while.

* During communication, the access indicators
d Connect the USB cable to your turn red.
AC Adaptor
computer.
• If “USB Mode Normal” does not appear in Step
4, press MENU, select [USB Connect], and
set it to [Normal].
To a wall outlet • When using a Microdrive/CF card, opening the
(wall socket) CF card cover cancels the USB connection. Do
not open the CF card cover during the USB
• Select the recording medium with the /CF connection.
switch (page 21).
• When you copy images to your computer using
the battery pack, copying may be failed or
cause data corruption by battery shutoff. We
• When using a desktop computer, connect the
recommend that you use the AC Adaptor.
USB cable to the USB connector on the rear
b Turn on your computer and the panel.
• When using Windows XP, the AutoPlay wizard
camera. automatically appears on the desktop. Proceed
to page 112.
109
P Disconnecting the USB Copying images using – Windows XP
cable, removing the recording “Image Transfer” Connect the camera and your
medium, or turning off the computer with the USB cable.
– Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me “Image Transfer” starts up automatically
camera during a USB
Connect the camera and your and the images are automatically copied to
connection
computer with the USB cable. the computer.
For Windows 2000, Me, or XP users “Image Transfer” launches and the images Windows XP is set so that the OS AutoPlay
1 Double-click on the tasktray. are automatically copied to the computer. Wizard activates.
When copying is complete, “ImageMixer” If you want to cancel the setting, follow the
automatically launches and images appear. procedure below.
a Click [Start], then click [My
Computer].
Double-click here
b Right-click [Sony
2 Click (Sony DSC), then click [Stop]. MemoryStick], then click
3 Confirm the device on the confirmation [Properties].
window, then click [OK].
4 Click [OK]. c Cancel the setting.
Step 4 is unnecessary for Windows XP 1 Click [AutoPlay].
users. 2 Set [Content type] to [Pictures].
3 Check [Select an action to perform]
5 Disconnect the USB cable, remove the
• Normally “Image Transfer” and “Date” folders under [Actions], select [Take no
recording medium, or turn off the
are created inside the “My Documents” folder, action], then click [Apply].
camera.
and all of the image files recorded with the 4 Set [Content type] to [Video files]
camera are copied into these folders. and proceed Step 3. Set [Content
For Windows 98 or 98SE users • You can change the “Image Transfer” settings type] to [Mixed content] and
Confirm that the access indicators (page 111). proceed Step 3.
(page 109) on the screen are turned white 5 Click [OK].
and carry out only Step 5 above. The [Properties] screen closes.
The OS AutoPlay Wizard does not

start up automatically even if the
USB connection is made next time.
110
Changing “Image Transfer” Copying images without d Double-click the “My
settings using “Image Transfer” Documents” folder and right-
click on the “My Documents”
You can change “Image Transfer” settings. – Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me
Right-click the “Image Transfer” icon on window to display the menu,
If you do not set to launch “Image Transfer”
the tasktray, select [Open Settings]. The then select [Paste] from the
automatically, you can copy images as
settings you can set are as follows: [Basic], following procedure. menu.
[Copy], and [Delete]. The image files are copied to the “My
a Double-click [My Computer],
Documents” folder.
then double-click [Removable
Disk].
The contents of the recording medium
Right-click here inserted in your camera appear.

• This section describes an example of copying
When the “Image Transfer” starts, the images to the “My Documents” folder.
below window appears. • When the “Removable Disk” icon is not shown,
see page 112.
• When using Windows XP, see page 112.
b Double-click [DCIM], then

double-click the folder that the
image files you want to copy
are stored.
c Right-click the image file to
display the menu, then select
[Copy] from the menu.
When you select [Settings] from the above
window, you can only change the [Basic]
setting.
111
When an image with the same When a removable disk icon is – Windows XP
file name exists in the copy not shown
destination folder Copying images using the
1 Right-click [My Computer] to display
The overwrite confirmation message the menu, then click [Properties].
Windows XP AutoPlay wizard
appears. When you overwrite the existing The “System Properties” screen appears. a Make a USB connection
image with the new one, the original file (page 109). Click [Copy
2 Display [Device Manager].
data is deleted.
1 Click [Hardware]. pictures to a folder on my
2 Click [Device Manager]. computer using Microsoft
To change the file name • For Windows 98, 98SE, Me users,
To copy an image file to the computer Scanner and Camera Wizard],
Step 1 is unnecessary. Click the
without overwriting, change the file name [Device Manager] tab. then click [OK].
to the desired name. However, note that if The “Scanner and Camera Wizard”
3 If [ Sony DSC] is displayed, delete it.
you change the file name, you may not be screen appears.
1 Right-click [ Sony DSC].
able to play back that image with your
camera. To play back images with the
2 Click [Uninstall]. b Click [Next].
The “Confirm Device Removal” The images stored on the recording
camera, perform the operation on page 116.
screen appears. medium are displayed.
• For Windows 98, 98SE, Me users,
click [Remove]. c Click the checkbox of images
3 Click [OK]. that you do not want to copy to
The device is deleted. your computer to remove the
checkmark, then click [Next].
Try the USB driver installation again using
the supplied CD-ROM (page 106). The “Picture Name and Destination”
screen appears.
d Select a name and destination
for your pictures, then click
[Next].
Image copying starts. When the
copying is completed, the “Other
Options” screen appears.
112
e Select [Nothing. I’m finished Viewing the images on your
working with these pictures], computer
then click [Next].
a Click [Start], then click [My
The “Completing the Scanner and
Documents].
Camera Wizard” screen appears.
The “My Documents” folder contents
f Click [Finish]. are displayed.
The wizard closes.
• This section describes the procedure for
• To continue copying other images, follow the viewing copied images in the “My Documents”
procedure given under P on page 110 to folder.
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. • When not using Windows XP, double-click
Then, perform the procedure from Step 1 [My Documents] on the desktop.
again. • You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for

Sony” software to view and edit images on your
computer. For details, see the software’s help
files.
b Double-click the desired image

file.
The image is displayed.
113
Image file storage destinations and file names
The image files recorded with your camera
are grouped as folders in the recording
medium.
Example: when viewing folders on

Windows XP (when using a “Memory
Stick”)
Folder containing image data which was

recorded using the camera not equipped
with the folder creating function.
Folder containing image data which was
recorded using your camera. When not
creating any folders, there is only the
“101MSDCF” folder.
Folder containing E-Mail and TIFF mode
image data/movie data/ Voice mode audio
data which was recorded using the camera
not equipped with the folder creating
function.
• Even when using a Microdrive/CF card, • You cannot record any images to
“Sony MemoryStick” may be displayed, “100MSDCF” or “MSSONY” folders.
depending on your computer The images in these folders are available
environment. only for viewing.
• For more information about the folder,
see pages 50, 83.
114
Folder File name File meaning
101MSDCF to DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image files shot in
999MSDCF – Normal mode (page 27)
– Exposure Bracket mode (page 63)
– Burst mode (page 75)
– Multi Burst mode (page 76)
• Still image files recorded simultaneously in
– RAW mode (page 79)
– TIFF mode (page 80)
– E-Mail mode (page 81)
– Voice mode (page 81)
DSC0ssss.JPE • Small-size image files shot in E-Mail mode (page 81)
DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio files shot in Voice mode (page 81)

DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed (TIFF) image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 80)
DSC0ssss.SRF • RAW data file recorded in RAW mode (page 79)
MOV0ssss.MPG • Movie files (page 100)
MOV0ssss.THM • Index image files recorded in movie mode (page 100)
• ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.
• The numerical portions of the following files are the same.

– A RAW data file shot in RAW mode and its corresponding image file
– An uncompressed image file shot in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file
– A small-size image file shot in E-Mail mode and its corresponding image file
– An audio file shot in Voice mode and its corresponding image file
– A movie file recorded in movie mode and its corresponding index image file
• To view a RAW data file, you have to install exclusive application software from the supplied
CD-ROM.
115
Viewing an image previously a Right-click the image file, then
copied to a computer click [Rename]. Change the file
name to “DSC0ssss”.
This operation is required for viewing
image files that have been copied ssss stands for any number within
previously to a computer and already the range from 0001 to 9999.
• A file extension may be indicated
deleted from the recording medium using
depending on the setup of the computer.
the camera. The extension of a still image is “JPG”
Copy the image files stored on your and that of a movie is “MPG”. Do not
computer to a recording medium and view change the extension.
them on the camera.
b Copy the image file to a folder
• Skip Step 1 if you have not changed the file on the recording medium.
name assigned by this camera. 1 Right-click the image file, then
• You may not be able to view the image click [Copy].
depending on the image size. 2 Select the [DCIM] folder from
• Images modified with a computer or images [Removable Disk] or [Sony
shot using other than this camera may not be
MemoryStick] in [My Computer].
able to be played back on the camera.
• If the warning message for overwriting the data 3 Right-click the [sssMSDCF]
appears, enter other numbers in Step 1. folder, then click [Paste].
• If there is no folder to store the image file, sss stands for any number
create a new folder, then copy the image file. within the range from 100 to 999.
For details on how to create the folder, see
page 50.
116
computer. To select the folder, follow the Disconnecting the USB cable,
Copying images to procedure on page 83. removing the recording medium, or
your computer turning off the camera during a USB
Communication with your connection
– For Macintosh users computer Drag and drop the drive icon or the icon of
When your computer resumes from the the recording medium to the “Trash” icon,
Recommended computer suspend or sleep mode, communication then remove the USB cable, remove the
environment between your camera and your computer recording medium, or turn off the camera
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.0, remove the
OS: Mac OS 9.1, 9.2, or Mac OS X (v10.0/ may not recover at the same time.
USB cable etc., after you have turned your
v10.1/v10.2) computer off.
The above OS must be installed at the When a USB connector is not
factory. b Copying images
provided on your computer
USB connector: Provided as standard 1 Double-click the newly recognized icon

Display: 800 × 600 dots or more When neither a USB connector nor a
recording medium slot is provided, you can on the desktop.
32000-color mode or more The contents of the recording medium
• If you connect two or more USB equipment to copy images using an additional device. See
the Sony Website for details. inserted in your camera appear.
a single computer at the same time, some
equipment, including your camera, may not http://www.sony.net/ 2 Double-click “DCIM.”
operate depending on the type of USB 3 Double-click the folder that the images
equipment. a Connecting your camera to
you want to copy are stored.
• Operations are not guaranteed when using a your computer
USB hub. 4 Drag and drop the image files to the hard
For details, see page 109.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the disk icon.
recommended computer environments The image files are copied to your hard
mentioned above. disk.
For details on the storage location of the
USB mode images and file names, see page 114.
There are two modes for a USB connection
when connecting with a computer,
[Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default
setting is the [Normal] mode.
* Compatible only with Mac OS X. When
connected to a computer, only the data in the
folder selected by the camera is copied to the
117
c Viewing the images on your For Mac OS X users
computer When you click an E-Mail mode image file,
“There is no application available to open
1 Double-click the hard disk icon. the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".” may
2 Double-click the desired image file in be shown. In this case, carry out the
the folder containing the copied files. following setup. The screen may differ
The image file opens. depending on your OS version.
1 Click [Choose Application...] on the
• Close down all applications running on
the computer before installing screen “There is no application available
application. to open the document
• You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for "DSC0ssss.JPE".”
Sony” software to copy images to your
2 Change [Recommended Applications]
computer and to view images on your
computer. For details on installing, see to [All Applications].
operating instructions supplied with the CD- 3 Select [QuickTime Player] from the
ROM. For details on operation, see the application list, then click [Open].
software’s help files.
• When the image cannot be displayed, increase
the virtual memory capacity.
• “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” cannot be used
with Mac OS X.
• “Image Transfer” cannot be used with
Macintosh.
118
Troubleshooting
2 Should your camera still not work 3 Should your camera still not work
Troubleshooting properly, press the RESET button properly, consult your Sony dealer or
located inside the battery/“Memory local authorized Sony service facility.
If you have trouble with your camera, try Stick” cover, then turn on the camera
the following solutions. again. (This will clear the date and time
1 First, check the items on pages 119 to settings, etc.)
129. If the screen shows RESET
“C:ss:ss,” the self-diagnosis
function is working. Please see
page 133.
Battery and power

Symptom Cause Solution
You cannot charge the • The camera is turned on. p Turn the camera off (page 18).
battery pack.
The battery pack cannot • The battery pack is not installed correctly. p Install the battery pack while pushing the battery eject lever
be installed. down using the front edge of the battery pack (page 14).
The e on the display p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14).
Troubleshooting
• The battery pack is not installed correctly.
window flashes quickly • The battery pack has malfunctioned. p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
when charging a battery facility.
pack.
The r on the display • The AC Adaptor is disconnected. p Properly connect the AC Adaptor (page 14).
window does not flash • The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned. p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
when charging a battery facility.
pack. • The battery pack is not installed correctly. p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14).
• The battery pack is completely charged. —
119
The battery remaining • You have used the camera for a long time in an p See page 146.
indicator is incorrect, or extremely hot or an extremely cold location.
sufficient battery • A deviation has occurred in the remaining p Charge the battery pack after using it completely. The battery
remaining indicator is battery time. remaining indicator displays the correct time (page 15).
displayed but the power • The battery pack is discharged. p Install a charged battery pack (page 14).
runs out soon. • The battery pack is dead (page 147). p Replace the battery pack with a new one.
The battery pack runs • You have used the camera in an extremely cold p See page 146.
down too quickly. location.
• The DC plug is dirty so the battery pack is not p Clean the DC plug with a cotton bud, etc., and charge the battery
charged enough. pack (page 143).
• The battery pack is dead (page 147). p Replace the battery pack with a new one.
You cannot turn on the • The battery pack is not installed correctly. p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14).
camera. • The AC Adaptor is disconnected. p Properly connect the AC Adaptor (page 17).
• The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned. p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility.
• The battery pack is discharged. p Install a charged battery pack (page 14).
• The battery pack is dead (page 147). p Replace the battery pack with a new one.
The power turns off • If you do not operate the camera for about three p Turn on the camera again (page 18) or use the AC Adaptor
suddenly. minutes when using a battery pack, the camera (page 17).
turns off automatically to prevent wearing down
the battery (page 18).
• The battery pack is discharged. p Replace it with a charged battery pack (page 14).
Shooting still images / movies

The LCD screen is not • The FINDER/LCD switch is set to FINDER. p Set it to LCD (page 29).
turned on even when the
power is turned on.
The subject is not visible • The diopter scale is not properly adjusted. p Adjust the finder adjustment lever (page 29).
on the finder.
The subject is not visible • The mode dial is not set to , P, S, A, M, SCN p Set it to , P, S, A, M, SCN or (pages 27 and 100).
on the screen. or .
120
The shooting image is not • The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when the A/ p Disconnect the A/V connecting cable.
displayed on the screen V connecting cable is connected to the A/V OUT p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].
during a movie shooting. (MONO) jack.
The image is out of focus. • The subject is too close. p Set the macro recording mode. Make sure to place the lens
farther away from the subject than the shortest shooting distance
when shooting (page 33).
• (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode) is p Set it to other modes (page 37).
selected for the Scene Selection function.
• Manual focus mode is selected. p Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).
Precision digital zoom • [Digital Zoom] is set to [Smart] in the SET UP p Set [Digital Zoom] to [Precision] (pages 30, 48, 140).
does not function. settings.
• You are shooting in RAW mode. p The precision digital zoom cannot be used in RAW mode (pages
30, 79).
Smart zoom does not • [Digital Zoom] is set to [Precision] in the SET p Set [Digital Zoom] to [Smart] (pages 30, 48, 140).
function. UP settings.
• The image size is set to [8M] or [3:2]. p Set image size to other settings except [8M] and [3:2]
(page 24).
• You are shooting in Multi Burst mode. p The smart zoom cannot be used in Multi Burst mode (pages 30,
76).
• You are shooting in RAW mode. p The smart zoom cannot be used in RAW mode (pages 30, 79).
The image is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source p Select the metering mode (page 58).
behind the subject. p Adjust the exposure (page 59).
Troubleshooting
p Set the flash mode to (Forced flash) (page 68).
• The brightness of the screen is too low. p Adjust the brightness of the screen (pages 48, 141).
The image is too bright. • You are shooting a spot lighted subject in a dark p Adjust the exposure (page 59).
location such as on a stage.
• The brightness of the screen is too high. p Adjust the brightness of the screen (pages 48, 141).
When looking at the • The camera temporarily brightens the screen to p This will have no effect on the image you shoot.
screen in a dark place, allow you to check the image being displayed
some noise may show up while you are using the camera in a dark place.
on the screen.
Vertical streaks appear • The smear phenomenon is occurring. p This is not a malfunction.
when you are shooting a
very bright subject.
121
You cannot shoot images. • No recording medium is inserted. p Insert a recording medium (pages 22, 23).
• The capacity of the recording medium is p Delete the images saved in the recording medium (page 43).
insufficient. p Change the recording medium.
• The /CF switch is not set to the proper p Set the switch to the proper position (page 21).
position.
• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
is set to the LOCK position.
• The CF card cover is open. p Close the CF card cover (page 23).
• You cannot shoot while the flash is charging. —
• The mode dial is not set to , P, S, A, M or p Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27).
SCN when you want to shoot a still image.
• The mode dial is not set to when you want to p Set the mode dial to (page 100).
shoot a movie.
• The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when you p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive (pages 100, 144).
shoot a movie. p Set the image size to any position other than [640 (Fine)].
Recording takes a long • NR slow shutter function is activated. p Set to a faster shutter speed than 1/25 second (page 55).
time.
A sound is made when • The sound is made by the lens in operation. p This is not a malfunction.
changing between the
NightShot and
NightFraming modes, or
when the shutter button is
lightly pressed while
NightFraming is set.
The image colors are not • The NightShot or NightFraming function is set. p Cancel the Nightshot/NightFraming functions (pages 77 and
correct. 78).
• Picture effect is activated. p Cancel Picture Effect (page 79).
NightShot or • The mode dial is set to S, A, M or SCN. p Set it to , P or (only for NightShot) (pages 77 and 78).
NightFraming does not • Manual focus mode is selected. p The NightFraming function cannot be used when manual focus
function. mode is selected. Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).
122
Cannot shoot images with • The mode dial is set to . p Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27).
the flash. • The flash is set to (No flash). p Set the flash to “Auto” (No indicator), (Forced flash), or
(Slow synchro) (page 68).
• (Twilight mode) is selected for the Scene p Set it to other settings (page 37).
Selection function.
• (Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene p Set the flash to (Forced flash) (page 37).
Selection function.
• The camera is in Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure p Cancel the Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode.
Bracket mode.
• [Hot Shoe] in the SET UP settings is set to [On]. p Set it to [Off] (pages 48 and 140).
• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the p Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET UP settings (pages 48,
SET UP settings, you did not pop the flash up 140) or pop the flash up using the OPEN (FLASH) switch
using the OPEN (FLASH) switch. (page 69).
• NightShot is activated. p Select the NightFraming function or cancel the NightShot
function (pages 77 and 78).
The macro mode does not • (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode) p Set it to other settings (page 37).
function. is selected for the Scene Selection function.
Cannot record in Multi • [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to other than p Set it to [Normal].
Burst, Burst, or Exposure [Normal].
Bracket mode.
The eyes of the subject — p Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On] (page 69).
come out red.
Troubleshooting
The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. p Set the correct date and time (page 19).
recorded incorrectly.
The aperture value and • The exposure is incorrect. p Adjust the exposure (page 59).
shutter speed flash when
you press and hold the
shutter button halfway
down.
123
Viewing images
The image cannot be • The mode dial is not set to . p Set the mode dial to (page 39).
played back. • You changed the folder/file name on a computer. p See page 116.
• You cannot play back the image on the camera if —
you modify the image on a computer.
• The camera is in USB mode. p Cancel USB communication (page 110).
The image is coarse right • The image momentarily becomes rough for p This is not a malfunction.
after being played back. image processing.
The images cannot be • The [Video Out] setting for the camera in SET p Set [Video Out] to [NTSC] or [PAL] (pages 48 and 142).
played back on a TV. UP is incorrect.
• The connection is not correct. p Check the connection (page 41).
The images cannot be — p See page 125.
played back on a
computer.
Deleting/editing an image
Your camera cannot • The image is protected. p Cancel the protection (page 89).
delete an image. • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
is set to the LOCK position.
You have deleted the • Once you have deleted an image, you cannot p Protecting the image can prevent accidental erasure (page 89).
image by mistake. restore it. p The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” will prevent
you from deleting images by mistake (page 144).
The resizing function • You cannot resize movies, Multi Burst, RAW —
does not work. data files, and uncompressed (TIFF) images.
You cannot attach a print • Print (DPOF) marks cannot be attached to —
(DPOF) mark. movies or images recorded in RAW mode.
You cannot cut a image. • The movie is not long enough to cut. —
• Protected movies cannot be cut. p Cancel the protection (page 89).
• Still images cannot be cut. —
124
Computers
You do not know whether — p Check “Recommended computer environment” (pages 105,
or not your OS can be 117).
used with the camera.
You cannot install the — p In Windows 2000, log on as Administrator (authorized
USB driver. Administrators) (page 105).
Your computer does not • The camera is turned off. p Turn on the camera (page 18).
recognize your camera. • The battery level is too low. p Use the AC Adaptor (page 17).
• You are not using the supplied USB cable. p Use the supplied USB cable (page 109).
• The USB cable is not connected securely. p Disconnect the USB cable, and securely connect it again. Make
sure that “USB Mode” is displayed on the screen (page 109).
• [USB Connect] is not set to [Normal] in the SET p Set it to [Normal] (page 142).
UP settings.
• The USB connectors on your computer are p Disconnect the USB cables except for those connected to the
connected to other equipment besides the keyboard and the mouse.
keyboard, the mouse.
• The camera is not directly connected to your p Directly connect the camera and your computer without using a
computer. USB hub.
• The USB driver is not installed. p Install the USB driver (page 106).
• Your computer does not properly recognize the p Delete the erroneously recognized device from your computer,
device because you connected the camera and then install the USB driver (pages 106, 112).
your computer with the USB cable before you
Troubleshooting
installed the “USB Driver” from the supplied
CD-ROM.
You cannot copy images. • The camera is not correctly connected to your p Connect the camera and your computer correctly (page 109).
computer.
• The copy procedure differs depending on your p Follow the copy procedure for your OS (pages 110, 111, 117).
OS.
— p If you are using the “Image Transfer” software, see page 110.
p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,
— click on HELP.
125
After making a USB — p Select [Launch Image Transfer automatically when the camera,
connection, “Image etc., is connected.] at [Basic] setting (page 111).
Transfer” does not — p Make a USB connection when the computer is turned on.
automatically start.
The image cannot be • You try to play back the image recorded in the p Install exclusive software from the supplied CD-ROM
played back on a RAW mode. (page 79).
computer. — p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,
click on HELP.
— p Consult the computer or software manufacturer.
The image and sound are • You are playing back the movie directly from p Copy the movie to the hard disk of the computer and then play
affected by noise when the recording medium. the movie file back from the hard disk (pages 110, 111, 117).
you play back a movie on
a computer.
You cannot print an — p Check the printer settings.
image. — p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,
click on HELP.
The error message • The computer display is not set correctly. p Set the display mode of your computer as follows:
appears when loading the For Windows, 800 × 600 dots or more, high color (16-bit color,
supplied CD-ROM. 65000 colors) or more.
For Macintosh, 800 × 600 dots or more, 32000 colors or more.
“Memory Stick”
You cannot insert a • You are inserting it backwards. p Insert it from the right side (page 22).
“Memory Stick.”
You cannot record on a • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
“Memory Stick.” is set to the LOCK position.
• The “Memory Stick” is full. p Delete unnecessary images (pages 43, 102).
• The /CF switch is set to CF. p Set the switch to (page 21).
• When shooting movies, the image size is set to p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144).
[640 (Fine)]. p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].
You cannot format a • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
“Memory Stick.” is set to the LOCK position.
126
You have formatted a • All the data on the “Memory Stick” are erased by p We recommend that you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect
“Memory Stick” by formatting. You cannot restore them. switch to the LOCK position to protect accidental erasure
mistake. (page 144).
Microdrive/CF card
You cannot insert a • You try to insert an unusable CF card. —
Microdrive/CF card. • You are inserting it backwards. p Insert it from the right side (page 23).
You cannot record on a • The Microdrive/CF card is full. p Delete unnecessary images (pages 43, 102).
Microdrive/CF card. • An unusable CF card is inserted. —
• The /CF switch is set to . p Set the switch to CF (page 21).
• When shooting movies using a CF card, the p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144).
image size is set to [640 (Fine)]. p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].
The Microdrive is heated. • You are using the Microdrive for a long time. p This is not a malfunction.
You have formatted a • All the data on the Microdrive/CF card are —
Microdrive/CF card by erased by formatting. You cannot restore them.
mistake.
PictBridge-compliant printer
Troubleshooting
The connection cannot be • The printer is not compliant with the PictBridge p Consult with the printer manufacturer.
established. standard.
• The printer does not set for the connection with p Check that the printer is turned on and can connect with the
the camera. camera.
• [USB Connect] is not set to [PictBridge] in the p Set it to [PictBridge] (page 142).
SET UP settings.
127
You cannot print images. • The camera does not connect to the printer. p Check that the camera and the printer are properly connected
using the USB cable.
• The printer is not turned on. p Turn on the printer. For further information, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with it.
• Movies and images recorded in RAW mode —
cannot be printed.
• Images modified with a computer or images shot —
using other than this camera may not be able to
be printed.
Printing is canceled. • You disconnected the USB cable before the —
(Not disconnect USB cable) mark
disappears.
• You switched the /CF switch while —
printing.
You cannot insert the date • The printer does not provide these functions. p Consult with the printer manufacturer whether the printer
or print images in the provides these function or not.
index mode. • The date may not be inserted in the index mode p Consult with the printer manufacturer.
“---- -- --”is printed on the • The recording date data is not recorded on the p The images that do not have the recording date data cannot be
date-inserted part. image. printed with the date inserted. Set [Date] to [Off] and print it.
Others
The camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery p Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 146).
work, no operations can pack.
be performed. • The battery level is low or zero (The p Charge the battery pack (page 14).
indicator appears.).
• The AC Adaptor is not connected securely. p Connect it securely to the DC IN jack of the camera and to a wall
outlet (wall socket) (page 17).
The power is on, but the • The internal system is not working properly. p Remove, and then, after one minute, reinstall the battery pack
camera does not work. and turn on the camera. If this does not work, press the RESET
button located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover with a
pointed object, then turn the power on again. (This will clear the
date and time settings, etc.)
128
You cannot identify the — p Check the indicator (pages 149 to 154).
indicator on the screen.
The lens gets fogged. • Condensation is occurring. p Turn off the camera, leave the camera for about an hour and then
try to use it again (page 143).
The camera gets hot if you — p This is not a malfunction.
use it for a long time.
Troubleshooting
129
Warnings and
messages
The following messages appear on the screen.
Message Meaning/ Corrective Action
No Memory Stick • Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 22).
• Set the /CF switch to CF and record the image using the Microdrive/CF card.
System error • Turn the power off and on again (page 18).
Memory Stick error • The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 144).
• The “Memory Stick” is damaged, or the terminal section of the “Memory Stick” is dirty.
• Insert the “Memory Stick” correctly (page 22).
Memory Stick type error • The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 144).
Read only memory • You cannot record or delete images on the “Memory Stick” with this camera.
Memory Stick locked • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. Set it to the recording position
(page 144).
No memory space • The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images or data (pages
43, 102).
No CF card • Insert the Microdrive/CF card (page 23).
• Set the /CF switch to and record the image using the “Memory Stick.”
CF card error • An unusable CF card is inserted (page 145).
• The Microdrive/CF card is damaged, or the terminal section of the Microdrive/CF card is dirty.
• Insert the Microdrive/CF card correctly (page 23).
CF card type error • The inserted CF card cannot be used with your camera (page 21).
CF card locked • The Microdrive/CF card is set to be unrecordable. Consult with the Microdrive/CF card manufacturer.
No CF card space • The capacity of the Microdrive/CF card is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images or
data (pages 43, 102)
Cover open • Close the CF card cover.
Format error • The recording medium format failed. Format the recording medium again (page 45).
For “InfoLITHIUM” battery • The battery pack is not the “InfoLITHIUM” type.
only
130
• The battery level is low or zero. Charge the battery pack (page 14). Depending on the conditions of use or the type
of battery pack, the indicator may flash even though there are still 5 to 10 minutes of remaining battery time left.
Folder error • A folder with the same first three digits number already exists on the recording medium. (For example: 123MSDCF
and 123ABCDE) Select other folders, or create a new folder.
Cannot create more folders • The folder whose first three digits of the name is “999” exists on the recording medium. You cannot create any more
folders.
Cannot record • You attempted to select the folder that is available only for viewing with your camera. Select other folders (page 51).
• The amount of light is not sufficient, or camera shake may occur because a slower shutter speed is set. Use the flash,
or mount the camera on a tripod to steady the camera.
“Night shot” • An operation that is not valid while NIGHTSHOT is set was attempted.
“Night framing” • An operation that is not valid while NIGHTFRAMING is set is attempted.
Manual focus is invalid • The FOCUS switch is set to MANUAL when the mode dial is set to .
The flash is not open • Pop the flash up using the OPEN (FLASH) switch (page 69).
640 (Fine) is not available • A recording medium that does not correspond to the [640 (Fine)] size movie is inserted (page 100).
Busy • When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed due to a drop in data transmission rate.
Buffer over • When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed due to a drop in data transmission rate. (This
message is indicated after the “Busy” message appeared.)
Read error • The movies stored on the Microdrive cannot be played back due to an internal temperature problem or vibration.
Troubleshooting
• The file is corrupted.
File error • An error occurred while playing back the image.
Image size over • You are playing back an image of a size that cannot be played back on your camera.
No file in this folder • No images have been recorded in this folder.
Cannot divide • The movie is not long enough to be divided.
• The file is not a movie.
Invalid operation • You are playing back a file that was created on equipment other than your camera.
Enable pritner to connect • [USB Connect] is set to [PictBridge], however the camera is connected to a non-PictBridge-compliant device.
Check the device.
Connect to device • You tried to print images before the printer connection was established.
131
No printable image • You tried to execute [DPOF image] without checking the mark.
• You tried to execute [All In This Folder] while selecting the folder that stores only movies or images recorded in
RAW mode. You cannot print movies or images recorded in RAW mode.
Printer busy • Since the printer is busy, it cannot receive print requests. Check the printer.
Paper error • A paper error occurred, such as paper-out, paper-jam, etc. Check the printer.
Ink error • An ink error occurred. Check the printer.
Printer error • The camera received an error from the printer. Check the printer, or check the image you want to print is corrupted.
• The data is being transferred to the printer. Do not disconnect the USB cable.
132
Code Cause Countermeasure
Self-diagnosis display C:32: ss There is trouble with your Turn the power off and on again (page 18).
camera’s hardware.
–If a code starting with an
C:13: ss The camera cannot read or write Re-insert the recording medium several
alphabet letter appears data on the recording medium. times.
Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. An unformatted recording Format the recording medium (page 45).
This function displays the condition of the medium is inserted.
camera on the screen using a combination The inserted recording medium Insert a new recording medium (pages 21,
of a letter and four numerical digits. If this cannot be used with your camera, 22, 23).
occurs, check the following code chart and or the data is damaged.
take the corresponding countermeasure. E:61: ss A camera malfunction that you Press the RESET button (page 119) located
The last two digits (indicated by ss) will E:91: ss cannot reverse has occurred. inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover,
differ depending on the state of the camera. then turn on the camera again.
If your camera is not still functioning well

after trying the countermeasure a couple of
times, the camera may need to be repaired.
Contact your Sony dealer or local
autholized Sony service facility and inform
them of the 5-digit code.
Troubleshooting
133
“Memory Stick”
The number of images
that can be saved/ RAW (Units: images)
16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
shooting time
8M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 6 (6) 10 (11) 22 (24) 45 (49)
The number of images that can be saved and 3:2 — — — — — — —
the shooting time are different, depending 5M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 6 (6) 11 (12) 23 (25) 48 (51)
on the capacity of the recording medium, 3M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 6 (7) 12 (12) 25 (26) 51 (53)
the image size, and the image quality. Refer 1M 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 7 (7) 12 (13) 26 (26) 53 (54)
to the following charts when you choose a VGA 0 (0) 1 (1) 3 (3) 7 (7) 13 (13) 27 (27) 55 (55)
recording medium.
TIFF (Units: images)
• The number of images is listed in Fine 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
(Standard) order.
8M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 4 (4) 8 (8) 17 (18) 34 (37)
• The values for the number of images that
3:2 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (5) 9 (9) 18 (20) 38 (41)
can be saved and the shooting time may
5M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 4 (5) 8 (9) 17 (18) 36 (38)
vary, depending on the shooting
3M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (5) 9 (9) 18 (19) 38 (39)
conditions.
1M 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (5) 9 (9) 19 (19) 39 (39)
• For normal shooting times and numbers
of images that can be saved, see pages 25, VGA 0 (0) 1 (1) 2 (2) 5 (5) 9 (9) 19 (19) 40 (40)
26.
Voice* (Units: images)
• When the remaining number of images
recordable is more than 9999, “ >9999 ” 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
is indicated on the screen. And when it is 8M 3 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (58) 58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442)
more than 999, “ 999 ” is indicated on the 3:2 3 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (58) 58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442)
display window. 5M 6 (11) 12 (22) 25 (45) 50 (91) 90 (166) 183 (337) 375 (689)
3M 9 (17) 19 (34) 39 (69) 79 (138) 142 (246) 290 (500) 592 (1022)
1M 22 (38) 45 (78) 91 (157) 183 (316) 324 (549) 660 (1117) 1347 (2280)
VGA 69 (121) 140 (245) 281 (492) 564 (987) 1020 (1785) 2074 (3630) 4234 (7410)
* For five-second audio recording
134
E-mail (Units: images)
8M 4 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (59) 59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449)
3:2 4 (7) 8 (14) 16 (29) 32 (59) 59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449)
5M 6 (11) 12 (23) 25 (46) 50 (94) 91 (170) 186 (345) 380 (705)
3M 9 (17) 20 (35) 40 (71) 80 (143) 145 (255) 296 (518) 604 (1058)
1M 23 (42) 47 (85) 96 (171) 192 (343) 340 (595) 691 (1210) 1411 (2470)
VGA 81 (162) 163 (327) 328 (657) 658 (1317) 1190 (2381) 2420 (4841) 4940 (9881)
Multi Burst (Units: images)

1M 24 (46) 50 (93) 101(187) 202 (376) 357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694)
Movie
640 (Fine) — — — — 0:02:57 0:06:02 0:12:20
640
0:00:42 0:01:27 0:02:56 0:05:54 0:10:42 0:21:47 0:44:27
(Standard)
160 0:11:12 0:22:42 0:45:39 1:31:33 2:51:21 5:47:05 11:44:22
The numbers indicate the recording time. For example: “1:31:33” indicates “1 hour, 31 minutes, 33 seconds.”
135
Microdrive E-mail (Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
RAW (Units: images) 8M 271 (498)
1G (DSCM-11000) 3:2 271 (498)
8M 50 (55) 5M 421 (782)
3:2 — 3M 670 (1173)
5M 54 (57) 1M 1565 (2739)
3M 56 (58) VGA 5478 (10956)
1M 59 (60)
VGA 61 (61) Multi Burst (Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
TIFF (Units: images) 1M 1643 (2988)
1G (DSCM-11000)
8M 38 (41) Movie
3:2 42 (45) 1G (DSCM-11000)
5M 40 (42) 640 (Fine) 0:13:41
3M 42 (43) 640
0:49:13
1M 43 (44) (Standard)
VGA 44 (44) 160 12:42:06
The numbers indicate the recording time. For
Voice* (Units: images) example: “12:42:06” indicates “12 hours, 42
minutes, 6 seconds.”
1G (DSCM-11000)
8M 269 (490)
3:2 269 (490)
5M 416 (764)
3M 657 (1133)
1M 1494 (2528)
VGA 4695 (8217)
* For five-second audio recording
136
Menu items
Menu items that can be changed differ
depending on the position of the mode dial.
The screen shows only the items you can
operate based on the current position of the
mode dial. Default settings are indicated
with x.
When the mode dial is set to

Item Setting Description
(Image Size) x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA Selects the image size when shooting still images (page 24).
Mode (REC Mode) RAW – Records RAW data file in addition to the JPEG file (page 79).
TIFF – Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in addition to the JPEG file (page 80).
Voice – Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81).
E-Mail – Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size
(page 81).
xNormal – Records an image using the normal recording mode.
When the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M or SCN
SCN (Scene) / / /x Sets the Scene Selection mode (page 37). (This setting can be made only in SCN
mode.)
ISO (ISO) 800 / 400 / 200 / 100 / 64 / xAuto Selects the ISO sensitivity. When shooting under dark conditions or shooting a fast-
moving subject, use a high-number setting. When recording high-quality images, use
a low-number setting (page 64). (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
(Image Size) x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA Selects the image size when shooting still images (page 24).
(P.Quality) xFine / Standard Records images with fine image quality mode. / Records images in the standard
image quality mode (page 49).
137
Mode (REC Mode) RAW – Records RAW data file in addition to the JPEG file (page 79).
TIFF – Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in addition to the JPEG file (page 80).
Voice – Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81).
E-Mail – Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size
(page 81).
xNormal – Records an image using the normal recording mode.
BRK (Bracket Step) ±1.0EV/x±0.7EV/±0.3EV Sets the exposure compensation value when recording three images with each
exposure value shifted (page 63). (This setting can be made only in Exposure Bracket
mode using the /BRK button.)
(Interval) 1/7.5 / 1/15 / x1/30 Selects the Multi Burst between-frame shutter interval (page 76). (This setting can be
made only in Multi Burst mode using the /BRK button.)
(Flash Level) High / xNormal / Low Selects the amount of flash light (page 70).
PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff Sets the special effects for the image (page 79).
COLOR (Color) Real/ xStandard Selects the color reproduction mode (page 74).
(Saturation) + / xNormal / – Adjusts the saturation of the image. The indicator appears (except when the
setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
(Contrast) + / xNormal / – Adjusts the contrast of the image. The indicator appears (except when the setting
is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
(Sharpness) + / xNormal / – Adjusts the sharpness of the image. The indicator appears (except when the
setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)

(Image Size) 640 (Fine)/ x 640 (Standard)/160 Selects the image size when shooting movies (page 100).
PFX (P.Effect) Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff Sets the special effects for the image (page 79).
138
(Folder) OK/Cancel Selects the folder that contains the images you want to play back (page 83).
- (Protect) — Protects/unprotects images against accidental erasure (page 89).
DPOF (DPOF) — Selects still images you want to attach/cancel the print (DPOF) mark (page 91).
(Print) — Prints images using a PictBridge-compliant printer (page 93).
(Slide) Interval – Sets the slide show interval (page 85). (For single-image screen only.)
x3 sec/ 5 sec/ 10 sec/ 30 sec/ 1 min
Image – Selects images from either folder or recording media.
xFolder/All
Repeat – Repeats the slide show.
xOn/Off
Start – Starts the slide show.
Cancel – Cancels the settings and execution of the slide show.
(Resize) 8M / 5M / 3M / 1M / VGA / Cancel Changes the recorded image size (page 90). (For single-image screen only.)
(Rotate) (counter-clockwise) / Rotates the still image (page 86). (For single-image screen only.)
(clockwise) / OK / Cancel
(Divide) OK / Cancel Divides a movie (page 104). (For single-image screen only.)
139
SET UP items
Set the mode dial to SET UP. The SET UP
screen appears.
Default settings are indicated with x.
1 (Camera 1)
AF Mode Single / xMonitor / Cont Selects the focus operation mode (page 66).
Digital Zoom Smart / xPrecision Selects the digital zoom mode (page 30).
Date/Time Day&Time / Date / xOff Selects whether to insert the date and time into the image (page 36). When shooting
movies or images recorded in Multi Burst mode, the date and time cannot be inserted
in the image. Also, the date and time will not be displayed when shooting. The date
and time will be displayed when the image is played back.
Red Eye Reduction On / xOff Reduces the red-eye phenomenon when using a flash (page 69).
Hologram AF xAuto / Off Selects whether to emit hologram AF light. Used when it is difficult to focus on the
subject in dark conditions (page 35).
Auto Review On / xOff When shooting still images, selects whether to display the image just after you shoot
a still image. Setting this to [On] displays the recorded images for about two seconds.
During this time, you cannot shoot the next image.
2 (Camera 2)
Expanded Focus xOn / Off When focusing manually, the image is enlarged to 2× (page 67).
Hot Shoe On / xOff Selects whether to use a commercially available external flash (page 72).
Pop-up Flash xAuto / Manual Selects whether to pop up the flash automatically (page 69).
140
(Memory Stick Tool) (When the /CF switch is set to )
Format OK / Cancel Formats the “Memory Stick.” Note that formatting erases all data on a “Memory Stick,” including even
protected images (page 45).
Create REC. OK / Cancel Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).
Folder
Change REC. OK / Cancel Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).
Folder
(CF Card Tool) (When the /CF switch is set to CF)

Format OK / Cancel Formats the Microdrive/CF card. Note that formatting erases all data on a Microdrive/CF card, including
even protected images (page 45). You cannot format it using the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor that is
compliant with the CompactFlash slot (page 145).
Create REC. OK / Cancel Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).
Folder
Change REC. OK / Cancel Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).
Folder
(Setup 1)
LCD Brightness Bright/ xNormal/ Selects the LCD brightness. This has no effect on the recorded images.
Dark
LCD Backlight Bright/ xNormal Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see
when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster.
Displayed only when you are using the camera with the battery pack.
EVF Backlight Bright/ xNormal Selects the brightness of the finder backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see
when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster.
Beep Shutter – Turns on the shutter sound when you press the shutter button.
x On – Turns on the beep/shutter sound when you press the center of the multi-selector/the shutter button.
Off – Turns off the beep/shutter sound.
141
Language — Displays the menu items, warnings and messages in selected language.
(Setup 2)
File Number x Series – Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if the recording medium is changed or the recording folder
is changed.
Reset – Resets the file numbering and starts from 0001 each time the folder is changed. (When the recording
folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is assigned.)
USB Connect PictBridge/PTP/ Switches the USB mode when connecting with a computer or a PictBridge-compliant printer using the
xNormal USB cable.
Video Out NTSC – Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode (e.g., Japan, USA).
PAL – Sets the video output signal to PAL mode (e.g., Europe).
Clock Set OK / Cancel Sets the date and time (pages 19, 48).
142
Cleaning the DC plug On moisture condensation
Precautions Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with If the camera is brought directly from a cold
a dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. to a warm location, or is placed in a very
Do not leave the camera in the Use of the dirty plug may not properly damp room, moisture may condense inside
following places charge the battery pack. or outside the camera. This moisture
• In extremely hot place, such as in a car condensation may cause a malfunction of
parked in the sun. The camera body may Cleaning the camera surface the camera.
become deformed or this may cause a Clean the camera surface with a soft cloth
malfunction. slightly moistened with water, then wipe the Moisture condensation occurs easily
• Under direct sunlight or near a heater. surface with a dry cloth. Do not pour volatile when:
The camera body may become deformed insecticide on the camera, contact with • The camera is brought from a cold
or this may cause a malfunction. rubber or vinyl for a long time, or use the location such as a ski slope into a warmly
• On rocking vibration following as this may damage the finish or heated room.
• Near strong magnetic place the casing. • The camera is taken from an air-
• Thinner conditioned room or car interior to the hot
• On sandy or in dusty place
Do not let sand get into the camera. Sand • Benzine outdoors, etc.
• Alcohol
or dust may cause the camera to
• Diposable cloth To prevent moisture condensation
malfunction and sometimes this
malfunction cannot be repaired. When bringing the camera from a cold
Note on operating temperature place to a warm place, seal the camera in a
The camera is designed for use within a plastic bag and leave it in the new location
Cleaning
temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to for about an hour. Remove the plastic bag
Cleaning the LCD screen
104°F). (When using a Microdrive: 5°C to when the camera has adapted to the new
Clean the screen surface with an LCD
40°C (41°F to 104°F)) Shooting in temperature.
cleaning kit (not supplied) to remove
fingerprints, dust, etc. extremely cold or hot locations that exceed
this range is not recommended. If moisture condensation occurs
Turn off the camera and wait about an hour
Cleaning the lens
for the moisture to evaporate. Note that if
Wipe the lens with a soft cloth to remove
you attempt to shoot with moisture
fingerprints, dust, etc.
remaining inside the lens, you will be
unable to record clear images.
143
4) [640
The internal rechargeable button (Fine)] size movies can be recorded or
battery The “Memory Stick” played back only using a “Memory Stick PRO”
or Microdrive.
This camera has an internal rechargeable • The “Memory Stick” formatted with a computer
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable
button battery for maintaining the date and is not guaranteed to operate with this camera.
and versatile IC recording medium with a
time and other settings regardless of • The data read/write time differs depending on
data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a the combination of the “Memory Stick” and a
whether the power is on or off.
floppy disk. device.
This rechargeable button battery is
The “Memory Stick” that can be used with
continually charged as long as you are using
this camera is as follows. However, we have Notes on use of the “Memory Stick”
the camera. However, if you use the camera
no guarantee of proper operation. • You cannot record, edit, or delete images when
for only short periods it discharges the write-protect switch is set to LOCK. The
gradually, and if you do not use the camera Recording/ position or the shape of the write-protect switch
“Memory Stick”
at all for about one month it becomes playback may differ depending on the “Memory Stick”
completely discharged. In this case, be sure Memory Stick Yes you use.
to charge this rechargeable button battery Memory Stick Duo 1) Yes
Terminal
before using the camera. Memory Stick Duo (MagicGate/
Note that even if this rechargeable button higher speed data transmission Yes 2)3)
battery is not charged, you can still use the compatible) 1)
camera as long as you do not record the date MagicGate Memory Stick Yes 2)
and time. MagicGate Memory Stick Duo 1) Yes 2) Write-protect
switch
Memory Stick PRO Yes2)3)
How to charge Memory Stick PRO Duo 1) Yes 2)3) Labeling position
Connect the camera to a wall outlet (wall 1) When using it with this camera, be sure to
socket) using the AC Adaptor, or install the • Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while
insert into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.
2) “MagicGate Memory Stick” is equipped with reading or writing data.
charged battery pack, and leave the camera
• Data may be damaged in the following cases:
for 24 hours or more with the power turned the MagicGate copyright protection
– Removing the “Memory Stick” or turning off
off. technology. MagicGate is copyright protection
the camera while reading or writing data.
technology that uses encryption technology.
– Using the camera in a location subject to the
However, because your camera does not
• The rechargeable button battery is located effects of static electricity or noise.
support the MagicGate standards, data recorded
inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Never • We recommend you back up any important
with your camera is not subject to MagicGate
remove the rechargeable button battery. data.
copyright protection.
3) Supports high-speed data transmission using • Do not attach any other material than the
supplied label on the labeling position.
the parallel interface.
144
• When you attach the supplied label, be sure to • When formatting the “Memory Stick Duo,”
attach it to the labeling position. Be careful that insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the The Microdrive
the label does not stick out. Memory Stick Duo Adaptor and use the
• When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” “Memory Stick” slot. A Microdrive is a compact and lightweight
put it in the case supplied with it. • When the “Memory Stick Duo” is equipped
• Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory with the write protect switch, release its lock.
hard disk drive that complies with Compact
Stick” with your hand or a metal object. • You can use the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor Flash TypeII. Camera operations are
• Do not strike, bend or drop a “Memory Stick.” that is compliant with the CompactFlash slot, confirmed using a Microdrive (Hitachi
• Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory however, you cannot format it using this camera Global Storage Technologies, Inc. DSCM-
Stick.” and cannot record [640 (Fine)] movies. 11000 (1 GB)).
• Do not expose the “Memory Stick” to water.
• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in
Note on use of the “Memory Stick
the following places: PRO” Notes on use of the Microdrive
– In a car parked in the sun, or at a high “Memory Stick PRO” with a capacity of up to • Be sure to format the Microdrive using this
temperature. 1 GB is verified for this camera. camera when you use it for the first time.
– Under direct sunlight. • The Microdrive is a compact hard disk drive.
– In a humid place or near corrosive material. Since the Microdrive is a rotating disk, the
Microdrive is not strong enough to resist
vibration and shock compared to a “Memory
Notes on use of the “Memory Stick Stick,” which uses flash memory.
Duo” Be sure not to transmit vibration or shock to the
• Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into Microdrive during playback or shooting.
the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor when using the • Data may be damaged in the following cases:
“Memory Stick Duo” with the camera. If you – Removing the Microdrive while reading or
insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the camera writing data.
without attaching the Memory Stick Duo – If you store the Microdrive near corrosive
Adaptor, you may not be able to remove the material.
“Memory Stick Duo.” • Note that the use of the Microdrive under 5°C
• Verify that you are inserting the “Memory Stick (41°F) may bring performance degradation.
Duo” in the proper direction when inserting it Operating temperature range when using the
into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor. Microdrive: 5° to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
• Verify that you are inserting the Memory Stick • Note that the camera cannot be used under low
Duo Adaptor in the proper direction when atmospheric pressure (above 3 000 meters
inserting it into the camera. Inserting it in the above sea-level).
wrong direction may cause a malfunction. • If the data transmission rate becomes slow in an
• Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” that is not extremely high or low temperature and writing
inserted into a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor into movie data cannot be done, “Busy” is indicated
a “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may on the screen and writing data stops (page 131).
cause a malfunction of the unit.
145
• The Microdrive may be hot just after it has been Effective use of the battery pack
used. Be careful when you handle it. On “InfoLITHIUM” • Battery performance decreases in low-
• Do not write on the label.
• Do not remove the label or attach a new label battery pack temperature surroundings. So, the time
over the label. that the battery pack can be used is
• When you carry or store the Microdrive, put it shorter in cold places. We recommend the
in the case supplied with it. following to ensure longer battery pack
• Do not expose the Microdrive to water. use:
• Do not press on the label strongly. What is the “InfoLITHIUM” – Put the battery pack in a pocket close to
• Hold the sides of the Microdrive in your hand
and do not squeeze the Microdrive. battery pack? your body to warm it up, and insert it in
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a your camera immediately before you
lithium-ion battery pack that has functions start shooting.
for communicating information related to • Frequently operating the zoom or flash
operating conditions of your camera. wears out the battery charge faster.
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack • We recommend having spare battery
calculates the power consumption packs handy for two or three times the
according to the operating conditions of expected shooting time, and making trial
your camera, and displays the remaining shots before taking the actual shots.
battery time in minutes. • Do not expose the battery pack to water.
The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Charging the battery pack
We recommend charging the battery pack Remaining battery time indicator
in an ambient temperature of between 10°C The power may go off although the battery
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). You may not be remaining indicator shows there is enough
able to efficiently charge the battery pack power to operate. Use the battery pack up
outside of this temperature range. and charge the battery pack fully again so
that the indication on the battery remaining
indicator is correct. Note, however, that the
correct battery indication sometimes will
not be restored if the camera is used in high
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully
charged state, or the battery pack is
frequently used.
146
How to store the battery pack Flash Recommended distance (when ISO
• If the battery pack is not to be used for a Specifications sensitivity is set to Auto)
0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to
long time, do the following procedure 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)
once per year to maintain proper function. x Camera 0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to
[System] 10 feet 10 inches) (T)
1 Fully charge the battery. Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)
Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color
2 Discharge on your camera. CCD
3 Remove the battery from your camera 4-color filter (RGBE) [Output connectors]
and store it in a dry, cool place. Total pixels number of camera A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural)
Approx. 8 314 000 pixels Minijack
• To use the battery pack up on your Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced,
Effective pixels number of camera
camera, leave the camera to on in slide Approx. 8 068 000 pixels sync negative
show playback mode (page 85) until the Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T*
Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load)
power goes off. Output impedance 2.2 kΩ
7.1× zoom lens
f=7.1 to 51 mm Accessory jack
(35 mm camera conversion: 28 to Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
Battery life 200 mm) USB jack mini-B
• The battery life is limited. Battery F2.0-2.8 USB communication
capacity decreases little by little as you Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches) Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 High-
use it more and more, and as time passes. Exposure control Speed compliant)
When the battery operating time is Automatic, Shutter speed priority,
shortened considerably, a probable cause
Aperture priority, Manual exposure, [LCD screen]
Scene selection (4 modes)
is that the battery pack has reached the LCD panel used
White balance 4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive
end of its life. Buy a new battery pack. Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy,
Total number of dots
• The battery life varies according to how it Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash,
134 400 (560×240) dots
One-push
is stored and the operating conditions and
File format (DCF compliant)
environment for each battery pack. [Finder]
Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG
compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF LCD panel used
compatible 1.1 cm (0.44 type) TFT drive
Audio with still image: MPEG1 Total number of dots
compliant (Monaural) 235 200 (980×240) dots
Movies: MPEG1 compliant
(Monaural)
Recording medium
CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII)
147
[Power, general] x AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor Accessories
Used battery pack Power requirements • AC Adaptor (1)
NP-FM50 AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power cord (mains lead) (1)
Power requirements Current consumption • USB cable (1)
7.2 V 0.35 − 0.18 A
• Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)
Power consumption (during shooting with LCD Power consumption
screen on) 18 W • A/V connecting cable (1)
2.2 W Output voltage • Shoulder strap (1)
Operating temperature range 8.4 V DC, 1.5 A • Lens cap (1)
0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Operating temperature range • Lens cap strap (1)
(When using the Microdrive: +5° to 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) • Lens hood (1)
+40°C (41° to +104°F)) Storage temperature range • CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)
Storage temperature range −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) • CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Maximum dimensions • Operating Instructions (1)
Dimensions (lens: W-end) Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm
134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm (2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D), Design and specifications are subject to change
(5 3/8 × 3 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches) excluding projecting parts without notice.
(W/H/D, protruding portions not Mass Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding
included) power cord (mains lead)
Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery
pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,”
shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on
x NP-FM50 battery pack
included) Used battery
Microphone Electret condenser microphone Lithium-ion battery
Speaker Dynamic speaker Maximum voltage
DC 8.4 V
Nominal voltage
Exif Print Compatible
DC 7.2 V
PRINT Image Matching II
Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
Compatible
148
* The selected mode mark or setting value is not
Display window displayed on the display window as it is in the
LCD screen/finder. Note that the mark on the
display window is not changed even when you
change the mode or setting value.
1 7 The page numbers in parentheses indicate
the location of additional important
2 8 information.
3 9
4
q;
5
A Self-diagnosis display (133)/ F EV adjustment indicator* (59)

Shutter speed indicator (55)/ G Aperture value indicator (56)/
Available movie recording time Available movie recording time
indicator (minute) (100)/ indicator (second) (100)
Available shooting time indicator H Burst/Multi Burst/Exposure
(15)/ bracket indicator* (63, 75, 76)
PLAY indicator I Metering mode indicator (58)
B Flash mode (68) J Remaining number of recordable
C Self-timer indicator (34) images indicator (25, 26)
D White balance indicator* (73)
E Battery remaining indicator (15)
149
A Burst/Multi Burst indicator
The LCD/finder screen (75, 76)
B Image size indicator (24)/
For shooting still images Multi Burst between-frame
interval indicator (76)
C Recording mode indicator
(79–81)
D AE/AF lock indicator (27)
E Battery remaining indicator (15)
1 qg F White balance indicator (73)/
2 qh Mode dial indicator/
Scene Selection indicator (37)/
3 qj
Flash mode (34)/Red-eye
4 qk reduction (69)
5 ql G Sharpness indicator (138)/
80min VGA FINE 101
1/30" 400 w; Saturation indicator (138)/
6 C:32:00 DATE
Contrast indicator (138)/
7 SOLARIZE REAL ISO400 wa
0.3EV Hologram AF indicator (35, 140)
8 ws H Metering mode indicator (58)/
9 wd Picture effect indicator (79)
I NightShot/NightFraming
q; wf
MAF 250 F2.0 +2.0EV indicator (77)
qa wg J Low battery warning (131)
qs wh K Macro (33)
wj L AF mode (66)/
qd AF range finder frame indicator
qf wk (65)/
Focus distance information
indicator (67)
150
M NR slow shutter indicator (55)/
Shutter speed indicator (55)
N Aperture value indicator (56)
O Image quality indicator (49)
P Recording folder indicator (50)
Q Remaining number of recordable
images indicator (25, 26)
R Remaining recording medium
capacity indicator
S Self-diagnosis display (133)/
Date/time indicator (36)/
Color reproduction indicator
(74)/
ISO sensitivity (64)
T Bracket step indicator (63)
U Self-timer indicator (34)
V Vibration warning indicator (131)
W Spot metering cross hair (58)
X AF range finder frame (65)
Y Histogram indicator (60)
wh AE LOCK indicator (62)
wj EV adjustment indicator (59)
wk Menu/guide menu (47)
• Pressing the MENU button switches the menu/

guide menu on/off.
The page numbers in parentheses indicate
information.
151
For shooting movies
1 q;
2 qa
80min 101
qs
3 STBY 00:00:00 [00:28:25]
4 C:32:00 qd
SOLARIZE
5 qf
6 qg
7 qh
8 +2.0EV qj
9 qk
ql
A Image size indicator (100) L Remaining recording medium
B Recording mode indicator (100) capacity indicator
C Battery remaining indicator (15) M Self-diagnosis display (133)
D White balance indicator (73) N Self-timer indicator (34)
E Metering mode indicator (58)/ O AF range finder frame (65)
Picture effect indicator (79) P Spot metering cross hair (58)
F NightShot indicator (77) Q AE LOCK indicator (62)
G Low battery warning (131) R EV adjustment indicator (59)
H Macro (33) S Menu/guide menu (47)
I AF range finder frame indicator
(65)
J Recording time [Maximum
recordable time] indicator (100)
K Recording folder indicator (50)
152
For still image playback The page numbers in parentheses indicate
1 9 information.
2 q;
3 qa
4 qs
80min VGA
qd
5 101 12/12
6 x1.3
C:32:00
+2.0EV ISO400
qf
7
AWB
2000 F5.6
qg
qh
qj
8 BACK/NEXT VOLUME qk
A PictBridge connecting indicator J Image number
(93) K Number of images recorded in
B Change folder indicator (83) the playback folder
C Image size indicator (24) L Remaining recording medium
D Recording mode indicator capacity indicator
(79–81) M Self-diagnosis display (133)
E Volume indicator (81)/ N EV adjustment indicator (59)/
Protect mark indicator (89)/ ISO sensitivity (64)
Print (DPOF) mark indicator (91) O Metering mode indicator (58)/
F Zoom indicator (30)/ Flash indicator/
White balance indicator (73)
Jog playback indicator (87)
P Shutter speed indicator (55)/
G Not disconnect USB cable
Aperture value indicator (56)
indicator (93)
H Folder-file number (114) Q Histogram indicator (60)
I Playback folder indicator (83) R Recording date/time of the
image (19)/Menu/guide menu (47)
153
For movie playback
1 5
2 6
3 7
80min 101
101 8/8 8
4 VOL. 00:00:12
9
q;
qa
DPOF qs
A Change folder indicator (83) The page numbers in parentheses indicate

B Image size indicator (101) the location of additional important
C Recording mode indicator (101) information.
D Playback indicator (101)/
Volume indicator (101)
E Playback folder indicator (83)
F Image number/Number of
images recorded in the playback
folder
G Recording folder indicator (50)
H Remaining recording medium
capacity indicator
I Counter (101)
J Playback screen (101)
K Playback bar (101)
L Menu/Guide menu (47)
154
Quick reference chart
This section describes the restrictions in the setup of the following functions, depending on the mode dial position or the setup of some functions
: shutter speed, aperture, flash, etc.
Quick chart of exposure, white balance, and auto focus functions (based on the mode dial position)
AF range
White Metering
Shutter speed (second) Aperture ISO finder
balance mode
frame
Multi-pattern
Auto (1/8 to 1/3200) Auto (F2 to F8) Auto (64 to 200) Auto Multipoint
metering
Auto (64 to 200)/Setup is Setup is Setup is Setup is
P Auto (1 to 1/3200) Auto (F2 to F8)
available from 64 to 800 available available available
Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is Setup is Setup is Setup is
S Setup is available from 30 to 1/2000 F2 to F8
available from 64 to 800 available available available
8 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to
F7.1) Setup is available from F2 Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is Setup is Setup is Setup is
A
to F8 available from 64 to 800 available available available
8 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)
30 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to
F7.1) Setup is available from F2 Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is Setup is Setup is Setup is
M
to F8 available from 64 to 800 available available available
30 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)
• Note that shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not as valid for the above table when the flash strobes.
• When using the digital zoom or horogram AF, the AF is automatically set to focus on the centrally-located subject.
155
Quick chart of flash mode
Exposure
Mode dial Normal/E-Mail/Voice/RAW/TIFF Burst Multi Burst NightShot NightFraming
Bracket
Auto/ / /
P Auto/ / /
S / — —
A / / — —
M / — —
Twilight — — — — —
Twilight
— — — — —
SCN portrait
Landscape / — —
Portrait Auto/ / / — —
• When shooting movies, the flash mode is set to (No flash).

• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual], the flash mode is set to (Forced flash), (Slow synchro), or (No flash).
156
The relation between the shutter The movement of the program diagram
speed and aperture The program diagram shows the movement of the combination of the shutter speed and
To shoot clear images, selecting the proper aperture value.
exposure is very important, adding to the The program shift function (page 54) quickly shifts the combination of exposure that the
chance of achieving the proper focus. The camera has decided upon.
exposure is an amount of light that is Program diagram (example)
determined by the shutter speed and The movement of the program shift (EV: 10, ISO sensitivity: 100) (example)
aperture value. The shutter speed is adjusted
by the time, longer or shorter. The aperture • When the EV value remains the same, the brightness of the recorded image is the same.
is adjusted by the scale of the lens hole,
Brighter subject Darker subject
larger or smaller. When the shutter speed is
faster by one step, the aperture is opened by 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 EV
one step to get the same exposure.
2
F8
F5.6
F4
F2.8
Aperture F2
1 1/4 1/15 1/60 1/250 1/1000
1/2 1/8 1/30 1/125 1/500 1/2000
Shutter speed
157
Index
CompactFlash .................................................. 21 H
Index Continuous AF ................................................. 67 Histogram ........................................................ 60
Contrast .......................................................... 138 Hologram AF ........................................... 35, 140
Copying images to your computer ......... 110, 111 Hot Shoe ........................................................ 140
A
Cutting movies ............................................... 104
A/V connecting cable ...................................... 41
AC Adaptor ................................................ 14, 17 I
Access lamp ..................................................... 22 D Image quality ................................................... 49
Advanced accessory shoe ................................ 71 DC plug ...................................................... 14, 17 Image size .................................................. 24, 25
AE LOCK ........................................................ 62 Deleting movies ............................................. 102 Image Transfer ............................................... 107
AE/AF lock ................................................ 27, 29 Deleting still images ........................................ 43 ImageMixer .................................................... 108
AF .................................................................... 27 Digital zoom .................................................... 31 Index screen ..................................................... 39
AF Mode .......................................................... 66 Display window ............................................. 149 Indicators on the screen during shooting ......... 30
AF range finder ................................................ 65 Divide ............................................................ 104 InfoLITHIUM battery pack ........................... 146
Aperture priority .............................................. 56 DPOF ............................................................... 91 Inserting a Memory Stick ................................ 22
Auto adjustment mode ..................................... 27 Inserting a Microdrive ..................................... 23
Auto Focus ................................................. 29, 65 E Inserting the date and time ............................... 36
Auto Power Off function ................................. 18 E-Mail .............................................................. 81 Installation ..................................... 106, 107, 108
Auto Review .................................................. 140 EV adjustment ................................................. 59 ISO ................................................................... 64
Exposure bracket ............................................. 63
B J
Battery remaining indicator ............................. 15 F JPG ................................................................. 115
Beep/shutter sound ........................................ 141 File names ...................................................... 114
Burst ................................................................ 75 File storage destinations ................................ 114 L
Finder ............................................................... 29 LCD screen brightness ................................... 141
C Finder adjustment ............................................ 29 LCD screen display ........................................ 150
CD-ROM ....................................................... 106 Flash ........................................................... 34, 68 Lens hood ......................................................... 13
Center AF ........................................................ 65 Flash Level ....................................................... 70
Charging the battery pack ................................ 14 Flexible spot AF .............................................. 66
M
Charging time .................................................. 15 Folder ......................................................... 50, 83
Macro ............................................................... 33
Cleaning ......................................................... 143 Format .............................................................. 45
Manual exposure .............................................. 57
Clock Set ........................................... 19, 48, 142 Framing burst ................................................... 75
Manual focus ................................................... 67
Color ................................................................ 74
Memory Stick ................................................ 144
Command dial ................................................. 48
Menu ........................................................ 47, 137
158
Metering mode .................................................58 Q USB driver ..................................................... 106
Microdrive ......................................................145 Quick reference chart .................................... 155 Using your camera abroad ............................... 17
Mode dial ..........................................................27 Quick Review .................................................. 29
Moisture condensation ...................................143 V
Monitoring AF ..................................................66
R VGA ................................................................. 25
MPG ...............................................................115 Viewing images on TV .................................... 41
RAW ................................................................ 79
Multi Burst .................................................76, 87 Viewing movies on the LCD screen .............. 101
Red Eye Reduction .......................................... 69
Multi-pattern metering .....................................58 Viewing the images on the LCD screen .......... 39
RESET button ................................................ 119
Multipoint AF ...................................................65
Resize .............................................................. 90 Voice ................................................................ 81
Multi-selector ...................................................18
Rotate ............................................................... 86
W
N
S Warnings and messages ................................. 130
NightFraming ...................................................78
Saturation ....................................................... 138 White balance .................................................. 73
NightShot .........................................................77
Scene Selection ................................................ 37
NR slow shutter ................................................55
NTSC ..............................................................142
Self-diagnosis display .................................... 133 Z
Self-timer ......................................................... 34 Zoom ................................................................ 30
Number of images that can be saved or shooting
SET UP .................................................... 48, 140
time .....................................16, 25, 26, 134
Sharpness ....................................................... 138
Shooting movies ............................................ 100
P Shooting still images ....................................... 27
PAL .................................................................142 Shutter speed priority ...................................... 55
PictBridge .........................................................93 Single AF ......................................................... 66
Picture effect .....................................................79 Single screen .................................................... 39
Playback zoom .................................................84 Slide show ....................................................... 85
Pop-up Flash .....................................................69 Smart zoom ...................................................... 31
Power on/off .....................................................18 Speed burst ...................................................... 75
Precautions .....................................................143
Precision digital zoom ......................................31
T
Print (DPOF) mark ...........................................91
TIFF ................................................................. 80
Program auto shooting ...............................28, 54
Index
Trimming ......................................................... 85
Program shift ....................................................54
Protect ...............................................................89
U
USB ....................................................... 109, 117
159
3
0
8
4
9
Printed on 100% recycled paper

9
using VOC (Volatile Organic Additional information on this product and answers to frequent
Compound)-free vegetable oil asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
6
based ink.
1
1
Sony Corporation Printed in Japan

DSC-F828
SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 2
US Model
Ver 1.1 2004. 04
Canadian Model
Revision History
AEP Model
UK Model
How to use E Model
Acrobat Reader
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
Korea Model
Tourist Model
Chinese Model
Japanese Model
Link
SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
SERVICE NOTE FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS REPAIR PARTS LIST
DISASSEMBLY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
• For ADJUSTMENTS (SECTION 6), refer to SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ (987627951.pdf).

• For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627941.pdf).
• Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available.
• When the laser unit is repaired,
Make sure to follow the items of “NOTE ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE”.
On the SY-096 board

This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair
inside the SY-096 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the SY-096 board are not
shown.
The following pages are not shown.
Schematic diagram ............................. Pages 4-25 to 4-44 Mounted parts location ............................. Pages 4-65 to 4-66
Printed wiring board ............................ Pages 4-59 to 4-62 Electrical parts list ................................... Pages 5-14 to 5-18
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

DSC-F828
SPECIFICATIONS
x Camera [LCD screen] x AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor
[System] LCD panel used Power requirements
Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color 4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz
CCD Total number of dots Current consumption
4-color filter (RGBE) 134 400 (560×240) dots 0.35 − 0.18 A
Total pixels number of camera Power consumption
Approx. 8 314 000 pixels [Finder] 18 W
Effective pixels number of camera LCD panel used Output voltage
Approx. 8 068 000 pixels 1.1 cm (0.44 type) TFT drive 8.4 V DC, 1.5 A
Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T* Total number of dots Operating temperature range
7.1× zoom lens 235 200 (980×240) dots 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)
f=7.1 to 51 mm
Storage temperature range
(35 mm camera conversion: 28 to
[Power, general] −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
200 mm)
F2.0-2.8 Maximum dimensions
Used battery pack
Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm
Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches) NP-FM50
(2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D),
Exposure control Power requirements
7.2 V excluding projecting parts
Automatic, Shutter speed priority,
Aperture priority, Manual exposure, Power consumption (during shooting with LCD Mass Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding
Scene selection (4 modes) screen on) power cord (mains lead)
White balance 2.2 W
Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy, Operating temperature range x NP-FM50 battery pack
Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash, 0° to + 40°C (32° to +104°F) Used battery
One-push (When using the Microdrive: +5° to Lithium-ion battery
File format (DCF compliant) +40°C (41° to +104°F)) Maximum voltage
Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG Storage temperature range DC 8.4 V
compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Nominal voltage
compatible
Dimensions (lens: W-end) DC 7.2 V
Audio with still image: MPEG1
134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
compliant (Monaural)
Movies: MPEG1 compliant (5 3/8 3 × 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)
(Monaural) (W/H/D, protruding portions not
included)
Accessories
Recording medium
Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery • AC Adaptor (1)
CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII) pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,” • Power cord (mains lead) (1)
shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on • USB cable (1)
Flash Recommended distance (when ISO
included) • Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)
sensitivity is set to Auto)
0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to Microphone Electret condenser microphone • A/V connecting cable (1)
14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W) Speaker Dynamic speaker • Shoulder strap (1)
0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to
10 feet 10 inches) (T) • Lens cap (1)
Exif Print Compatible • Lens cap strap (1)
Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)
PRINT Image Matching II • Lens hood (1)
Compatible
[Output connectors] • CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)
A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) • CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)
Minijack • Operating Instructions (1)
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced,
sync negative Design and specifications are subject to change
Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) without notice.
Output impedance 2.2 kΩ
Accessory jack
Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
USB jack mini-B
USB communication
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 High-
Speed compliant)
—2—
DSC-F828
CAUTION
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION :
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
PUBLISHED BY SONY. DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered Unleaded solder
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
and bridges. free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point : LEAD FREE MARK
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and ordinary solder.
recommend their replacement. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing about 350°C.
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
during repairing. heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the • Strong viscosity
circuit board (within 3 times). Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
or unsoldering. as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
—3—
DSC-F828
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SERVICE NOTE • AS-050 FLEXIBLE
1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR ······················································· 1-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14
1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING • UA-003 (AV, USB JACK)
CAPACITOR ··································································· 1-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
1-2-1. Preparing the Short Jig ···················································· 1-1 • LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)
1-2-2. Discharging the Capacitor ··············································· 1-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-16
1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE • CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR)
[LASER UNIT] ······························································· 1-2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17
1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ······ 1-2 • FP-756 FLEXIBLE
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17
2. DISASSEMBLY • SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY)
2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ············ 2-2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························· 2-3 • AJ-007 (JACK)
2-3. ST SECTION ·································································· 2-4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
2-4. ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION ································· 2-4 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)
2-5. ST CABINET ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21
2-6. MT-067 BOARD ····························································· 2-5 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)
2-7. SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT ······································ 2-6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-22
2-8. LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT ····································· 2-7 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························ 2-8 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23
2-10. EVF SECTION ································································ 2-8
2-11. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) ······················ 2-9 Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are not
2-12. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT ······· 2-9 shown.
2-13. BTH SECTION ····························································· 2-10 Pages from 4-25 to 4-44 are not shown.
2-14. SY-096 BOARD ···························································· 2-11
2-15. DD-204 BOARD ··························································· 2-12 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
2-16. CF-097 BOARD ···························································· 2-12 • DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER)
2-17. LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY ······················ 2-13 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-49
2-18. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR ······························· 2-13 • LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW)
2-19. AJ-007 BOARD ···························································· 2-14 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-50
2-20. DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD ····················· 2-14 • ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL)
2-21. FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ·························· 2-15 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51
2-22. HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY ·························· 2-16 • MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR)
2-23. SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION ························ 2-16 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51
2-24. CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ·································· 2-17 • LS-067 (AF LASER)
2-25. CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP) ·························· 2-19 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-52
2-26. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-20 • SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED)
2-27. CIRCUIT BOARDS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-53
FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-21 • UA-003 (AV, USB JACK)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-54
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS • LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ··························· 3-1 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-54
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-3 • CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR)
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-5 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-55
3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································ 3-7 • AJ-007 (JACK)
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ································ 3-9 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-56
• SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY)
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-57
• FP-748 (CONNECTOR)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-57
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4) ······················· 4-1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4) ······················· 4-3
Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not
shown.
Pages from 4-59 to 4-62 are not shown.
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
• DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER)
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-63
• LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW)
Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board is not
shown.
• ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 Page 4-65 to 4-66 are not shown.
• LS-067 (AF LASER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST
• MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR) 5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 5-3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14 5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 5-3
• SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED) 5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························· 5-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14 5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ················ 5-5
5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ················ 5-6
—4—
DSC-F828
5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY ············································· 5-7

5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ····················· 5-8
5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY ···························································· 5-9
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 5-10
Parts list of the SY-096 board are not shown.

—5—
DSC-F828
SECTION 1
SERVICE NOTE
1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR

Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector.
bent at the terminal. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.
When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector.

Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
Cut and remove the part of gilt

which comes off at the point.
(Take care that there are
some pieces of gilt left inside)
1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING CAPACITOR

The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential.
There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the charged
voltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the DSC-F828 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage
must be discharged as described below.
1-2-1. Preparing the Short Jig 1-2-2. Discharging the Capacitor

To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a Short circuits between the positive and the negative terminals of
resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11) charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.
Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent
electrical shock.
Short jig
1 kΩ/1 W (1kΩ /1W)
Wrap insulating tape.

04
-2
DD
DD-204 board
1-1
DSC-F828
1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE [LASER UNIT]

The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of the Note: Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.
potential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc. Refer to “21. AF Laser Output Adjustment” (page6-29) and “22.
on clothing and the human body. AF Laser Axis Check” (page6-30) of SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ
(987627951.pdf).
During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also use
the procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repair
parts.
The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled with
care.
Laser unit
(D001)
Soldering Conditions of Laser Unit
Temperature of Less than 350 °C
the Soldering Iron
Time to Solder 3 seconds
Interval to Solder Next terminal is soldered after waiting
for 1 second
1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
• C: ss: ss
by customer, are displayed.
• E: ss: ss
by engineer, are displayed.
Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error
C:32:01 Turn off the main power then back on. Trouble with hardware. SYSTEM ERROR
• The type of memory stick that cannot be

Replace the memory stick. used by this machine, is inserted.
C:13:01 MEDIA ERROR
Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828. • Data is damaged.
• Unformatted memory stick is inserted.
Flash LED
Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being
E:91:01 Flash display
flash unit. charged.
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
E:61:00 *1
Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. —
E:61:10 *1
Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit.
*1: The error display is given in two ways.
1-2E
DSC-F828
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY HELP
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
HELP
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
HELP Discharging the Capacitor

DISASSEMBLY
04
-2
DD
DISASSEMBLY HELP HELP HELP

DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
SY-096 board
service position
HELP HELP HELP

DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)

1 2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................ (page 2-2)
2 2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-3)
3 2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-8)
4 2-13. BTH SECTION .............................................................................. (page 2-10)
5 2-14. SY-096 BOARD ............................................................................. (page 2-11)
6 2-15. DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
7 2-16. CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
8 2-18. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR .................................................. (page 2-13)
9 2-20. DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD ......................................... (page 2-14)
q; 2-21. FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................ (page 2-15)
qa 2-24. CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ..................................................... (page 2-17)
2-1
DSC-F828
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD
Caution
Tape (A)
Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch

the extra length of flexible board because
it can be easily pinched during installation.
FP-751 flexible board
3 Three screws (M2 × 4), lock ace
5 Tape (A) 7 SW-410 board
6 FP-751
2 FP-751 flexible board flexible board (6P)
1 Six screws (M2 × 4),
(6P)
lock ace
4 Cabinet (LR) assembly
2-2
DSC-F828
2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY
2 Peel the Radiation sheets (LR)

from flexible boards.
Dowel
1 Tapping screw Caution
(M1.7 × 4)
Radiation sheet (LR)
Tapping screw
Harness processing
(M1.7 × 4)
ST-088 board
harness 8 Two screws
(PT132) (M2 × 4), lock ace
Note: Be careful not to drop
3 Claw the ferrite core.
5 FP-746 flexible board

(51P)

(51P)
ST-088 board

(21P)
Adhesion side (Ferrite core)

7 AJ-006 flexible board
(6P)
9 harness (PT132)
q; Stroboscope block assembly
2-3
DSC-F828
2-3. ST SECTION
5 ST section
1 Two screws (M2 × 4), 2 LS-067 board

lock ace (6P)
3 SI-037 board (26P)

4 MT-067 board
(16P)
2-4. ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION
8 Lens section

(22P)
(22P)
4 Flexible board (Lens)(39P) 3 ST-088 board
7 Harness guide
1 Screw (M1.7 × 3),

lock ace
6 Two claws
2-4
DSC-F828
2-5. ST CABINET ASSEMBLY
2 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
3 ST blind cover
4 Four tapping screws

(M1.7 × 4)
6 ST section
1 AS-050 flexible board

5 ST cabinet assembly (10P)
2-6. MT-067 BOARD
1 Three tapping screws

(M1.7 × 4)
2 Claw
Stroboscope motor
3 STFPC cover
4 Screw (M1.7 × 2),

grip
6 Remove the two solderings.
9 MT-067 board 5 Screw (M1.7 × 2),

grip
7 Stroboscope motor
8 Three claws
2-5
DSC-F828
2-7. SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT
Remove the ST unit holder from the SI-037 board by disengaging

the claw while sliding the (A) section of the SI-037 board in the
direction of the arrow (B).
5 ST cover
ST unit holder SI-037 board
(A) Section
(B)
3 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
8 Claw
1
7 Open the ST unit holder section
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
6 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
9 ST unit holder
q; Two claws
qa Remove soldering from the three points
qs Flash unit
qd SI-037 board
2-6
DSC-F828
2-8. LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT
1 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
2 Two dowels
3 Two grooves 4 ST laser holder
6 Laser unit (D001) 5 Remove the

three solderings
7 LS-067 board
Caution
When soldering the laser unit on the LS-067 board,
observe the following things.
(Refer to Service Note (page 1-2)).
Observe the following conditions of temperature
and time of soldering.
Temperature of soldering iron : 350 °C
Time of contacting the soldering : 3 seconds
iron with the solder
The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown
because of the potential difference generated by the
charged electrostatic load, etc. on clothing and the
human body.
During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown
and also use the procedure in the printed matter which
is included in the repair parts.
The flexible board is easily damaged and should be
handled with care.
2-7
DSC-F828
2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY
5 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace
Caution
The LB-091 board may be damaged if you
remove the rear cabinet block assembly forcibly.
Be very careful not to damage the flexible board.
4 Screw (M2 × 4),

lock ace
2 Screw (M2 × 4),

lock ace
6 LB-091 board
(22P)
7 Control switch block (under)

(50P)
3 Two screws (M2 × 4),
lock ace
1 Two screws (M2 × 4),

lock ace
8 Rear cabinet block assembly
2-10.EVF SECTION
3 Three claws
4 Prism sheet
5 Illuminator
7 Two claws
6 LCD (LCX044AK-1)
(18P)
8 LB-091 board
9 Lamp guide (20)
2 EVF section
1 Four tapping screws q; LCD (LCX044AK-1)
(M1.7 × 4)
2-8
DSC-F828
2-11.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
3 Block light guide plate (6P)

5 Cabinet (rear) assembly
Caution 4 LCD module (24P)

2 Control switch block
(mid)(10p)
Control switch block (under)
7 Control switch block

(under)
Tape (A)
1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3), Caution

6 Tape (A) lock ace
Install the control switch block (under) in the

cabinet (rear) assembly so that the tip of the
control switch block (under) go under the
bottom of the control switch block (mid).
2-12.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT
8 CF lid assembly
2 Open the CF lid
7 Two screws (M1.7 × 3),

lock ace 6 LCD unit
5 Block light guide plate
4 Tape (A)
Caution
Tape (A)
1 Five screws (M1.7 × 3),

lock ace
3 Control switch block (mid)
Block light guide plate
2-9
DSC-F828
2-13.BTH SECTION
Caution
Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch
the flexible board or harness during installation.
6 Harness (microphone)
4 Control switch block (top)
7 Harness (speaker)
(12P)
5 LCD module (26P)
(21P)

(51P)
q; Harness (PT-132)
qs BTH section

(51P) Use the groove on side
when installing it.
8 UA-003 board
(12P)
lock ace
qa Connector (3P)
2-10
DSC-F828
2-14.SY-096 BOARD

(10P)

(51P)
6 SY-096 board
3 FP-748 board
(60P)
5 Cushion (SY)
lock ace
Caution
Cushion (SY) SY-096 board
2-11
DSC-F828
2-15.DD-204 BOARD
Caution
Note: The power supply capacitor of the flash unit is charged to the high tension
voltage as high as 300 V at a maximum. You will get electrical shock when
you touch the terminal of the charged capacitor . The charged potential
remains even after the main power of the machine is turned off. Discharge
the remaining power in the capacitor referring to Service Note
(See page 1-1). High-voltage cautions. Short jig (R: 1k Ω /1W)
6 FP-748 board
7 Remove soldering from two point
9 DD-204 board
4 Two claws 2 Two screws (M1.7 × 3)

lock ace
3 LR-018 board (6P)
4
5 Battery terminal board (3P) -20
DD
8 Capacitor
Caution
1 Fuse replacement caution label
DD-204 board
Fuse replacement caution label
2-16.CF-097 BOARD
4 Tape (A) Caution

Tape (A)
Ferrite bead
5 Ferrite bead
2 SY retainer

(51P) 1 Four screws (M1.7 × 3)
lock ace
6 CF-097 board
2-12
DSC-F828
2-17.LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY
2 Two claws
4 Remove soldering
from the two points.
3 LR-018 board
1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4) 5 Lithium battery
2-18.MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR
2 Hook

(10P)
5 Memory stick connector

Caution
3 Sheet (MS)
Sheet (MS)
1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

Memory stick connector
2-13
DSC-F828
2-19.AJ-007 BOARD
1 Screws (M1.7 × 3),

lock ace
2 AJ-006 flexible board

3 AJ-007 board (6P)
2-20.DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD
Jack holder assembly

4 Three Claws
3 Two tapping screws

(M1.7 × 4)
5 UA-003 board
6 Jack ground plate
7 Jack holder assembly Harness processing
1 Two screws (M1.7 × 3), DC-IN connector

lock ace
2 DC-IN connector
Hook
UA-003 board
2-14
DSC-F828
2-21.FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Caution
1 Ferrite core
Tape (A)
2 harness (PT132)
3 Screw (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
5 Radiation sheet (LR) FP-747 flexible board
4 Flexible guide (R) 6 Two screws (M1.7 × 3),

lock ace
Harness processing
7
Harness processing
9 Tape (A)
harness (PT132)
Flexible guide (R)

8 harness (PT132)
Harness (PT-132)
q; Tape (A)
Caution
FP-747 flexible board qg FP-754 flexible board
qh FP-746 flexible board
qf Adhesive tape
Tape (A) qs Two claws
qa Ferrite core
qd Flexible guide (L)
qj FP-747 flexible board
2-15
DSC-F828
2-22.HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY
Hinge /Cabinet (LL) Assembly Remove it while rotating the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly.
4
2 Two screws(2 × 4),
lock ace
1 Rotate the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly up to the position
where screw becomes visible.
2-23.SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION
Harness processing
1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3),

2 Speaker /Microphone lock ace
section
Speaker Microphone
Microphone holder
9 Speaker
8 Speaker
retainer plate
5 Microphone
6 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4) 7 Claw
4 Microphone gom
3 Microphone grille
2-16
DSC-F828
2-24.CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY
4 Three tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

2 Notch
5 Control switch block (top),
LCD module section

lock ace
3 Cabinet upper section 6 MD cushion
Control switch block (top)
Caution
When installing it, align the switch position 7 Cabinet upper assembly
as shown.
2-17
DSC-F828
[SERVICE POSITION (SY-096 BOARD) ]

(51P)
FP-749 flexible board (10P)
Control switch block (top) (12P)

Memory stick connector CN709 CN451
SY-096 board
CN711 CN706 Control switch block (under) (50P)

CN701
CN751
FP-746 flexible board (51P) CN703
CN707
FP-747 flexible board CN702
(51P)
CN502
ST-088 board
CN402
FP-754 flexible board (21P)
UA-003 board
CN401
CN103 Caution
CD-469 board
CN404
Note: High-voltage cautions.
harness (2P) DD-204 board

(PT-132) CN401
Extension cable
CN601
CN001
FP-751 flexible board DC-IN connector

(6P)
CN001 DC-IN
AC power
SW-410 board adaptor AC IN
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)

1 2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................ (page 2-2)
2 2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-3)
3 2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-8)
4 2-13. BTH SECTION .............................................................................. (page 2-10)
5 2-14. SY-096 BOARD ............................................................................. (page 2-11)
6 2-15. DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
7 2-16. CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
8 2-18. MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR .................................................. (page 2-13)
9 2-20. DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD ......................................... (page 2-14)
q; 2-21. FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................ (page 2-15)
qa 2-24. CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ..................................................... (page 2-17)
2-18
DSC-F828
2-25.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)
3 LCD panel
2 Two claws
4 Control switch block (top) Caution

Tape (A)
1 Tape (A)
2-19
DSC-F828
2-26.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
CF-097
DD-204
SY-096
ST-088
UA-003
SW-410
AJ-007
Board Name Function
CAMERA DSP, CAMERA SYSTEM CONTROL, CF DRIVE I/F, USB I/F, MODE CONTROL,
SY-096
AUDIO AMP, LCD DRIVER, EVF, LCD DRIVER, CONNECTOR, POWER SUPPLY
UA-003 AV, USB JACK
SW-410 FUNCTION KEY
AJ-007 JACK
ST-088 FLASH CONTROL
CF-097 CF CARD CONNECTOR
DD-204 DC/DC CONVERTER
2-20
DSC-F828
2-27.CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

FP-748
FP-749
(flexible)
SI-037
LR-018
FP-754
(flexible) FP-746
(flexible)
AJ-006
(flexible) FP-751
(flexible)
Control switch block (mid) FP-756

(flexible)
LB-091
MT-067 LS-067
FP-747
(flexible)
FP-750
(flexible)
Board Name Function
SI-037 FLASH, IR LED
MT-067 FLASH MOTOR
LS-067 AF LASER
LB-091 EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT
FP-748 CONNECTOR
LR-018 BATTERY, RESET SW
2-21E
DSC-F828
2003. 12. 8 Update
HELP
Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.
CABINET (LR) SECTION STROBOSCOPE SECTION

Tape (A) Tape (A)
SW-410 board
FRONT CABINET SECTION

FP-747 flexible board Radiation sheet (LR)
Tape (A)
Tape (A) FP-747 flexible board

Tapping screw
FP-754 flexible board (M1.7 × 4)
Radiation sheet (LL)
AJ-007 board
REAR CABINET SECTION

Tape (A)
Tape (A)
Block light guide plate
HELP
DSC-F828
BTH SECTION
CF radiation sheet (B) CF radiation sheet (A)
SY-096 board
Cushion (SY)
BT holder assembly (front side) BT holder assembly (rear side)
Tape (A)
Ferrite bead
DD-204 board
Sheet (MS)
Fuse replacement caution label Memory stick connector

HELP
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Link
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

DSC-F828
SECTION 3 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
LENS UNIT (1/3)

SY-096 BOARD (1/3) FP-756 CF-097 BOARD
IRIS
SHUTER (3/10) FLEXIBLE
IC452 CN451 CN101
FP-754 CAM AD0 MICRO
CCD IMAGER S/H,AGC CCDINP A/D CONV. FLEXIBLE DRIVE 4 4 48 48
A2,B1,J2, CAM AD13 (AA,AB,AC, (H,J,K,
V OUT C1 CCDINM F9 18 4 (AA,AB,Y) I/F (A-F) 11 11 41 41
15 A8 (C,D,E,F, U,V,W,Y) MC D0-D15 MC D0-D15 MC D0-D15 L,M) CF D0-D15
B1 E9 5 17 (13-17) (1-4) 40 40 12 12
G) (1,3) (1-4) (8-10)
49 49 3 3
12-13 28,27,23 CN103
F1 C9 B9 J4 G5 J3 HJ J2 J5 J8
17 20,19 COMPACT FLASH
V1A,B,C MICRO DRIVE
CLP OB CLP OB 13 13 39 39
V2
MCK TG
SHD,SHP
CAM HD
CAM F
XCAM RST
ADCLK
H1A,B,C 21 1 Y18 (J,K,L,M, B9,D12, (F,G,H
V3A,B,C
CAM SO,SCK
H2A,B,C 19 19 33 33
V4 N,P,R,T,U) MC A1-A25 MC A0-A25 MC A0-A10,A24 (E,F,G) J,K,L) CF A0-A10
21 21 31 31
V5A,B,C (1-4) (1-3),H11 (1-3)
V6 37 37 15 15
RG C3-C7 H8-H6,H4 MC CKI0 CF RESET
A11 M7 20 20 32 32
B4-B8,A7 G5,G3 MCK TG XSYS RST
MCK TG (H,J,K,L, (AA,AB,N, C7
E7 3 19 AC16
ADCLK M,N) P,R,T-W,Y)
E6
D9
TGCLK
SHD
1 21
TG CLK
AC20 (23-26) (23-26) FP-749
F5 SHP CN711 MC CKIO A8
F6
T23
X501
K1
C19
CN706 FLEXIBLE
TIMING XCAM RST A10
C22
D1 27MHz 9 MEMORY
GENERATOR 3 AU LRCK B20 MS SDIO/DATA0-3,MS BS, MS SCLK
E2 EEPROM AA7 D8 3 STICK
CAM SO,SCK CAM SO,S1,SCK 4 (2/10) B21 CONNECTOR
F2 FP-746 (1/10)
2 D21
FLEXIBLE
IC501
E1
CAM HD
CAM F 31
(1/6)
21
CA HD
CA F Y17
IC301 (1/10)
CAMERA
CAMERA SYSTEM
F1 30 22 AB18
DSP CONTROL
9 8 12 7 CN701
IC302
FP-747 HR DQ00 (A-E, SRRAM
FLEXIBLE(1/6) (A-G) 512Mbit
HR DQ31 L-M,
(1-4), C11
43 44 40 45 P,R)
CN702 (A-D) B17 FR SO,SI,SCK
(1-3,
(13-17) B16
HR EN3 7-9)
IRIS A FP-746 XCAM RST HR DIR3A HR AQ00 M2 XSYS RST
N21
IRIS IRIS A FLEXIBLE(2/6) HR EN3 HR DIR3B D14
CN701 L21 A4, HR AQ12 (F-J) XACCESS LED
MOTOR IRIS B G4 IRIS DRIVE G1 HR DIR3A E26
IRIS B 34 18 HR DIR3B P21 (B,C,D), (1-3,
20 H4 G2 XCF COVER OPEN
M 13 G5 H2
33
35
19
17
MSHUT EN
MSHUT DIR AA5 (4-8) 7-9)
AC19
XPROGRAM DIAL A 2
TO
OVER ALL
H6 G3 U21 AC15 XPROGRAM DIAL B BLOCK DIAGRAM
HR QCLK
SHUTTER FP-747 FLEXIBLE CN702 HR EN2 B8 J1 AE14 (3/3)
MOTOR (2/6) MSHUT EN HR DIR2A XMINL LCD BL ON
SHUTTER + F7 28 24 HR DIR2B
M21 C7 (PAGE 3-6)
5 SHUTTER - E7 XAE LOCK ON
M 8 D7
SHUTTER
DRIVE F8 41 11
MSHUT DIR
IR FILTEREN EN
H20
N20
AE12
AD11
XSHTR ON
FOCUS A IR FILTEREN DIR W21 STRB CHG
FOCUS AE17
FOCUS A HR EN2 XSTRB FULL
MOTOR FOCUS B A6 C8 XFC RST SENS
Y21 AD13
HR DIR2A
FOCUS B 37 15 XIR RST SENS F21
24 B5 C7 HR DIR2B
M 21 A4
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE B8
36
38
16
14
Y21 AD18
EXT STRB CONT
STRB POP UP CNTSENS
IR FILTER B4 B7 D24
(1/10)
MOTOR IR + IR FILTEREN EN C17
39 IR - C1 B3 29 13 IR FILTEREN DIR SYS SO,SI,SCK

M
A16
36 D2
IR FILTER
DRIVE A2 40 12
1
3
IC304 6
4
H21
U20
D15
PRELAMP AF ON TO
AC14
FC RING
FG AMP A2
PRELAMP AF CONT 3 OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
PD LV (2/3)
D5
IRIS RESET IRIS RESET SENS AD SELF TIMER LED
SENSOR
10 43 9 H25 (PAGE 3-3)
XSTRB POP UP
AE13
FOCUS RESET XFC RST SENS HOT STRB ON STRB POP UP DC EN
AA4
32 45 7 EXT STRB ON STRB POP UP DC DIR
SENSOR A7
AB3 STRB POP UP DC BRAKE
IR FILTER XIR RST SENS STRB ON A16
SENSOR
34 42 10
1
TO
OVER ALL IR LED ON
AB4
U20 B6 UA-003 BOARD

BLOCK DIAGRAM PANEL R
(2/3) PANEL G Q302-Q304
E23
(PAGE 3-3) PANEL B
BUFFER C23 CN707
XCAM RST (AA,AB,AC, CN001
ZOOM RING G26
ZOOM POS OUT D23 IRIS RESET SENS AD 50 (4/10) 5 11
POSITION 27 1 4 46 6 HDO T,U,W,Y) PHY DATA0-DATA15 USBPHY D+,D- (USB)
BUFFER E4 29 4 10
SENSOR FP-746 PANEL V C18 ZOOM POS OUT (1-4)
FLEXIBLE
CN701
D17
AC12
AU A IN
AU A OUT
E4
IC251
(3/6) (1/10) AC9
PHY CLKOUT USB2.0
N1 55 I/F 11
V OUT PHY RESET CX251
2 IC303 4 F23 AC3 28
12 12MHz
FC RING FG A CN702
VIDEO AMP T20
FOCUS 1 FC RING FG B 30 22
RING
FG 3 29 23 XSYS RST A17
FP-747 CAM SO,SI,SCK D16 Q601
FLEXIBLE MELODY J001
B15 AD12 BEEP A OUT
MELODY EW MOD E1 (6/10) B4 5 A/V OUT (MONO)
(3/6) AF14
CN712
MIC IN AU A IN
IC601
MIC901 MIC 1 H4
AU A OUT AUDIO
H5 AMP
CN713
SP+
SP901 1 SP- MIC IN
B9
SPEAKER 2 SP+
SP- A2
D1
AUDIO SIGNAL
VIDEO SIGNAL
VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL
3-1 3-2
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
SY-096 BOARD (2/3) LENS UNIT (2/3) AJ-006 AJ-007 BOARD

FLEXIBLE J201
CN201
LANC SIG ACC
2 2 (Accessory)
ACC STRB ON
6 6
ST-088 MT-067
CN702
FP-747 FP-750 BOARD BOARD
STRB POPUO DC EN CN501 CN503
STRB POPUO DC DIR 11 FLEXIBLE(4/6) 41 B2
STROB FLEXIBLE STRB POPUP+
M910
POPUP E1 1 22 1
TO
STRB POPUO DC BRAKE
9 43 A1 MOTOR E2 4 19 4
STRB POPUP-
M FLASH
MOTOR
4 OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM LANC SIG
12 40 F2 DRIVE
(3/3)
(PAGE 3-5) EXT STRB CONT S001
39 13 CAM -7.5V MOTOR POSITION
DETECT
STRB POPUP CNTSENS
8 44 16 7 16
CN001
IC703 (9/10)
CN701
29
FP-746 FLEXIBLE(4/6)
23 8 15 5
LANC SIG
10
D504
CN702
2 4 HOT STRB ON FLASH 8 HOT 7
26 26 19 4
DRIVE 9 6 ACCESSORY
FP-747 SHOE
2 4 EXT STRB ON FLEXIBLE(5/6) EXT STRB ON CN

27 25 12 11 11 4
(9/10)
TO
SYS SO,SI,SCK
3 OVER ALL
IC702
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/3)
PANELAMP AF ON
25 27 4 5 11 12
LD OUT
CN504
3
D001
AS-050
AF LD
(PAGE 3-2) PANELAMP AF CONT DRIVE PD OUT AF LASER UNIT FLEXIBLE
30 22 2 1 10 13 4
LS-067
PD LV
31 21 BOARD
SELF TIMER LED SELF TIMER LED D004
15 37 LED DRIVE 5 18 1 Self-timer
CN701 S001
XSTRB POPUP
26 26 6 17 6 FLASH
STRB POPUP DC EN FP-746 FLEXIBLE(5/6) OPEN DETECT
STRB POPUP DC DIR Q501
CN702 CN505
STRB POPUP DC BRAKE D001
28 24 15 8 LED DRIVE 2 Infrared ray emitter
(9/10) 6 XE-H
HOT STRB ON
IC502 9 L001
EXT STRB ON IC701 Q502-504

13
14
TRIGGER
TRANSFORMER
XENON
TUBE
STRB ON 2 4 STRB ON FLASH 23 XE-L
29 23 14 9
DRIVE 26
TO
IR LED ON
FP-747 SI-037 BOARD
1 OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM FLEXIBLE(6/6) TO
(1/3) CONTROL SWITCH CN502
2 DC 300V
5 OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(PAGE 3-1) BLOCK(UNDER) (1/2) (3/3)
(DD-204)
PANEL R LCD901
VR
PANEL G
PANEL R
VG
CN703 CN002 CN001 (PAGE 3-5)
PANEL G 40 (7/10) 19 29 30 10 2.5INCH
PANEL B PANEL B VB LCD
39 20 21 22 8
UNIT
HDO
PANEL V
HDO
PANEL V
38
43
IC801 21
VCOM
25 26 9
RGB DRVE 25 1 2 1
42 HCNT,
TIMING MVLK, 17 18
GENERATOR OE, 13 14
47 (LCD) GRES,
35 STBYB, 9 10
SYS SO,SI,SCK 48 7
32 SRT, 24 23
46 GSRT,GPCK,CP 3
16 5 6
24
6 7 8
21
2 20 19
(7/10) 22 21
BACK LIGHT
BL ON 26 25 CN004
31 BL LEVEL BL H BLREG
28 IC802 30 29 1
BL ND901
REG
BL UNREG
PANEL R R CN901
LB-091 BOARD CN001 LCD902
PANEL G 40 19 G 15 4
PANEL B (8/10) COLOR
B
39 20 16 3 EVF
HDO
PANEL V
38
43
IC902 21
COM
14 5 UNIT
RGB DRVE 23 17 1
42 PCG
TIMING VST
GENERATOR VCK
47 (EVF) STB
35 EN
SYS SO,SI,SCK 48 DWN
31
46 HST
15 HCK2,HCK1 3 16
14 12 7
4
2 DC1 Q901-903
16 EXTDA BACK LIGHT D001
21
28 DRIVE BACK LIGHT
VIDEO SIGNAL
3-3 3-4
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
SY-096 BOARD (3/3) CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH

SW-410 BOARD LENS UNIT BLOCK(UNDER) BLOCK(MID)
(3/3)
(5/10) Q701 CN703 CN002
XACCESS LED D001
LED DRIVE 18 17
ACCESS
IC401 XCHARGE/
B1
XCHARGE/XSTRB LED
50 49
CN003
1
D001
FLASH
S001-007 HI CONTROL XSTRB LED
XCF COVER OPEN
CN001 36 35 9 CF COVER OPEN
OPEN(FLASH),FLASH, KEY AD3
METERING MODE,MACRO, 2 2 28 24 KEY AD4 J7 KEY AD3
BURST/BRACKET,FOCUS, 3 3 27 25 H7 KEY AD4 XPROGRAM DIAL A
NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FLAMING CN701 XPROGRAM DIAL B 40 39 7 COMMAND
FP-746 38 37 8 DIAL
FP-751 FLEXIBLE
FLEXIBLE (6/6)
MULTI-
KEY AD0 GUI DOWN SELECTOR
KEY AD 0 J6 46 45 3
GUI UP
42 41 5
(8/10)
LCD903
CHARACTER 1
CN201
12
IC201 9 C1 DDCON SO KEY AD1 MENU,
DISPLAY COMO-COM3,SEG1-SEG20 LCD DDCON SO,SCK KEY AD 1 H6 44 43 4 S002,S012
25 37 8 D3 DDCON SCK S001-006 AE LOCK
UNIT DRIVE
(5/10) J4 32KHz IN
X401 KEY AD2 FINDER/LCD,SCREEN STATUS,
KEY AD 2 G6 10 9 SELF TIMER/INDEX,
IC402 32.768KHz
J5 32KHz OUT KEY AD0 L5
2 1 DIGITAL ZOOM,QUICK REVIEW,
MEMORY STICK/CF CARD
RESET 5 D7 XRSTX
VL 3V
3
A5
6 BACK UP VCC
RST VIN 3V H4
7
REG
S003-005
8 CN709 WHITE BALANCE,
KEY AD0 L2
10 EXPOSURE,
CN602 CN601 CN751 EVER 3.0V MODE DIAL 0 DISPLAY WINDOW BACKLIGHT
S001 XRST SW
5 33 33 MODE DIAL 0 J8 MODE DIAL 1 9 MODE
LR-018 RESET
BT001
LITHIUM
3
VL 3V
35 35 MODE DIAL 1 J9 8 DIAL
XMINI LCD
Q704
BOARD BATTERY
(SECONDARY)
BL ON
LED DRIVE 12
X MINI LCD BL ON
D006
MINI LCD BACK LIGHT
F1 BATT SIG D001

XPOWER LED ON B2 2 POWER
DD-204 BOARD A7 BATT/XEXT
H2 FAST CHARGE XPWR ON
BATT SIG XPWR ON B8 3 POWER S002
25 25 E8 SYS DD ON
BATT/XEXT XAE LOCK ON
27 27
FAST CHARGE 5
29 29 XACCESS LED SHUTTER S001
CN002 Q001,002 6
1 BATT UNREG F2 LANC SO
BT901 F3 LANC SI
FR SO D2
BATTERY S 2
D001 FR SI D1 FR SO,SI,SCK
TERMINAL RST VIN
3 37 37 XFR SCK E1
XSYS RST
XSYS RST B3
XACCESS LED TO
XCF COVER OPEN 2 OVER ALL CONTROL SWITCH
LANC SO
50 9 9 TO XPROGRAM DIAL A
BLOCK DIAGRAM BLOCK(TOP)
LANC
I/O
48
LANC SI
11 11 4 OVER ALL XPROGRAM DIAL B
(1/3)
51
LANC SIG
7 7
LANC SIG BLOCK DIAGRAM XMINI LCD BL ON (PAGE 3-2)
(2/3)
XAE LOCK ON
38
SYS DD ON
23 23 (PAGE 3-3) XSHTR ON
STRB CHG
CN001 IC001 27
28
DDCON SO,SCK
19
17
19
17 XSTRB FULL
1 DC/DC
DD 1.8V
J901 2 CONVERTER DD P5V
DC IN 3 DD 2.95V
DD 4.7V
DD 3.3V
DD 4.2V
DD 15V
DD -7.5V
IC004
FP-748
ACV UNREG
BL UNREG FLEXIBLE
STRB CHG
15 15
XSTRB FULL
13 13
CN401 TO
STRB UNREG HI VOLTAGE
CHARGER
C405
1 DC300V 5 OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Q401,402,407 (FLASH) (2/3)
(ST-088)
(PAGE 3-4)
3-5 3-6
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
DD-204 BOARD F001

Q401,402,407,T401
CN401 TO
STRB UNREG HIGHT VOLTAGE
CHARGER
1 DC 300V 1 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
CN002 F005 C405
(PAGE 3-10)
BATT UNREG BATT UNREG
1
BT901
BATTERY BATT SIG F004
S 2 UNREG3
TERMINAL
3 Q001,002 Q003,004
SY-096 BOARD (2/3) MD 3.3V
F006 STRB CHG STRB CHG
CHARGE 15 15 15 15
5V UNREG XSTRB FULL XSTRB FULL
SWITCH 13 13 13 13
F003
BL UNREG BL UNREG BL UNREG
41 41 41 41
CN001 LF001 F002
AV UNREG ACV UNREG
1
J901 2
DC IN 3
BATT/XEXT
CN601 FP-748 PANEL 13.5V
PANEL 2.95V
27 25
27 25
29
29
31
31
BOARD PANEL 4.7V
EVER 3.0V
CN001 VREF 37
RT 30 L002
DD 1.8V
(2/2) L757
Q007 D 1.8V
49 49 49 49
IC001 SWITCHING
DC/DC CONVERTER (10/10)

CN002
LANC I/O
27 25
27 25
29
29
31
31
D001 OUT1 57
IC751 ,Q751
CN751 36 36 36 36 D 1.2V
SY-096 BOARD (1/3) 56 VCC
IN1 20
Q008
L003
DD P 5V
38 38 38 38
1.2V REG
CAM P 5V
40 40 40 40
RST VIN SWITCHING
37 37 37 37 43 VIN 42 42 42 42
44 44 44 44
BATT UNREG
45 45 45 45 OUT2 58
ACV UNREG
43 43 43 43
IN2 21 46 46 46 46
(5/10) L004 48 48 48 48 L759 CAM 15V
Q009 DD 2.95V PANEL 2.95V
SWITCHING 50 50 50 50 CAM P 5V
L760
IC401 52 52 52 52 D 2.95V D 2.95V
L761
H8 BATT SENS HI CONTROL A 2.95V
OUT3 59
G8 ACV SENS DDCON SCK C1 19 19 19 19 27 DIN
DDCON SCK D3 17 17 17 17 DDCON SO,SCK,XCS 28 CLK
IN3 22
XCS DD CON H1 21 21 21 21 26 LD L005 L751
Q010 DD 4.7V PANEL 4.7V
F1 BATT SIG 53 53 53 53 D 1.2V
SWITCHING TO
(5/10) A7 BATT/XEXT
CTL1 38 23 23 23 23 38 CTL1
L753
(10/10) D 1.8V
A 2.95V
2 POWER
BLOCK DIAGRAM
J4 INIT CHARGE
CONTROL IC402 H2 FAST CHARGE OUT4 60
1
IC752 5
L754
CAM 3.3V CAM 3.3V (2/2)
3 (PAGE 3-9)
SWITCH D404 3.3V
2 VCH RESET 5 D7 XRSTX IN4 23 REG
XCTL 2 54 54 54 54
BLOCK 3
XLANC IC ON A1 3 3 3 3 47 L011
A5 MD 3.3V 56 56 56 56 MD 3.3V
(TOP) 6
H4
BACK UP VCC CN751 CN002 CN001 CN601
5.6V V CONT LANC
Q011
SWITCHING L006 58 58 58 58
Q006 52
REG I/O 60 60 60 60
3V BATTER IN
7 REG DETECT 4 A9 BATT IN
LANC DC
54
OUT5 61
S002
8
POWER
CN709 EVER 3.0V IN5 24
3 B8 XPER ON L007 55 55 55 55 L756
Q012 DD 4.2V TG 4.2V TG 4.2V
F8 DDCON SENS 57 57 57 57
SWITCHING
D001 POWER 1 59 59 59 59
Q752
OUT6 62 PANEL 13.5V
13.5V REG
CN751
35 39 33 IN6 25
D010 (10/10)
35 39 33
RECT
CN002 L001
DD 15.5V
47 47 47 47 2 IC753 1
CAM 15V
15.1V
OUT7 63 Q015 REG
SWITCHING
-INE7 2
CN001 FP-748 BOARD(1/2) DD -7.5V L763 CAM -7.5V CAM -7.5V

35 39 33 2 1 51 51 51 51
35 39 33
CN601 D011 IC004
EVER 3.0V RECT -7.5V
29 RST
VL 3V XRST SW CN602 REG
3 5
BT001 S001
LITHIUM RESET
BATTERY
(SECONDARY)
LANC DC LANC DC
5 5 5 5
CN601 CN001 CN002 CN751
LR-018 BOARD
EVER 3.0V
D 1.2V
3-7 3-8
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
SY-096 BOARD (3/3) FP-756 FP-749

FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE
CN451 CN101 CN103 CN706
Q702 MEMORY
L452 Q451 COMPACT FLASH/ D 2.95V VCC
MD 3.3V 25 25 27 27 VCC 2 STICK
MICRO DRIVE CONNECTOR
28 28 24 24
MS PWR ON
(3/10)
CF-097 PANEL 4.7V L804 CN703
33 34
CN002
VSH (5V)
CN001
11
LCD901
2.5INCH
D 2.95V IC452 K6
CF POWER ON BOARD PANEL 2.95V
Q801,802
49
35
50
36
VDD (3V) 12
20
LCD
UNIT
MICRO CAM 15V L803 VGH (15V)
STRB CHG 47 48 19
DRIVE
XSTRB FULL I/F VDC (15V)
45 46 18
(7/10)
PANEL 13.5V
CONTROL
IC801 SWITCH
24
PANEL 13.5V FB901 CN901
VDD
CN001 LCD902
BL ON
RGB
DRIVE
XCSSAVE2 BLOCK
1 18 COLOR
EVF
BL LEVEL 31 TIMING (UNDER)
28 GENERATOR ND901
UNIT
(8/10) Q703 CN004
BL THH THERMISTOR
34 27 6
PANEL 2.95V IC902 LB-091 BL MODE
RGB DRIVE BACK LIGHT
L805 L806
TIMING
GENERATOR BOARD BL UNREG
D805
30 33
BL H BL REG
1
D001 (RECT)
BACK LIGHT (7/10)
L902 6
PANEL 4.7V EVF LED A
19
BL UNREG 5
9
IC802 1
3 28 31
BL L IN2-
3
PANEL 13.5V BL REG
PANEL 2.95V TO
PANEL 4.7V
CN003 D001
CONTROL SWITCH 1 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
(DD-204)
EVER 3.0V EVER 3.0V
48 47 2 FLASH BLOCK (MID) (PAGE 3-8)
R701
2
CN502 CN505
CN701 Q502-504
CN501 6 XE H XENON
CAM P 5V 42 10 FLASH
17 6 9 TUBE
39 13 DRIVE D001
R509,510
FP-746 18 5 1
Infrared ray
emitter
(3/10) (1/10) (1/10) (9/10) (8/10)
FLEXIBLE FP-750 SI-037
IC451 IC304 IC302 IC701 IC201 (1/2) FLEXIBLE ST-088 BOARD BOARD
TO OR FC RING SDRAM LCD
2 POWER
BLOCK DIAGRAM
GATE FG AMP 512Mbit IC702 DRIVE IRIS/
SHUTTER/
(1/2)
IC703 FOCUS/
AF LD
DRIVE ZOOM POSI VCC 28 ZOOM RING LENS UNIT
POSITION
(PAGE 3-8) IR FILTER 29 SENSOR
BUFFER DRIVE XMF SENS LED
MF VCC FOCUS
2 RING
XFC RST LED FG
CAM 15V
CAM P 5V
38 14 FOCUS
D 2.95V D 2.95V F SENS VCC
31 RESET
37 15 XIRIS RST LED SENSOR
FB301
IRIS SENS VCC 11 IRIS

RESET
XIR SENS LED 12 SENSOR
(6/10) (1/10) (2/10)
L581 IR FILTER
IC601 IC301 L582
AVDD PLL 1.2V
IC501 AE17
STRB CHG
EEPROM BUFFER
IR SENS VCC
35 RESET
SENSOR
AUDIO CAMERA AVDD AD 2.95V CAMERA XSTRB FULL
AD13
AMP DSP XFC RST LED L583 SYSTEM MS PWR ON
U22 AVDD DA 2.95V CONTROL AC18
XIRIS RST LED BL MODE
V22 L584 E25
XIR SENS LED AVRT DA 2.95V
T22
XMF SENS LED CAM DD ON
W20 AE19
AU 2.95V XMF SENS LED CAM DD ON

8 44
D 1.2V L602
CAM 15V
D 1.8V 32 20
A 2.95V CAM -7.5V
31 21
CAM 3.3V
CN702
XFC RST LED
(1/10) (4/10) 21 31
XIRIS RST LED
19 33
XIR SENS LED
IC303 IC251 CAM DD ON
18
33
34
19 A/D S/H 3.45V 3.45V TIMING CCD
VIDEO USB 2.0 LANC DC CONV. AGC 3 REG 5 GENER IMAGER
AMP I/F 17 35
FP-747
FLEXIBLE
CN701
A 2.95V 36 16
35 17
CAM 3.3V 34 18
TG 4.2V
CAM -7.5V 33 19
4 4 J201
LANC DC TG 4.2V 45 7 ACC
CN201
(Accessory)
43
FP-746 9
AJ-007
FLEXIBLE AJ-006
(2/2) FLEXIBLE BOARD
3-9 3-10E
DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
D001
A Infrared ray emitter
CN505 26P
1 IR_LED_A
2 IR_LED_K
3 N.C.
4 N.C. CN501 22P 22P
5 N.C. STRB_POPUP+ 22 1 STRB_POPUP+
6 XE_H STRB_POPUP+ 21 2 STRB_POPUP+
XENON TUBE
7 XE_H STRB_POPUP- 20 3 STRB_POPUP-
B 8 XE_H STRB_POPUP- 19 4 STRB_POPUP-
9 XE_H SELF_TIMER_LED 18 5 SELF_TIMER_LED
10 N.C. XSTRB_POPUP 17 6 XSTRB_POPUP
11 N.C. REG_GND 16 7 REG_GND
12 N.C. LANC_SIG 15 8 LANC_SIG
SI-037 BOARD 13
14
TRIGGER REG_GND 14 9 REG_GND
TRIGGER PD_OUT 13 10 PD_OUT
15 N.C. LD_OUT 12 11 LD_OUT
C 16 N.C. ST-088 BOARD EXT_STRB_ON_CN 11
FP-750 FLEXIBLE 12 EXT_STRB_ON_CN
17 N.C. XASHOE_JACK_IN 10 13 XASHOE_JACK_IN
18 REG_GND STRB_ON 9 14 STRB_ON
19 REG_GND IR_LED_ON 8 15 IR_LED_ON
20 N.C. STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS 7 16 STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
21 N.C. CAM_P_5V 6 17 CAM_P_5V
22 N.C. D_2.95V 5 18 D_2.95V
23 XE_L HOT_STRB_ON 4 19 HOT_STRB_ON
D 24 XE_L REG_GND 3 20 REG_GND
25 XE_L REG_GND 2 21 REG_GND
26 XE_L REG_GND 1 22 REG_GND
D001
AF LASER UNIT
CN504 6P
1 SELF_TIMER_LED 1
CN502 2P
2 REG_GND
REG_GND 1 TO
E LS-067 BOARD
3
4
LD_OUT
DC_300V 2
DD-204 BOARD
CN401
PD_OUT
(PAGE 4-7)
5 REG_GND
6 XSTRB_POPUP
LENS UNIT(1/2)
(CD-469 BOARD)
CN503 16P
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
F Note: 2
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
XASHOE_JACK_IN
D004
Since a servce is not for the single
STRB_POPUP+
STRB_POPUP+
STRB_POPUP-
STRB_POPUP-
S001 (Self-timer) TO
CD-469 Board.
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
( FLASH OPEN
DETECT )
LENS UNIT
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
REG_GND
(2/2)
Because adjustment is needed.
(PAGE 4-3)
HOT
HOT
N.C.
N.C.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
3
4
6
7
8
9
G SW-410 CN001 6P 6P
BOARD N.C. 1 1 N.C.

KEY_AD3 2 2 KEY_AD3
CN001 10P
KEY_AD4 3 FP-751 3 KEY_AD4
ACCESSORY SHOE 10 LANC_SIG
9 REG_GND
N.C. 4
FLEXIBLE 4 N.C.
REG_GND 5 5 REG_GND
8 N.C.
N.C. 6 6 N.C.
7 HOT
AS-050 6 HOT
H FLEXIBLE 5 N.C.
4 EXT_STRB_ON_CN
3 XASHOE_JACK_IN
2 SHOE_GND
1 SHOE_GND
AJ-007 BOARD
I S001
MOTOR POSITION MT-067 BOARD
DETECT
CN201 6P 6P
LANC_GND 1 1 LANC_GND
J201
LANC_SIG 2 2 LANC_SIG
ACC(Accessory)
LANC_GND 3 AJ-006 3 LANC_GND
LANC_DC 4
FLEXIBLE 4 LANC_DC
XLANC_JACK_IN 5 5 XLANC_JACK_IN
ACC_STRB_ON 6 6 ACC_STRB_ON
M910
J FLASH MOTOR
M
16
4-1 4-2 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)

DSC-F828
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A
REG_GND 1
REG_GND 2
REG_GND 3
REG_GND 4
REG_GND 5
XFE_CS 6
B XCAM_SCK 7
39P
CAM_SO 8
1 MF_OUT_F0
XCAM_RST 9
2 MF_VCC
XTG_CS 10
3 MF_OUT_F1
XCDS_CS 11
4 MF_GND
CAM_SI 12
5 SHUTTER+
EXT_STRB_CONT 13
6 SHUTTER+
REG_GND 14
C 7 SHUTTER-
CCD_TEMP 15
8 SHUTTER-
REG_GND 16
9 IRIS_SENS_GND
LENS_TEMP 17
10 IRIS_SENS_OUT
REG_GND 18
11 IRIS_SENS_VCC
CAM_DD_ON 19
12 IRIS_SENS_VCC
MSHUT_REF 20
13 IRIS_B
PD_LV 21
14 IRIS_B
PRELAMP_AF_CONT 22
D 15
16
IRIS_B
STRB_ON 23
IRIS_B
17 IRIS_A LENS UNIT(2/2) IR_LED_ON 24 5
18 IRIS_A
(CD-469 BOARD)
EXT_STRB_ON 25
FP-747 FLEXIBLE TO
HOT_STRB_ON 26 SY-096 BOARD
LENS 19 IRIS_A
PRELAMP_AF_ON 27 (PAGE 4-5)
20 IRIS_A
MSHUT_EN 28
21 FOCUS_B
FC_RING_FGB 29
22 FOCUS_A Note:
FC_RING_FGA 30
Since a servce is not for the single
E 23
24
FOCUS_B
CD-469 Board.
XFC_RST_LED 31
FOCUS_A
XCAM_DR_PS 32
25 STATIC_GND Because adjustment is needed.
XIRIS_RST_LED 33
26 ZOOM_POSI_GND
XIR_SENS_LED 34
27 ZOOM_POSI_OUT
LANC_DC 35
28 ZOOM_POSI_VCC
XLANC_JACK_IN 36
29 ZOOM_POSI_VCC
SELF_TIMER_LED 37
30 GND(SENS,THERM)
XHSHOE_CONT 38
F 31
32
F_SENS_VCC
XLENS_EEP_WE 39
F_SENS_OUT
STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE 40
33 THERM_OUT
STRB_POPUP_DC_EN 41
34 IR_SENS_OUT
XLENS_EEP_CS 42
35 IR_SENS_VCC
STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR 43
36 IR-
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS 44
37 IR-
REG_GND 45
38 IR+
REG_GND 46
G 39 IR+
REG_GND 47
REG_GND 48
REG_GND 49
REG_GND 50
2 REG_GND 51
51P
TO
LENS UNIT 51P 21P
(1/2)
(PAGE 4-2)
H XASHOE_JACK_IN
ZOOM_POS_OUT
XMF_SENS_LED
XFC_RST_SENS
XIR_RST_SENS
XSTRB_POPUP
IRIS_SENS_AD
IR_FILTER_EN
IR_FILTER_IN
MSHUT_DIR
VSUB_CONT
CAM_-7.5V
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
HR_DIR2B
HR_DIR2A
HR_DIR3B
HR_DIR3A
CAM_3.3V
CAM_3.3V
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
CAM_15V
TG_3.45V
TG_3.45V
TG_3.45V
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD4
CA_AD00
CA_AD01
CA_AD02
CA_AD03
CA_AD04
CA_AD05
CA_AD06
CA_AD07
CA_AD08
CA_AD09
CA_AD10
CA_AD11
CA_AD12
CA_AD13
AD_GND
AD_GND
AD_GND
AD_GND
D_2.95V
D_2.95V
A_2.95V
A_2.95V
HR_EN2
HR_EN3
CLP_OB
TG_CLK
MCKTG
CA_HD
PBLK
CA_F
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
3
2
1
7
6
3
2
1
I
FP-746 FLEXIBLE FP-754 FLEXIBLE

3 4
TO
SY-096 BOARD TO
SY-096 BOARD
(PAGE 4-5)
(PAGE 4-6)
J
16
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4) 4-3 4-4

DSC-F828

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A
CN709 12P
EVER_3.0V 1
XPOWER_LED_ON 2
XPWR_ON 3
GND 4
XAE_LOCK_ON 5
B XSHTR_ON 6
CN901 22P GND 7 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)

22 N.C. MODE_DIAL1 8
CN001 18P 21 EVF_LED_K MODE_DIAL0 9

18 VDD 20 N.C. KEY_AD0_L2 10
17 VSS 19 EVF_LED_A GND 11
16 RCG 18 N.C. XMINILCD_BL_ON 12
15 VST 17 COM
C 14 VCK 16 G
13 STB 15 R
12 ENB 14 B
LCD902
11
10
DWN
RGT
LB-091 13
12
TEST
HCK1
COLOR EVF UNIT
9 HST BOARD 11 HCK2 CN713 2P
8 HCK2 10 HST SP_- 2
SP901
7 HCK1 9 RGT SP_+ 1 SPEAKER
D 6 TEST D001
BACK LIGHT
8 DWN
5 B 7 ENB
4 R 6 STB
3 G 5 VCK
2 N.C. 4 VST
CN712 2P
MIC
1 COM 3 PCG
MIC_GND 2
2 VSS MIC901
MIC_IN 1
1 VDD
E
51 REG_GND
50 REG_GND
CN707 12P
49 REG_GND
USB_GND 12
48 REG_GND
USB_D+ 11 J001
47 REG_GND
USB_D- 10 A/V OUT(MONO)
46 REG_GND
USB_GND 9
F 45 TG_4.2V
USB_VBUS 8
44 TG_4.2V
SY-096 BOARD(1/2) GND_GUARD(REG_GND) 7
43 TG_4.2V
GND_GUARD(REG_GND) 6
42 CAM_P_5V
A_OUT 5 5 GND
41 CAM_P_5V CN001
GND_GUARD(REG_GND) 4 4 ID
40 CAM_P_5V
AV_JACK_IN 3 UA-003 3 D+ (USB)
39 CAM_P_5V
38 D_2.95V
BOARD 2 D-
V_OUT 1 1 VCC
G 37
36
D_2.95V
A_2.95V
35 A_2.95V
34 CAM_3.3V
CN201 26P
33 CAM_3.3V
COM0 1
32 CAM_15V
COM1 2
31 CAM_-7.5V
SEG0 3
30 REG_GND
H 5 FP-746 29 LANC_SIG
SEG1
SEG2
4
5
28 REG_GND
TO
LENS UNIT(2/2) FLEXIBLE 27 ASHOE_JACK_IN
SEG3 6
SEG4 7
(PAGE 4-4) 26 XSTRB_POPUP
SEG5 8
25 KEY_AD4
SEG6 9
24 KEY_AD3
SEG7 10
23 PBLK LCD903
SEG8 11 CHARACTER DISPLAY UNIT
22 CA_F
SEG9 12
I 21
20
CA_HD
VSUB_CONT
SEG10 13
SEG11 14
19 HR_DIR3A
SEG12 15
18 HR_EN3
SEG13 16
17 HR_DIR3B
SEG14 17
16 HR_DIR2A
SEG15 18
15 HR_EN2
SEG16 19
14 HR_DIR2B
SEG17 20
J 13
12
IR_FILTER_EN
IR_FILTER_IN
SEG18 21
SEG19 22
11 MSHUT_DIR
SEG20 23
10 XIR_RST_SENS
COM2 24
9 IRIS_RESET_SENS_AD
COM3 25
8 XMF_SENS_LED
N.C. 26
7 XFC_RST_SENS
6 ZOOM_POS_OUT
K 5
4
REG_GND
REG_GND
CN706 10P
VSS 10
3 REG_GND
MS_BS 9
2 REG_GND
DATA1 8
1 REG_GND
SDIO/DATA0 7
CN701 51P
DATA2 6 FP-749 MEMORY STICK
CONNECTOR
CN702 51P CN711 21P

INT 5
FLEXIBLE
DATA3 4
L
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
SCLK 3
STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR
STRB_POPUP_DC_EN
STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE
PRELAMP_AF_CONT
VCC 2
PRELAMP_AF_ON
SELF_TIMER_LED
EXT_STRB_CONT
XLANC_JACK_IN
XLENS_EEP_WE
XIRIS_RST_LED
XLENS_EEP_CS
XIR_SENS_LED
XHSHOE_CONT
HOT_STRB_ON
VSS 1
EXT_STRB_ON
XFC_RST_LED
XCAM_DR_PS
FC_RING_FGB
FC_RING_FGA
CAM_DD_ON
MSHUT_REF
LENS_TEMP
IR_LED_ON
MSHUT_EN
XCAM_SCK
XCAM_RST
CCD_TEMP
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
STRB_ON
XCDS_CS
LANC_DC
CA_AD13
CA_AD12
CA_AD11
CA_AD10
CA_AD09
CA_AD08
CA_AD07
CA_AD06
CA_AD05
CA_AD04
CA_AD03
CA_AD02
CA_AD01
CA_AD00
CAM_SO
XTG_CS
CLP_OB
CAM_SI
TG_CLK
XFE_CS
MCKTG
D_GND
D_GND
D_GND
D_GND
PD_LV
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M
TO
SY-096 BOARD
6 (2/2)
(PAGE 4-8)
3 FP-747 FLEXIBLE
FP-754 FLEXIBLE
TO
LENS UNIT(2/2)
4
TO
(PAGE 4-3) LENS UNIT(2/2)
N (PAGE 4-4)
16
4-5 4-6 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (3/4)

DSC-F828

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(MID)
GND 51 1 GND
CN001 10P
GND 50 2 GND
XCD2 49 3 XCD2
D10 48 4 D10
XCF_COVER_OPEN
B XIOIS16 47 5 XIOIS16
GUI_DOWN
D09 46 6 D09
REG_GND
REG_GND
KEY_AD1
D_2.95V
GUI_UP
DIAL_B
DIAL_A
D02 45 7 D02
XSTRB
D08 44 8 D08
D01 43 9 D01
10
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
XSTSCHG 42 10 XSTSCHG
D00 41 11 D00
XSPKR 40 12 XSPKR
C A00 39 13 A00
XREG 38 14 XREG
A01 37 15 A01
XINPACK 36 16 XINPACK
A02 35 17 A02
10
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
XWAIT 34 18 XWAIT
REG_GND
XCF_COVER_OPEN
DIAL_B
DIAL_A
REG_GND
GUI_UP
KEY_AD1
GUI_DOWN
D_2.95V
XSTRB
A03 33 19 A03
CN703 50P B TO B CN002 50P B TO B
RESET 32 20 RESET
FLEXIBLE
D A04 31 21 A04
1
3
VCOM KEY_AD0_L5 2 1 VCOM KEY_AD0_L5 2
VBC REG_GND 4 3 VBC REG_GND 4

A05 30 22 A05
5 STBYB REG_GND 6 5 STBYB REG_GND 6
XCSEL 29 23 XCSEL
7 SRT REG_GND 8 7 SRT REG_GND 8
CN103 50P A06 28 24 A06
COMPACT FLASH
MICRO DRIVE
CF-097 BOARD VCC 27 25 VCC
9
11
OE KEY_AD2 10 9 OE KEY_AD2 10
CN003 10P
REG_GND REG_GND 12 11 REG_GND REG_GND 12
VCC 26 26 VCC
FP-756
13 MCLK REG_GND 14 13 MCLK REG_GND 14
VCC 25 27 VCC
15 REG_GND REG_GND 16 15 REG_GND REG_GND 16
VCC 24 28 VCC
E IREQ 23 29 IREQ
17
19
HCNT
REG_GND
XACCESS_LED 18 17 HCNT XACCESS_LED 18
GSRT 20 19 REG_GND GSRT 20

A07 22 30 A07
SY-096 BOARD(2/2) 21 VG GPCK 22 21 VG GPCK 22
XWE 21 31 XWE
A08 20 32 A08
23 REG_GND GRES 24 23 REG_GND GRES 24
XIOWR 19 33 XIOWR
25 VB CP 26 25 VB CP 26
(UNDER)
27 REG_GND BL_L IN2- 28 27 REG_GND BL_L IN2- 28
A09 18 34 A09
29 VR BL_H BL_REG 30 29 VR BL_H BL_REG 30
XIORD 17 35 XIORD
31 REG_GND BL_THL 32 31 REG_GND BL_THL 32
XVS1 16 36 XOE
F A10 15 37 A10
33
35
VSH(5V) BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V) 34 33 VSH(5V) BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V) 34
VDD(3V) XCF_COVER_OPEN 36 35 VDD(3V) XCF_COVER_OPEN 36

XCE2 14 38 XCE2
37 VSS XPROGRAM_DIAL_B 38 37 VSS XPROGRAM_DIAL_B 38
XCE1 13 39 XCE1
39 VGL XPROGRAM_DIAL_A 40 39 VGL XPROGRAM_DIAL_A 40
D15 12 40 D15
41 C2 GUI_UP 42 41 C2 GUI_UP 42
D07 11 41 D07
43 VSS KEY_AD1 44 43 VSS KEY_AD1 44
D14 10 42 D14
45 VDC(15V) GUI_DOWN 46 45 VDC(15V) GUI_DOWN 46
D06 9 43 D06
47 VGH(15V) EVER_3.0v 48 47 VGH(15V) D_2.95V 48
D13 8 44 D13
G D05 7 45 D05
49 VDD(3V) CHARGE_LED/XSTRB_LED 50 49 VDD(3V) CHARGE_LED/XSTRB_LED 50
D12 6 46 D12
S001 LR-018 D04 5 47 D04
BT001
RESET
FLEXIBLE D11 4 48 D11
LITHIUM BATTERY D03 3 49 D03
(SECONDARY)
XCD1 2 50 XCD1
GND 1 51 GND
CN101 51P CN451 51P
H
6
5
4
3
1
REG_GND
XRST_SW
REG_GND
VL_3V
REG_GND
N.C.
CN004 6P CN001 24P

DD-204 BOARD
1 BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
CN601 60P B TO B CN751 60P B TO B
I 1 XLANC_PWR_ON REG_GND 2 2 REG_GND XLANC_PWR_ON 1
BL_H BL_REG
CN001 60P CN002 60P
B TO B B TO B
VDC (15V)
VGH (15V)
3 XLANC_IC_ON REG_GND 4 4 REG_GND XLANC_IC_ON 3
VSH (5V)
VDD (3V)
VDD (3V)
BL_L IN2-
BL_THL
CN602 6P
STBYB
5 LANC_DC REG_GND 6 6 REG_GND LANC_DC 5
VCOM
MCLK
HCNT
GRES
GPCK
GSRT
VBC
VSS
VGL
VSS
SRT
N.C.
N.C.
VG
VR
OE
VB
CP
C2
C1
7 LANC_SIG REG_GND 8 8 REG_GND LANC_SIG 7
1 CN401 2P 9 LANC_SO REG_GND 10 10 REG_GND LANC_SO 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
6
5
4
3
3
4
6
7
8
9
TO 1 DC_300V 11 LANC_SI REG_GND 12 12 REG_GND LANC_SI 11
ST-088 BOARD
CN502 2 REG_GND 13 XSTRB_FULL REG_GND 14 14 REG_GND XSTRB_FULL 13
(PAGE 4-2) 15 STRB_CHG REG_GND 16 16 REG_GND STRB_CHG 15

J 17 DDCON_SCK REG_GND 18 18 REG_GND DDCON_SCK 17
CN001 3P 19 DDCON_SO REG_GND 20 20 REG_GND DDCON_SO 19
1 ACV_UNREG 21 XCS_DDCON REG_GND 22 22 REG_GND XCS_DDCON 21

HARNESS
FP-748 BOARD
2 ACV_GND 23 SYS_DD_ON REG_GND 24 24 REG_GND SYS_DD_ON 23
3 BATT/XEXT 25 BATT_SIG REG_GND 26 26 REG_GND BATT_SIG 25

27 BATT/XEXT REG_GND 28 28 REG_GND BATT/XEXT 27
29 FAST_CHARGE REG_GND 30 30 REG_GND FAST_CHARGE 29
LCD901
31 INIT_CHARGE REG_GND 32 32 REG_GND INIT_CHARGE 31 2.5INCH
K J901
DC IN
33 XRST_SW REG_GND 34 34 REG_GND XRST_SW 33
LCD UNIT
35 VL_3V DD_P_5V 36 36 DD_P_5V VL_3V 35

CN002 3P
37 RST_VIN DD_P_5V 38 38 DD_P_5V RST_VIN 37
1 BATT_UNREG
HARNESS 39 EVER_3.0V DD_P_5V 40 40 DD_P_5V EVER_3.0V 39
2 BATT_SIG
41 BL_UNREG DD_P_5V 42 42 DD_P_5V BL_UNREG 41
3 BATT_GND
43 ACV_UNREG DD_P_5V 44 44 DD_P_5V ACV_UNREG 43
45 BATT_UNREG DD_2.95V 46 46 DD_2.95V BATT_UNREG 45

47 DD_15.5V DD_2.95V 48 48 DD_2.95V DD_15.5V 47 ND901 BACKLIGHT
L 49 DD_1.8V DD_2.95V 50 50 DD_2.95V DD_1.8V 49
51 DD_-7.5V DD_2.95V 52 52 DD_2.95V DD_-7.5V 51

53 DD_4.7V DD_3.3V 54 54 DD_3.3V DD_4.7V 53
BT901
BATTERY TERMINAL
55 DD_4.2V DD_3.3V 56 56 DD_3.3V DD_4.2V 55 6
57 DD_4.2V DD_3.3V 58 58 DD_3.3V DD_4.2V 57
TO
59 DD_4.2V DD_3.3V 60 60 DD_3.3V DD_4.2V 59 SY-096 BOARD
(1/2)
(PAGE 4-6)
16
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (4/4) 4-7 4-8

DSC-F828
Link
DD-204 BOARD (DC/DC CONVERTER) LB-091 BOARD (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)
LR-018 BOARD (BATTERY, RESET SW) CF-097 BOARD (CF CARD CONNECTOR)
ST-088 BOARD (FLASH CONTROL) FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD
LS-067 BOARD (AF LASER) SW-410 BOARD (FUNCTION KEY)
MT-067 BOARD (FLASH MOTOR) AJ-007 BOARD (JACK)
SI-037 BOARD (FLASH, IR LED) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)
AS-050 FLEXIBLE BOARD CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)
UA-003 BOARD (AV, USB JACK) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

DSC-F828
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams) 1. Connection

• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ
Link
µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics
Pattern box
and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.
kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip. About 20cm
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum
capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C541 L452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520
Kinds of capacitor Front of the lens

Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX

indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.
• Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of
Refer to the mount table for each function. Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic H
curve B, unless otherwise noted.
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
• Signal name Green
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC
Red
Blue
• 2: non flammable resistor
• 5: fusible resistor
• C: panel designation
• A: B+ Line
• B: B– Line
• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. A B A=B B A
• C: adjustment for repair. Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
• A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: SERVO SIGNAL
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)
• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the
measurement points and ground when camera shoots
color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
and reference waveforms.
(VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) When indicating parts by reference number, please
• Voltage values change depending upon input include the board name.
impedance of VOM used.)
Note : Note :
The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
4-9
DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS DD-204 BOARD LR-018 BOARD
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-49 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
DD-204 BOARD NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

DC/DC CONVERTER R :REC MODE
A P :PB MODE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
INIT_CHARGE
FAST_CHARGE
BATT_SIG
BATT/XEXT
C001
0.1
T401
INVERTER
TRASFORMER D402
L401 HAU160C030TP
CN001 3P LF001 2.2uH
HARNESS C002 2 1 F001 1.4A/32V
ACV_UNREG 1 0.1 2 6
4 3 Q002 R019 R403
ACV_GND 2 HAT1054R-EL 10 F002 1.4A/32V 15k
SWITCH 1/16W
BATT/XEXT 3 7.9 8.3 R022 C404 1 5
FB001 R008 4 1k F003 1.4A/32V 0.022u
B 0uH 22k
D003
MA8120-TX 8.1 8.3
8.3
C401
R404
120 25V
R003 3 F004 1.4A/32V 22u 3 4

J901 6
XX R006 5 R-0.4 16V
LND001 XX P-0.1
DC IN 1 7 R023 Q401
R014 8 Q003 6800
STATIC_GND 2SB1122-ST-TD-E F006 1.4A/32V 2SK3018-T106
470k 0 8.3 SWITCHING 8.3
R401
STRB_CHG 10k 0 Q407
2 CPH3205-SONY-TL-E
C067 C068 C069 C070 1.9
7.9 D004 0 22u 22u 22u 22u SWITCH 8.3
D002 C005
2
1
1SS357-TPH3 16V 16V 16V 16V R6.6 L002
MAZT082H08S0 0.022u Q004 P6.9 3 22uH
TA B TA B TA B TA B 0 0
DTC144EMT2L
C402
F005 1.4A/32V Q007 R402 0.1u C405
C038
C CN002 3P CPH5802-TL-E 47k 250u
4
5
7.9 10u 10V D403 315V
HARNESS SWITCHING B
BATT_UNREG 1 0 R016 1M 8.3 D401 RB160L-40TE25 (FLASH)
R005 470k MA111-(K8).SO
S BATT_SIG 2
C030
1u
BATT_GND 3
Q001
SSM3K03FE(TPL3) Q003,004 R405
SWITCH CHARGE ON SWITCH XSTRB_FULL 4700
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
2.9 0
5 4
D L010 0
1 3
0
5.3 1uH C406
Q402 2 1u
2
1
L003 XP1211-TXE 10V
8.2 3 0uH SWITCH
Q008
CPH5802-TL-E
4
5
C039 C065
SWITCHING 10u 33u
8.3 B 10V
C031
1u
E CN401 2P
TO
1 DC_300V ST-088 BOARD
CN502
2 REG_GND
(PAGE 4-14)
1
D001 3.0
MA132WK-(K8).SO R030 R029
1200 15k
2
1
L004
± 0.5% ± 0.5% 5.4 22uH
3
R034 3
R035 C040
18k 120k Q009
R048 ± 0.5% ± 0.5% 10u
10k CPH5802-TL-E
4
5
B
± 0.5% SWITCHING
F R017
10k
R018
62k
R049
10k
R032
12k
8.3
C032
± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5% 1u
R024
R025
R028
R033
R031
22k
22k
68k
68k
22k
4.7
R020 68k
2
1
L005
3.8 22uH
3
C019 0.0068u
C041
C018 0.0033u
Q010
C012 4700p
C014 2200p
C007 0.001u
10u
C016 100p
CPH5802-TL-E
4
5
SWITCHING B
G 8.3
C033
1u
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
R0.8/P0.4
FB2
1.2
-INE2
1.2
+INE2
1.2
-INE3
0.7
FB3
0.9
FB4
1.2
-INE4
1.1
+INE5
1.1
-INE5
R0.4/P0.6
FB5
1.3
+INE6
1.3
-INE6
0.8
FB6
0.8
FB7
1.2
-INE7
2.5
DTC6
R043 3.3
10k
2
1
R8.3 L006
R041 P6.7 3 10uH
10k
± 0.5% R013 C006
Q011
2.1 3.0 0.047u C042
XX
XX
XX
4700
XX
0.6 CPH5802-TL-E CN601 60P

0
C066
4
5
4 6 GND0 10u
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
FB1 SWITCHING B 47uF XLANC_PWR_ON

H 5 2 1.2 out7 3.5 8.3 6.3V 1 XLANC_PWR_ON REG_GND 2
R001
R002
R004
R007
R010
R011
-INE1 XLANC_IC_ON
C034
1.5 2.1 R4.6/P4.4 1u 3 XLANC_IC_ON REG_GND 4
-INS8 OUT6
3 1 LANC_DC
R042 1.5 OUT5 6.7 5 LANC_DC REG_GND 6
47k IN1 LANC_SIG
± 0.5% 1.5 5.3 OUT4 3.8 7 LANC_SIG REG_GND 8
R044
100k 3.0
IN2
IN3
IC001 OUT3 5.4 4.1
LANC_SO
LANC_SI
9 LANC_SO REG_GND 10
2
1
4.7 8.2 R4.6 L007 11 LANC_SI REG_GND 12
DC/DC CONVERTER OUT2 22uH
Q014 IN4 P4.4 3 XSTRB_FULL
HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) 3.3 R6.6/P6.9 13 XSTRB_FULL REG_GND 14
IN5 OUT1 Q012
SWITCHING C043 STRB_CHG
4.1 IC001 8.3 CPH5802-TL-E 15 STRB_CHG REG_GND 16
4
5
VCC0 10u
IN6 MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1 SWITCHING B DDCON_SCK
I XCS_DDCON 3.0
LD VCC1 7.6 R039
2.2
8.3
C035 DDCON_SO
17 DDCON_SCK REG_GND 18
DDCON_SO 0 5.6 1u 19 DDCON_SO REG_GND 20

3
1
DIN LANC_DC
XCS_DDCON
DDCON_SCK 3.0 5.6 5.6 8.3 21 XCS_DDCON REG_GND 22
CLK SENSE
SYS_DD_ON
3.0 6.9 23 SYS_DD_ON REG_GND 24
2
RST VCONT C028 BATT_SIG

C003 R012 33k 0.7 2.2 C027 6.9 Q006 10u 25 BATT_SIG REG_GND 26
RT LANC_SIG 10u MCH3310-TL-E
0.1u BATT/XEXT
0 0.2 SWITCH 27 BATT/XEXT REG_GND 28
CSCP DATA_IN C045 FAST_CHARGE
2.2u 29 FAST_CHARGE REG_GND 30
SEL WAKE_UP
LANC_DC INIT_CHARGE
C004 L001 Q015 2 3 31 INIT_CHARGE REG_GND 32
0.1u 47uH LS5U17LP-TL
J R040 1 4
DATA_OUT
SWITCHING 33 XRST_SW REG_GND 34

470 C029
REG_3V
LANC_SIG D010
XX
XX
RESET
OUTC3
XCTL2
2.2u 35 VL_3V DD_P_5V 36

CDET
VREF
CTL1
VOUT
VBAT
R045 R009 B 4.7 1SS383(T5RSONY1) RST_VIN

3 4
GND
VRO
VIN
XX 4700
CS
VR
CS
D006 37 RST_VIN DD_P_5V 38

R046
R047
1SS357-TPH3 8.0
2 5 4.7 39 EVER_3.0V DD_P_5V 40
XLANC_PWR_ON
1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
C053
D011
1SS383(T5RSONY1)
IC004 41 BL_UNREG DD_P_5V 42
2.4
1.2
2.9
2.5
3.0
3.4
3.0
3.3
7.6
0
0.2
LANC_SO 1u -7.5V REG 43 ACV_UNREG DD_P_5V 44

3.5
45 BATT_UNREG DD_2.95V 46
R-7.4 R050 47 DD_15.5V DD_2.95V 48
P-7.5 XX
K -VIN
2
49 DD_1.8V DD_2.95V 50
XLANC_IC_ON
0.047u
0.022u
R036
3
C044 C046 VSS
SYS_DD_ON
0.1u
100k -VOUT
0.1u
C058
1
4.7u 4.7u 51 DD_-7.5V DD_2.95V 52
RST_VIN
XX
XX
XX
1u R-7.4
LANC_SI
B B
P-7.6 C062 53 DD_4.7V MD_3.3V 54
IC004 XC62KS0PXXMR
4.7u
C008
C011
C010
C015
C017
C009
C013
10V 55 DD_4.2V MD_3.3V 56
57 DD_4.2V MD_3.3V 58
59 DD_4.2V MD_3.3V 60
TO SY-096 BOARD(10/10) CN751
( FP-748 BOARD )
THROUGH THE
L (PAGE 4-43 of LEVEL3)

LR-018 BOARD
BATTERY, RESET SW S001 6P CN602 6P
6 REG_GND REG_GND 6 D007

MA8082-(K8).S0
RESET 5 XRST_SW XRST_SW 5
4 REG_GND REG_GND 4
3 VL_3V VL_3V 3
BT001 2 REG_GND REG_GND 2
LITHIUM BATTERY
M (SECONDARY) 1 N.C. N.C. 1
16
Note : Note :
4-11 4-12 DD-204/LR-018

DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ST-088 BOARD LS-067 BOARD MT-067 BOARD SI-037 BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board of ST-088 and MT-067.
• Refer to page 4-52 for printed wiring board of LS-067.
• Refer to page 4-53 for printed wiring board of SI-037.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A LS-067 BOARD
AF LASER
S001
(FLASH OPEN DETECT)
D003
ST-088 BOARD
D002
MA8082-(K8).S0
MA8082-(K8).S0
FLASH CONTROL
D001 6P
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
AF LASER UNIT CN504 6P
B Note
2
6 XSTRB_POPUP XSTRB_POPUP 6
5 REG_GND REG_GND 5
3
4 PD_OUT PD_OUT 4
1
3 LD_OUT LD_OUT 3
2 REG_GND REG_GND 2
D004
SML-310LTT86
(Self-timer)
1 SELF_TIMER_LED SELF_TIMER_LED 1
MT-067 BOARD
AS-050 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block.
FLASH MOTOR So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
LND001
C CN501 22P CN503 16P
STRB+ +
16P M910
STRB_POPUP+ 22 1 STRB_POPUP+ STRB_POPUP+ 1 LND002 M FLASH MOTOR
Note:Adustment is needed when laser unit is replaced. STRB_POPUP+ 21 2 STRB_POPUP+ STRB_POPUP+ 2 STRB- - AS-050
STRB_POPUP- 20 3 STRB_POPUP- STRB_POPUP- 3 FLEXIBLE
STRB_POPUP- 19 FB501 4 STRB_POPUP- STRB_POPUP- 4 CN001 10P 10P
0uH
SELF_TIMER_LED 18
FB502 0uH
5 LANC_SIG LANC_SIG 5 10 LANC_SIG LANC_SIG 10 2
XSTRB_POPUP 17 6 REG_GND REG_GND 6 9 REG_GND REG_GND 9
D504
03P4J-T1
D REG_GND 16
FB503
7 N.C. N.C. 7 8 N.C. N.C. 8 10
LANC_SIG 15 C501 R503
1k
0uH 8 HOT HOT 8 7 HOT HOT 7 9
0.01u
REG_GND 14 9 HOT HOT 9 6 HOT HOT 6 ACCESSORY
6,7 SHOE
PD_OUT 13 FB504 10 N.C. N.C. 10 5 N.C. N.C. 5
0uH 4
LD_OUT 12 11 EXT_STRB_ON_CN EXT_STRB_ON_CN 11 4 EXT_STRB_ON_CN EXT_STRB_ON_CN 4
LENS UNIT 3
EXT_STRB_ON_CN 11 12 XASHOE_JACK_IN XASHOE_JACK_IN 12 3 XASHOE_JACK_IN XASHOE_JACK_IN 3
FB505
( THROUGH THE
FP-750 FLEXIBLE ) XASHOE_JACK_IN
STRB_ON
10
9
0uH 13
14
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
13
14
2
1
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
2
1
1
S001
E IR_LED_ON
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
8
7
15
16
REG_GND REG_GND 15
(MOTOR POSITION
DETECT)
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS 16
CAM_P_5V 6
D_2.95V 5
HOT_STRB_ON 4 D502
MAZT082H08S0 D503
REG_GND 3 MA8082-(K8).S0
REG_GND 2
D501
XX LND503
TO
SI-037 BOARD
CN502 2P
REG_GND 1 STATIC_GND
1 REG_GND
DD-204 BOARD
CN401
FLASH, IR LED
F LENS UNIT is replaced as a block.
2 DC_300V (PAGE 4-12)
LND004
STATIC_GND
LND005
STATIC_GND
So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD and R512
0
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted. CN505 26P 26P
1 IR_LED_A IR_LED_A 1
2 IR_LED_K IR_LED_K 2 D001
CL-330IRS-X-TU
3 N.C. N.C. 3
(Infrared ray emitter)
Q502-504 4 N.C. N.C. 4
LIGHT LEVEL CONTROL C505
D508 10u
1SS357-TPH3 10V 5 N.C. N.C. 5
G 6 XE_H XE_H 6
7 XE_H XE_H 7
8 XE_H XE_H 8 LND001
5.0 Q502
UN9111J-(K8).SO R507 9 XE_H XE_H 9 XE_H
1M
10 N.C. N.C. 10
5.0
C503 11 N.C. N.C. 11
IC502 0.047u
CY25AAJ-8-T13
0 IC502 250V 12
13
N.C.
TRIGGER
N.C.
TRIGGER
12
13
LND003
TRIGGER
1 8
H C506 R513
IGPT
2 7
R280
P272
14 TRIGGER TRIGGER 14 L001
R510 D505 0.047u 150 R505

16V 6 15 N.C. N.C. 15
56 XX C502 R514 47 0 3
1/4W 0.1 10k 16 N.C. N.C. 16 LND002
4 5
Q504 17 N.C. N.C. 17 XE_L
0
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
18 REG_GND REG_GND 18
0.7 XENON
19 REG_GND REG_GND 19 TUBE
R509
56
1/4W 20 N.C. N.C. 20
6 3
Q501 C504
2SC5658T2LQ/R 0 2 5 0 D507 0.01u 21 N.C. N.C. 21
I IR LED DRIVE 4.3
R506
1M
RR255L-400TE25 250V
22 N.C. N.C. 22
0
1 4 23 XE_L XE_L 23
R508
470 D506 R511 24 XE_L XE_L 24
Q503 02DZ10-TPH3 100k
RN1902FE(TPLR3) 25 XE_L XE_L 25
26 XE_L XE_L 26
Note : Note :
J 0 are critical for safety. pour la sécurité.
16 specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
ST-088/LS-067/MT-067/SI-037/AS-050 4-13 4-14

DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS UA-003 BOARD LB-091 BOARD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R002
0
UA-003 BOARD
A AV,USB JACK R003 1k
FB001 0uH J001

A/V OUT(MONO)
R004
0
MA8082-(K8).S0
MAZT082H08S0
MAZT082H08S0
MA111-(K8).S0
D002
D001
D003
D004
B
12P
V_OUT 1
AV_JACK_IN 3
LND001 R006
GND_GUARD(REG_GND) 4 0
D005
TO STATIC_GND
A_OUT 5 XX
SY-096 BOARD(9/10)
CN707
C (PAGE 4-42
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
6
7
of LEVEL3)
USB_VBUS 8 5P
R001 0
USB_GND 9 1 VCC
1 3 CN001
USB_D- 10 2 D-
2 4
USB_D+ 11 3 D+ (USB)
USB_GND 12 LF001 4 ID
5 GND
R005
D 0
SIGNAL PATH
16 VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
REC
PB
1 2 3 4 5 6
LB-091 BOARD
A EVF,EVF BACKLIGHT
22P CN001 18P
VDD 1 18 VDD
VSS 2 17 VSS
RCG 3 16 RCG
VST 4 15 VST
VCK 5 14 VCK
B STB 6 13 STB
LCD902
ENB 7 12 ENB COLOR EVF
UNIT
DWN 8 11 DWN
TO RGT 9 10 RGT
SY-096 BOARD(8/10)
CN901 HST 10 9 HST
HCK2 11 8 HCK2
(PAGE 4-40
of LEVEL3) HCK1 12 7 HCK1
TEST 13 6 TEST
C B 14 5 B
R 15 4 R
G 16 3 G
COM 17 2 N.C.
N.C. 18 1 COM
EVF_LED_A 19
D001
N.C. 20 NSCW455T-TC9
EVF_LED_K 21
(BACKLIGHT) SIGNAL PATH
D N.C. 22 VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
REC
16
4-15 4-16 UA-003/LB-091

DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CF-097 PRINTED WIRING BOARD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A FP-756 CF-097 BOARD

51P
FLEXIBLE 51P CF CARD CONNECTER
GND 1 51 GND GND 51
GND 2 50 GND GND 50 50 GND
CF_XCD2 CF_XCD2
XCD2 3 49 XCD2 XCD2 49 49 XCD2
R102 47 CF_D10 CF_D10
D10 4 48 D10 D10 48 48 D10
CF_XIOIS16 CF_XIOIS16
XIOIS16 5 47 XIOIS16 XIOIS16 47 47 XIOIS16
R103 47 CF_D9 CF_D9
B D09
D02
6
7
46
45
D09
D02
D09
D02
46
R105 47 CF_D2 CF_D2
46 D09
45 45 D02
R106 47 CF_D8 CF_D8
D08 8 44 D08 D08 44 44 D08
R107 47 CF_D1 CF_D1
D01 9 43 D01 D01 43 43 D01
XSTSCHG 10 42 XSTSCHG XSTSCHG 42 42 XSTSCHG
R108 47 CF_D0 CF_D0
D00 11 41 D00 D00 41 41 D00
XSPKR 12 40 XSPKR XSPKR 40 40 XSPKR 25.50
R109 47 CF_A0 CF_A0
A00 13 39 A00 A00 39 39 A00
CF_XREG CF_XREG
C XREG 14 38 XREG XREG 38
R110 47 CF_A1 CF_A1
38 XREG
A01 15 37 A01 A01 37 37 A01
XINPACK 16 36 XINPACK XINPACK 36 36 XINPACK
R111 47 CF_A2 CF_A2
A02 17 35 A02 A02 35 35 A02
CF_XWAIT CF_XWAIT
XWAIT 18 34 XWAIT XWAIT 34 34 XWAIT
CF_A3 CF_A3
A03 19 33 A03 A03 33 33 A03
CF_RESET CF_RESET R104 0
RESET 20 32 RESET RESET 32 C104 32 RESET
CF_A4 CF_A4 XX
A04 21 31 A04 A04 31 31 A04
TO CF_A5 CL101
D SY-096 BOARD(3/10)
CN451
A05 22 30 A05 A05 30
CF_A5
30 XVS2
XCSEL 23 29 XCSEL XCSEL 29 29 A05
CF_A6
(PAGE 4-30 A06 24 28 A06 A06 28 28 XCSEL
of LEVEL3) FB101
CF_A6
VCC 25 27 VCC VCC 27 C101 27 A06
0uH COMPACT FLASH
0.1u B
VCC 26 26 VCC VCC 26 26 VCC MICRO DRIVE
C102
VCC 27 25 VCC VCC 25 0.1u 25 VCC
CF_IREQ B
VCC 28 24 VCC VCC 24 24 IREQ
R112 47 CF_IREQ CF_A7
IREQ 29 23 IREQ IREQ 23 23 A07
CF_A7 CF_XWE
E A07 30 22 A07 A07 22
CF_XWE CF_A8
22 XWE
XWE 31 21 XWE XWE 21 21 A08
CF_A8 CF_XIOWR
A08 32 20 A08 A08 20 20 XIOWR
R113 47 CF_XIOWR CF_A9
XIOWR 33 19 XIOWR XIOWR 19 19 A09
CF_A9 CF_XIORD
A09 34 18 A09 A09 18 18 XIORD
R114 47 CF_XIORD CF_XOE
XIORD 35 17 XIORD XIORD 17 17 XOE
CF_XOE CL102
XOE 36 16 XOE XOE 16 16 XVS1
CF_A10 CF_A10
A10 37 15 A10 A10 15 15 A10
R116 47 CF_XCE2 CF_XCE2
F XCE2
XCE1
38
39
14
13
XCE2 XCE2 14
R117 47 CF_XCE1 CF_XCE1
14 XCE2
XCE1 XCE1 13 13 XCE1
R118 47 CF_D15 CF_D15
D15 40 12 D15 D15 12 12 D15
R119 47 CF_D7 CF_D7 1.26
D07 41 11 D07 D07 11 11 D07
R120 47 CF_D14 CF_D14
D14 42 10 D14 D14 10 10 D14
R121 47 CF_D6 CF_D6
D06 43 9 D06 D06 9 9 D06
R122 47 CF_D13 CF_D13
D13 44 8 D13 D13 8 8 D13
R123 47 CF_D5 CF_D5
D05 45 7 D05 D05 7 7 D05
R124 47 CF_D12 CF_D12
G D12 46 6 D12 D12 6
R125 47 CF_D4 CF_D4
6 D12
D04 47 5 D04 D04 5 5 D04
R126 47 CF_D11 CF_D11
D11 48 4 D11 D11 4 4 D11
R127 47 CF_D3 CF_D3
D03 49 3 D03 D03 3 3 D03
CF_XCD1 CF_XCD1
XCD1 50 2 XCD1 XCD1 2 2 XCD1
GND 51 1 GND GND 1 C103 1 GND
47u
CN101 51P 6.3V CN103 50P
TA
B
H R101
1
GND
FP-756 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block. 0
GND
2
D101
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted. MA111-(K8).S0
LND101
SIGNAL PATH STATIC GND
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
I REC
PB
16
CF-097/FP-756 4-17 4-18

DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SW-410 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD

• Refer to page 4-57 for printed wiring board of SW-410.
• Refer to page 4-56 for printed wiring board of AJ-007.
1 2 3 4 5 6
S001
SW-410 BOARD OPEN(FLASH)
A FUNCTION KEY
XX MARK:NO MOUNT S002 S005
CN001 6P
N.C. 1 (FLASH) (Metering mode)
KEY_AD3 2
R001 R004
KEY_AD4 3 1500
LENS UNIT 1200
N.C. 4
( THROUGH THE
FP-751 FLEXIBLE ) REG_GND 5
B N.C. 6
S003
S006
LENS UNIT is replaced as a block. /BRK(Burst/Bracket)

So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD (MACRO)
D001
and SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted. XX
R002 R005
3300 6800
LND001
STATIC GND S004
C D002
XX
FOCUS
(AUTO/MANUAL)
R006
XX
R003
22k
S007
NIGHTSHOT/
NIGHTFRAMING
16
1 2 3 4 5 6
AJ-007 BOARD
JACK
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT
FB204 0uH
CN201 6P
LANC_GND 1 FB205 0uH
LANC_SIG 2
LANC_GND 3
LENS UNIT J201
LANC_DC 4 FB203 0uH
( THROUGH THE
AJ-006 FLEXIBLE ) XLANC_JACK_IN 5
FB202 0uH
ACC(Accessory)
ACC_STRB_ON 6
B C201 C204
LENS UNIT is replaced as a block. 0.001u 0.001u
So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD and
D202 D203 FB201
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted. MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 0uH
D201
0
Note
LND201
Resistor is mounted to the location
C where D201 is printed.
STATIC GND
16
4-19 4-20 SW-410/AJ-007

DSC-F828
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK D001
(TOP) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK SML-310LTT86
A XX MARK:NO MOUNT D001 A (MID) (Flash)
TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)
(POWER) XX MARK:NO MOUNT
S002 S006
POWER
(Multi-Selector)
12P
EVER_3.0V 1
SCN M (MANUAL)
B XPWR_LED_ON 2 S001
(SHATTER)
6 R005 5
R006
1500
B R005
XPWR_ON 3 (1st)
SETUP 3300 A (AUTO) 1.2k
GND 4 7 4 R007
1 2 R010 R002 1.5k R010
TO 3300
XAE_LOCK_ON 5 (2nd) R004 6.8k 3.3k
SY-096 BOARD(9/10) 6800 R008
CN709 3 4 1200
XSHTR_ON 6 (MOVIE) 8 S
(PAGE 4-41 GND 7 3
of LEVEL 3) MODE_DIAL1 8 9 S007
R007 S002 S010 S003 S012
MODE_DIAL0 9 (PB) 1200 2
1 MENU (CENTER) AE LOCK (Delete)
C KEY_AD0_L2 10 P
C (Multi-selector) (Multi-selector)
GND 11
XMINILCD_BL_ON 12
MA8082-(K8).S0
R011 XX R009 1500

MAZT082H08S0
D005 XX
D002
D003
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP) is R012 R002 3300 R003 6800 D003

22 S008 MA8082-(K8).S0
replaced as a block.
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD D006
SML311EBT (Multi-selector)
is omitted. (MINI LCD BACK LIGHT)
LND002
S003 S004 S005 S014
D R013 XX
D007 XX
D Command dial STATIC_GND
WB + D002
(Exposure)
(White balance) MAZT082H08S0
LND001 (Display window
D004
16 STATIC_GND
backlight)
MAZT082H08S0
LND001
STATIC_GND
D005
MA8082-(K8).S0
E CN001 10P
XSTRB_LED 1
D_2.95V 2
TO GUI_DOWN 3
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK KEY_AD1 4
(UNDER)
CN003 GUI_UP 5
(PAGE 4-24) REG_GND 6

DIAL_A 7
F DIAL_B
XCF_COVER_OPEN
8
S015
9
OPEN(CF)
REG_GND 10
16
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID) is replaced as a block.
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)/(MID) 4-21 4-22

DSC-F828
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A (UNDER) S006
CF("Memory Stick"/CF card)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT TO SY-096 BOARD(9/10) CN703
(PAGE 4-41 of LEVEL3)

CN002 50P B TO B
1 VCOM KEY_AD0_L5 2
3 VBC REG_GND 4
Note : Note :
5 STBYB REG_GND 6 The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
B 7
9
SRT REG_GND 8
OE KEY_AD2 10
CN001 24P 11 REG_GND REG_GND 12
VCOM 1 13 MCLK REG_GND 14
VBC 2 15 REG_GND REG_GND 16
STBYB 3 17 HCNT XACCESS_LED 18
SRT 4 19 REG_GND GSRT 20
OE 5 21 VG GPCK 22 CN004 6P
C MCLK 6 23 REG_GND GRES 24 6 BL_L IN2-

N.C.
HCNT 7 25 VB CP 26 5
VG 8 27 REG_GND BL_L IN2- 28 4 BL_H BL_REG

ND901
VB 9 29 VR BL_H BL_REG 30 3 BL_THL BACKLIGHT
LCD901
2.5INCH VR 10 31 REG_GND BL_THL 32 2 N.C.
LCD UNIT
VSH (5V) 11 33 VSH(5V) BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V) 34 1 BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
VDD (3V) 12 35 VDD(3V) XCF_COVER_OPEN 36
VSS 13 37 VSS XPROGRAM_DIAL_B 38
D VGL 14 39 VGL XPROGRAM_DIAL_A 40
C2 15 41 C2 GUI_UP 42
C1 16 43 VSS KEY_AD1 44
VSS 17 45 VDC(15V) GUI_DOWN 46
VDC (15V) 18 47 VGH(15V) D_2.95V 48 CN003 10P
VGH (15V) 19 49 VDD(3V) CHARGE_LED/XSTRB_LED 50 10 REG_GND
VDD (3V) 20 9 XCF_COVER_OPEN
CP 21 8 DIAL_B
TO
E GRES 22 7 DIAL_A
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
GPCK 23 6 REG_GND
(MID)
GSRT 24 5 GUI_UP CN001
4 KEY_AD1 (PAGE 4-22)

R001 R002 R003 R004 R005 3 GUI_DOWN
22k 6.8k 3.3k 1.5k 1.2k
2 D_2.95V
1 XSTRB
D001
SML-310LTT86
ACCESS
SIGNAL PATH
F S002 S003 S004 S005
VIDEO SIGNAL
S001
FINDER/LCD (Screen status) (Digital zoom (Quick CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
(Self Timer/Index) Playback zoom) Review)
REC
16 PB
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER) is replaced as a block.

So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
4-23 4-24 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)

Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are not
shown.
DSC-F828
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
Link
DD-204 BOARD LB-091 BOARD
LR-018 BOARD UA-003 BOARD
ST-088 BOARD CF-097 BOARD
MT-067 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD
LS-067 BOARD SW-410 BOARD
SI-037 BOARD FP-748 BOARD
COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION
CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
Board Name Function

DD-204 DC/DC CONVERTER
LR-018 BATTERY, RESET SW
ST-088 FLASH CONTROL
MT-067 FLASH MOTOR
LS-067 AF LASER
SI-037 FLASH, IR LED
LB-091 EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT
UA-003 AV, USB JACK
CF-097 CF CARD CONNECTOR
AJ-007 JACK
SW-410 FUNCTION KEY
FP-748 CONNECTOR
DSC-F828
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards)

• : Uses unleaded solder. • Chip parts.
• : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. Transistor Diode
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) C 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 4 4 5 3 3 3 1 23
• Through hole is omitted.
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 6 54
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram
1 2 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 3 4
isn’t mounted in this model.
• C: panel designation
5 4 3 3 4 5 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
5 4
1 3
BOARD INFORMATION
parts location pattern
board name CSP IC
(shown on page) number of layers layers not shown
DD-204 4-63 6 2 to 5 –
LR-018 – 1 – –
ST-088 4-63 6 2 to 5 –
MT-067 – 1 – –
LS-067 – 1 – –
SI-037 – 1 – –
LB-091 – 1 – –
UA-003 4-63 1 – –
CF-097 4-63 2 – –
AJ-007 4-63 2 – –
SW-410 4-63 2 – –
FP-748 – 1 – –
IC301, 302, 401, 452,
SY-096 4-65 8 2 to 7
501, 601
4-47
DSC-F828
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

• Refer to page 4-47 for common note for printed wiring board. • : Uses unleaded solder.
DD-204 BOARD(SIDE A) DD-204 BOARD(SIDE B)
1 2
Q401
R404
C404
C403
C405 R401
C402
R402
R406
R403
5 4
A A
1
2
3
D401 Q402
1 3
2
D403 L401
Q407
T401
C406
R405
CN401
C401
LND001 C046
6
5
4
C058
+ B D402 R050
1
2 1 C066
2 1
IC004
+
C062
B 3 B
3 4
P
L001 C042
2 1 2 1
D011 L006 C029 C045
Q007 Q012 3 2
C053
Q011
L002
1 5
L007
4 3
C038
3 5 3 5
Q015
B
C043
C034
5 1 D010
C044
55 59
60
C070
C030 C035
D002
2 1 3 4 1 2
+
2 1
50
Q010 2 1
Q009
45
Q008
C039
3 5
L004
L003
R008 3 5
L005
C033
40
3 5
C C
C040
R003 C032
35
FB001
CN601
C031
F004
C041
+ B L010
30
C008
C011
B
F001
25
C069
C013
C067
C010
C017
C015
3
R042
CN001
20
F006
C009
B +
R041
+
C004
R043
C002
15
4 4 3
R036
C065
Q014
R012 F002
CN002
1
48 45 40 33 LF001
10
D001
49 32 F003 + B
C003 1 3
C001
2 1
1 5
C068
G S
R009 R022
1
Q006
R044
2
D
R047
C028
R039
R023
D R040
D
300D
55 R046
R019
Q004
25 R045 8 5
IC001 F005 Q003 C027
D006
Q002 D007
60 D004
20 4
64 17
R010 R011
1 LR-018 BOARD
Q001
5 10 16 R002 R007 1 6
R014
1 R004
BT001
C005
R001
R013
R028
R005
R033
R024 R020
R016
C006 CN602 R018
R025
(LITHIUM BATTERY)
C019
C016 R017
E C014 C012 C007
R035
E (SECONDARY)
R048
R030
C018
R029 R034
R031
R032
11 11 – +
R049 1-860-719-
1-860-719-
16
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 16
1-860-529- 11
S001
CAUTION : 1 RESET
Replace only with the same or equivalent type. 6
4-49 4-50 DD-204/LR-018

DSC-F828
ST-088 BOARD(SIDE A) ST-088 BOARD(SIDE B)
CN503 CN501
R512
LND503 22 15 10 5 1
A 16 10 5 1 A
FB501
FB504
FB505
FB502
D503 R508
Q501
D502
D501
D505
R503
K
CN505
FB503
D504
A
D506
1 5 15 25 C501
2 10 20 26 K
B R511 B
1 2 CN504
6 2
C503
C504
D507
5 1
CN502
R507
C506 Q504
C502
1Q503
6 4
3
R514
8 5
Q502
LS-067 BOARD
IC502 R513 S001
C 4 C505 C ( FLASH
DETECT )
OPEN
R505
R506
1 6
1
D508
R509
R510
11 11
1-860-720- 1-860-720- A D002
K K
16
1 2 2 1 16 A
D003
MT-067 BOARD
1
1-860-546- 11
16
3
1 2
S001 D001 A
(LASER UNIT) D004
( MOTOR POSITION
DETECT ) 1 5 10
1-860-533- K
CN001
11
Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.
ST-088/MT-067/LS-067 4-51 4-52

DSC-F828
22 1
26 1
LB-091 BOARD
D002
1 5 10 15 18 1-860-528- 11
CN001
SI-037 BOARD
L001
1-860-532- 11
D001
UA-003 BOARD
J001 CN001
A/V OUT (MONO) (USB)
12 1
D005
R006
2 4
A
R005
R004
D004
1 3 5
3
LF001
FB001 4
D001
R001
1 2
R003
D002
D003
R002
B
1-860-530- 11
16
1 2 3 4 5 6
4-53 4-54 SI-037/LB-091/UA-003

DSC-F828
CF-097 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD
D101
LND101
J201
R101
A ACC(Accessory)
4
50
R102
R103 A
45
R106
R107
R108
R104 R105
1
3
CL103
40
CL104
C104
5
CL105CL101
FB201
C202
C203
C201
C204
35
2
45 51
R111
R110
C102 R109
50
30
D201
40
FB204
CN103
25
D203
25 35
15 R113 R112
FB203
LND201
CN101
C101
30
D202
20
B
R114
FB205
20
CL102
1
1 5 10 15
R116 R117 FB202
B
R119
R118 R123
R121
CN
10
R120
R125
R127
6
R122
2
R124 20
1
5
R126
FB101
+
1
C103
1-860-545- 12
B
R116
R119
C R118
R123 1-860-534-
16
1 2 3 4
R120
R127
R122
R124
R126 11
16
1 2 3
CF-097/AJ-007 4-55 4-56

DSC-F828
SW-410 BOARD(SIDE A) SW-410 BOARD(SIDE B)

S001
OPEN(FLASH)
S002 S005
A R001
A
(FLASH) (METERING MODE)
R004
S003
S006
B B
CN001
(MACRO) /BRK
(BURST/BRACKET)
1
R006
R005 R002
R003 S007
D001
C C
D002
NIGHT SHOT/
NIGHT FRAMING
S004
FOCUS 1-860-721- 12
(AUTO-MANUAL)
D D
1-860-721- 12
16
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 16
FP-748 BOARD
CN001 CN002
1 1
5 5
10 10
15 15
20 20
25 25
30 30
35 35
40 40
45
50
45
50 Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not shown.
55
60
1-860-537- 55
60 Pages from 4-59 to 4-62 are not shown.
11
4-57 4-58 SW-410/FP-748

DSC-F828
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION no mark : side A

* mark : side B
DD-204 BOARD ST-088 BOARD CF-097 BOARD AJ-007 BOARD SW-410 BOARD
* C001 D-3 L001 B-2 * C501 B-1 C101 B-3 C201 B-1 CN001 B-4
* C002 D-3 L002 B-4 C502 C-2 C102 B-3 C202 B-1
C003 D-3 L003 C-2 C503 B-2 C103 C-3 C203 B-1 D001 C-3
C004 D-3 L004 C-3 * C504 B-2 C104 A-3 C204 B-1 D002 C-3
* C005 E-3 L005 C-2 C505 C-2
C006 E-3 L006 B-2 C506 C-2 CN101 B-3 CN201 B-1 R001 A-4
C007 E-2 L007 B-3 CN103 B-2 R002 C-2
C008 C-3 * L010 C-1 * CN501 A-1 D201 B-1 R003 C-2
C009 C-3 L401 A-4 CN502 C-1 D101 A-3 D202 B-1 R004 A-4
C010 C-2 CN503 A-2 D203 B-1 R005 C-2
C011 C-3 * LF001 D-3 CN504 B-2 FB101 B-3 R006 C-3
C012 E-2 CN505 B-2 FB201 B-4
C013 C-3 * Q001 E-3 R101 A-3 FB202 B-3 S001 A-2
C014 E-2 * Q002 D-3 D501 A-2 R102 A-3 FB203 B-3 * S002 A-3
C015 C-2 * Q003 D-2 * D502 A-2 R103 A-3 FB204 B-3 * S003 B-3
C016 E-2 * Q004 D-2 D503 A-2 R104 A-3 FB205 B-3 * S004 D-3
C017 C-2 * Q006 D-1 * D504 B-2 * R105 A-3 * S005 A-2
C018 E-2 * Q007 B-4 D505 A-1 R106 A-3 J201 A-4 * S006 B-2
C019 E-1 * Q008 C-2 * D506 B-1 * R107 A-3 * S007 C-2
* C027 D-1 * Q009 C-3 * D507 B-1 * R108 A-3
* C028 D-1 * Q010 C-3 D508 C-2 * R109 B-3
* C029 B-2 * Q011 B-2 * R110 B-3
* C030 B-4 * Q012 B-3 * FB501 A-2 * R111 B-3
* C031 C-2 Q014 D-3 FB502 A-2 * R112 B-3
* C032 C-3 * Q015 B-1 * FB503 B-1 * R113 B-3
* C033 C-2 Q401 A-3 * FB504 A-1 * R114 B-3
* C034 B-3 * Q402 A-3 * FB505 A-1 R116 B-3
* C035 B-3 Q407 A-3 * R117 B-3
* C038 B-4 IC502 C-2 R118 B-3
* C039 C-1 R001 E-3 * R119 B-3
* C040 C-3 R002 E-3 * Q501 A-1 R120 B-3
* C041 C-2 * R003 C-4 Q502 C-2 * R121 B-3
* C042 B-2 R004 E-3 Q503 C-2 R122 B-3
* C043 B-3 * R005 E-3 Q504 C-2 * R123 B-3
* C044 B-2 R007 E-3 R124 B-3
* C045 B-1 * R008 C-4 * R503 B-1 * R125 B-3
C046 B-2 R009 D-3 R505 C-2 R126 B-3
C053 B-1 R010 E-3 R506 C-2 * R127 B-3
C058 B-1 R011 E-3 R507 C-2
C062 B-1 R012 D-3 * R508 A-1
* C065 C-1 R013 E-3 * R509 C-1
C066 B-2 * R014 E-3 * R510 C-1
* C067 C-2 * R016 E-3 * R511 B-2
* C068 D-2 * R017 E-1 R512 A-2
* C069 C-3 * R018 E-1 R513 C-2
* C070 B-2 * R019 D-3 R514 C-2
C401 B-4 R020 E-2
* C402 A-3 * R022 D-2
C403 A-3 * R023 D-2
C404 A-3 R024 E-2 UA-003 BOARD
C405 A-2 R025 E-2
* C406 A-3 R028 E-2 CN001 A-2
R029 E-1
* CN001 C-4 R030 E-1 D001 B-2
CN002 D-4 R031 E-1 D002 B-2
* CN401 A-3 R032 E-1 D003 B-2
CN601 C-1 R033 E-1 D004 A-2
* CN602 E-2 R034 E-1 D005 A-2
R035 E-1
* D001 D-2 R036 D-1 FB001 B-2
* D002 C-4 * R039 D-2
* D003 D-3 R040 D-1 J001 A-1
* D004 D-3 R041 C-3
D006 D-1 R042 C-3 LF001 A-3
* D007 D-2 R043 D-3
* D010 B-1 R044 D-3 R001 B-3
D011 B-1 R045 D-3 R002 B-1
D401 A-2 R046 D-3 R003 B-2
* D402 B-3 R047 D-3 R004 A-2
D403 A-2 R048 E-1 R005 A-3
R049 E-1 R006 A-2
* F001 C-3 * R050 B-1
* F002 D-2 * R401 A-3
* F003 D-2 * R402 A-3
* F004 C-3 R403 A-4
F005 D-4 R404 A-4
* F006 C-2 * R405 A-4
R406 A-2
* FB001 C-4
T401 A-3 Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board are not
IC001 D-2
* IC004 B-1 shown.
DD-204/ST-088/UA-003/CF-097/AJ-007/SW-410 4-63 4-64E

DSC-F828
NOTE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.
Link EXPLODED VIEWS
A B C
STROBOSCOPE BLOCK CABINET (FRONT) CABINET (FRONT)

OVERALL SECTION ASSEMBLY BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
CABINET (REAR)
BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY BLOCK ASSEMBLY EVF ASSEMBLY
Link ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ACCESSORIES
AJ-007 BOARD C LR-018 BOARD SW-410 BOARD A
CF-097 BOARD D LS-067 BOARD SY-096 BOARD D
DD-204 BOARD D MT-067 BOARD UA-003 BOARD
FP-748 BOARD SI-037 BOARD
LB-091 BOARD ST-088 BOARD B

DSC-F828
NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from When indicating parts by reference number,
the original one. please include the board name.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine
service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. The components identified by mark 0 or
• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
supplied. Replace only with part number specified.
• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from Les composants identifiés par une marque
the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
• CAPACITORS:
le numéro spécifié.
uF: µF
• COILS
uH: µH
• RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: metal-film resistor
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
• SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example:
uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,
uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
uPD..., µPD...
• Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model
AUS : Australian model
KR : Korea model
JE : Tourist model
J : Japanese model
5-1
DSC-F828
5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
ns : not supplied
BTH block assembly

(See page 5-7)
1
Cabinet (rear) block assembly
(See page 5-8) 6
1
1
1
1
Cabinet (front) block assembly-1
(See page 5-5)
7
8
1 1
4
1
Stroboscope block assembly
(See page 5-4) 3 ns
2
1
Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description
1 3-080-203-31 SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2 6 3-086-480-01 WINDOW, LCD
2 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER 7 3-089-846-01 RADIATION SHEET (LL)
3 A-7078-878-A SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE 8 X-3953-809-1 CABINET (LR) ASSY
4 1-860-540-11 FP-751 FLEXIBLE BOARD 9 (Note) TAPE (A)
Note :
For the part of 9: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN
(T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired
length and use it.
5-3
DSC-F828
5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY

ns : not supplied
60 76 61 54
57
54
62
54
B 58
59 C
M910
D001
(Note1) D
56 77
B
ns D
55
I
65
54 ns 64
A
I 54
C
69 54
64 66
A
74 68
53 52 54
75 F (See page 5-5) 54

G
E
CD-469 board
(Note2)
73
51
51 A-7112-735-A REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS BLOCK ASSY) 64 3-084-817-01 GRIP
52 A-7078-884-A ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE 65 A-7078-890-A MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE
53 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 66 3-086-498-01 GUIDE, STFPC
54 3-080-222-11 SCREW (M1.7), TAPPING,P2 68 3-086-495-01 COVER, STFPC
55 3-086-499-01 HOLDER, ST LASER 69 3-086-496-01 COVER, ST BLIND
56 X-3953-801-1 CABINET ASSY, ST 73 3-086-497-01 GUIDE, HARNESS

57 1-818-099-11 CONNECTOR, SHOE 74 1-860-539-11 FP-750 FLEXIBLE BOARD
58 A-7078-891-A LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE 75 1-962-610-11 HARNESS (PT-132)
59 X-3953-800-2 ST ASSY 0 76 1-478-445-11 FLASH UNIT
60 3-086-493-01 COVER, ST 77 3-080-203-31 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
61 3-086-494-01 HOLDER, ST UNIT 0 D001 1-805-470-51 LASER UNIT (Note1)

0 62 A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE M910 1-787-055-11 MOTOR, STROBOSCOPE (FLASH/MOTOR)
Note1 :
Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.
Note2 : Note3 : Note3 :

CD-469 board is included in the REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
BLOCK ASSY). CD-469 board is not supplied as a single mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
board since removing it as a single board requires Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
adjustment. specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
5-4
DSC-F828
5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1

ns : not supplied
125
123
124
Cabinet (front) block assembly-2 A
(See page 5-6)
125 110
114
111
105
ns 112
105
102
ns 113
102
102
104 109
122
A
115
103 102 108 105
117
101 105
106 118
127 119
120 126
107
E
F 110
(See page 5-4)
G
101 X-3953-808-1 CABINET (LL) ASSY 114 3-086-485-01 GUIDE (L), FLEXIBLE
102 3-080-203-31 SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2 115 3-087-125-01 GUIDE (R), FLEXIBLE
103 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER 117 1-860-541-11 FP-754 FLEXIBLE BOARD
104 3-087-127-01 SCREW 118 1-860-535-11 FP-746 FLEXIBLE BOARD
105 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 119 1-860-536-11 FP-747 FLEXIBLE BOARD
106 A-7078-885-A AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE 120 3-090-857-01 SHEET (ACC)

107 1-860-531-11 AJ-006 FLEXIBLE BOARD 122 3-089-843-01 RADIATION SHEET (LR)
108 X-3953-799-1 HINGE ASSY 123 1-400-689-11 FERRITE CORE
109 3-086-490-01 COVER, ST (ST UNDER COVER) 124 3-088-689-01 SHEET (F2) ADHESIVE
110 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2 125 (Note) TAPE (A)
111 A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE 126 1-400-687-11 FERRITE CORE

112 1-794-045-61 CONNECTOR, DC-IN 127 3-088-442-01 SHEET (F1) ADHESIVE
113 X-3953-879-2 HOLDER ASSY, JACK
Note :
length and use it.
5-5
DSC-F828
5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2

ns : not supplied
153 156
154
153
153
157
ns
MIC901
152
ns SP901 159
ns 158
153
155
155 160
ns
151
151 X-3953-802-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY 157 3-087-108-01 CUSHION, MD
152 3-087-116-01 BRACKET (FRONT), STRAP 158 1-478-227-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (TOP)
153 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 159 1-805-389-11 DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL
154 3-086-484-01 HOLDER, MICROPHONE 160 (Note) TAPE (A)
155 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2 MIC901 1-542-446-61 MICROPHONE
156 X-3953-804-2 UPPER ASSY, CABINET SP901 1-825-663-11 SPEAKER (1.6CM)
Note :
length and use it.
5-6
DSC-F828
5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY 224

ns : not supplied
210
221
209
BT901 209
C
B
212 209
220 213
ns
C
209
211 214
SY
-0
201 223 96
222
208
215
204 ns 216
217
BT001 202
ns
203 207 209
206 219
04
ns B D-2
D
C405
A
205 218
201 : BT001 (Lithium battery) LR-018 board

on the mount position. (See page 4-50)
201 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2 216 3-087-188-01 SHEET (B), CF RADIATION
202 A-7078-880-A LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE 217 A-7078-881-A FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE
203 3-086-491-01 SHEET, CF RADIATION 218 A-7078-883-A DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE
204 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY 219 3-086-487-02 LABEL,FUSE REPLACEMENT CAUTION
205 3-375-114-71 SCREW 220 3-090-807-01 SHEET (MS)
206 3-050-594-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION 221 1-500-227-21 BEAD, FERRITE

207 3-073-601-21 FOOT, RUBBER 222 1-818-138-11 CONNECTOR, CARD(COMPACT FLASH)
208 X-3953-805-2 HOLDER ASSY, BT 223 3-090-809-01 CUSHION (SY)
209 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 224 (Note1) TAPE (A)
210 1-860-538-11 FP-749 FLEXIBLE BOARD BT901 1-694-796-41 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
211 1-815-853-13 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK 0 C405 1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF 315V
212 A-7078-879-A CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE
213 3-087-187-01 RETAINER, SY CAUTION :
214 A-7079-008-A SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
215 1-860-717-11 FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD
Note2 : Note2 :
Note1 : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
For the part of 224: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
length and use it. specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
5-7
DSC-F828
5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY

ns : not supplied
EVF assembly
(See page 5-9)
257
258
A 263
255 259
251 ns
251
A
260
256
264 LCD901
ND901 261
253
252
262
ns
251 ns
251
251 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 260 3-087-153-01 COVER, JACK
252 1-478-229-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (UNDER) 261 3-087-157-01 BRACKET, STRAP
253 3-090-369-01 TAPE (F3) 262 3-051-124-01 FOOT, RUBBER
255 1-478-228-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL(MID) 263 X-3953-944-1 LID, CF ASSY (SERVICE)
256 3-086-488-01 CUSHION, LCD 264 (Note1) TAPE (A)
257 3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2 LCD901 1-805-380-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST
258 X-3953-806-2 CABINET (REAR) ASSY 0 ND901 1-478-145-11 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE
259 3-087-155-03 SHEET, ADHESIVE, LCD WINDOW
Note2 : Note2 :
Note1 : The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
For the part of 264: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN mark 0 or dotted line with mark une marque 0 sont critiques
length and use it. specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
5-8
DSC-F828
5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY

ns : not supplied
306
305 ns
LCD902
304 307
303
302 ns
301
301 A-7078-887-A LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE 305 3-059-734-01 CUSHION (1), LCD
302 3-072-214-01 GUIDE (20), LAMP 306 X-3953-807-1 EVF ASSY
303 3-072-211-01 ILLUMINATOR 307 3-950-044-01 RING, O
304 3-072-210-01 SHEET, PRISM LCD902 8-753-039-35 LCX044AK-1
5-9
DSC-F828
AJ-007 CF-097 DD-204
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

A-7078-885-A AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE R111 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
********************** R112 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R113 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
< CAPACITOR > R114 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R116 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
C201 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10.00% 50V
C204 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10.00% 50V R117 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R118 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
< CONNECTOR > R119 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R120 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
CN201 1-817-548-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 6P R121 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
< DIODE > R122 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

R123 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
D201 1-216-295-11 METAL CHIP 0 (Note) R124 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
D202 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 R125 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
D203 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 R126 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
< FERRITE BEAD > R127 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

************************************************************
FB201 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
FB202 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH A-7078-883-A DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE
FB203 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH **********************
FB204 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH (C405 is not included in this completed board)
FB205 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
< CAPACITOR >
< JACK >
J201 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC (Accesory)) C002 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V
************************************************************ C003 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
A-7078-879-A CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE C005 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10.00% 16V
**********************
< CAPACITOR > C007 1-162-964-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001PF 10% 50V
C101 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C009 1-119-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10.00% 10V
C102 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 16V C011 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
C103 1-100-662-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V
C012 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V
< CONNECTOR > C013 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10.00% 10V
CN101 1-794-505-21 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 51P C016 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V
CN103 1-818-139-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (CF CARD) 50P C018 1-162-967-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 50V
< DIODE > C019 1-162-969-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0068uF 10% 50V
C027 1-165-875-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 10V
D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 C028 1-165-875-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10% 10V
< FERRITE BEAD > C030 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
FB101 1-469-775-21 FERRITE 0uH C031 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
< RESISTOR > C033 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
R101 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C035 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V
R102 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R103 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W C038 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
R104 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0 C039 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
C041 1-137-710-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V
R107 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R109 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W C044 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10.00% 10V
R110 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W C045 1-127-861-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 16V
Note :
Resistor is mounted to the location where D201 is printed.
5-10
DSC-F828
DD-204
C058 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V L006 1-456-136-21 INDUCTOR 10uH
C062 1-131-860-91 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 10V L007 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH
C065 1-135-993-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V L010 1-414-392-41 INDUCTOR 1uH
C066 1-100-662-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V L401 1-412-027-11 INDUCTOR 2.2uH
C067 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16V
< LINE FILTER >
C068 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16V
C069 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16V LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE
C070 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20.00% 16V
C401 1-100-055-11 CERAMIC CHIP 22uF 20% 16V < TRANSISTOR >
Q001 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3)
C404 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V Q002 8-729-051-49 TRANSISTOR HAT1054R-EL
0 C405 1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF 315V Q003 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-ST-TD-E
Q004 6-550-119-01 TRANSISTOR DTC144EMT2L
C406 1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V Q006 8-729-056-00 TRANSISTOR MCH3310-TL-E
< CONNECTOR > Q007 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E

Q008 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E
CN001 1-691-550-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3P Q009 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E
CN002 1-691-550-51 PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3P Q010 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E
CN401 1-815-494-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P Q011 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E
CN601 1-778-598-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P
CN602 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P Q012 8-729-053-76 TRANSISTOR CPH5802-TL-E
Q014 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
< DIODE > Q015 6-550-560-01 TRANSISTOR LS5U17LPTL
Q401 8-729-048-50 TRANSISTOR 2SK3018-T106
D001 8-719-421-67 DIODE MA132WK-(K8).SO Q402 8-729-426-31 TRANSISTOR XP1214-TXE
D002 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
D003 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TX Q407 6-550-308-01 TRANSISTOR CPH3205-SONY-TL-E
D004 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3
D006 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 < RESISTOR >
D007 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0 R002 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0

D010 8-719-081-19 DIODE 1SS383(T5RSONY1) R005 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
D011 8-719-081-19 DIODE 1SS383(T5RSONY1) R008 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
D401 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 R009 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
0 D402 6-500-237-01 DIODE HAU160C030TP R011 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP 0
D403 8-719-048-98 DIODE RB160L-40TE25 R012 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W

R013 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W
< FUSE > R014 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W
R016 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
0 F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V R017 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W
0 F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V
0 F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V R018 1-208-930-11 METAL CHIP 62K 0.5% 1/16W
0 F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V R019 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8W
0 F005 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V R020 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R022 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
0 F006 1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V R023 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W
< FERRITE BEAD > R024 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W

R025 1-218-969-81 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
FB001 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH R028 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
R029 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W
< IC > R030 1-218-849-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 0.5% 1/16W
IC001 6-703-429-01 IC MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1 R031 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W

IC004 6-704-874-01 IC XC62KS0PXXMR R032 1-208-709-11 METAL CHIP 12K 0.5% 1/16W
R033 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W
< COIL > R034 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W
R035 1-208-713-11 METAL CHIP 18K 0.5% 1/16W
L001 1-419-881-11 INDUCTOR 47uH
L002 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH R036 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
L003 1-424-846-11 INDUCTOR 0uH R039 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W
L004 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH R040 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
L005 1-456-137-11 INDUCTOR 22uH R041 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W
R042 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W
Note : Note :
5-11
DSC-F828
DD-204 FP-748 LB-091 LR-018 LS-067 MT-067 SI-037 ST-088
R043 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W < SWITCH >
R044 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W
R048 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W S001 1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY)
R049 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W (MOTOR POSITION DETECT)
R401 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************
R402 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W 0 A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE

R403 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W *********************
R404 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W
R405 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W < DIODE >
< TRANSFORMER > D001 6-500-512-01 DIODE CL-330IRS-X-TU (Infrared ray emitter)
0 T401 1-443-157-21 TRANSFORMER, D.C.-D.C. CONVERT < COIL >

************************************************************
L001 1-456-193-11 COIL, TRIGGER
A-7078-881-A FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE ************************************************************
**********************
A-7078-884-A ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE
< CONNECTOR > **********************
CN001 1-778-598-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P < CAPACITOR >

CN002 1-778-593-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P
************************************************************ C501 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10.00% 16V
A-7078-887-A LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE C503 1-137-723-21 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 250V
********************** C504 1-100-761-21 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 250V
CN001 1-817-550-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 18P
C506 1-164-949-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 16V
< DIODE >
< CONNECTOR >
D001 6-500-375-01 DIODE NSCW455T-TC9 (BACKLIGHT)
************************************************************ CN501 1-766-352-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 22P
CN502 1-815-494-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P
A-7078-880-A LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE CN503 1-778-164-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 16P
********************** CN504 1-779-327-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
CN505 1-779-337-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P
< BATTERY >
< DIODE >
0 BT001 1-756-191-31 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
D502 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
< SWITCH > D503 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0
D504 8-719-123-76 THYRISTOR 03P4J-T1
S001 1-692-088-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET) D506 8-749-017-19 DIODE 02DZ10-TPH3
************************************************************ D507 6-500-811-01 DIODE RR255L-400TE25
A-7078-891-A LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE D508 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3

**********************
(D001 is not included in this completed board) < FERRITE BEAD >
< DIODE > FB501 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH

FB502 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
0 D001 1-805-470-51 LASER UNIT (Note1) FB503 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
D002 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0 FB504 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
D003 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0 FB505 1-469-179-21 FERRITE 0uH
D004 8-719-064-07 DIODE SML-310LTT86 (Self-timer)
< IC >
< SWITCH >
IC502 8-729-053-74 TRANSISTOR CY25AAJ-8-T13
S001 1-786-180-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (FLASH OPEN DETECT)
************************************************************
A-7078-890-A MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE

*********************** CAUTION :
< CONNECTOR > Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

Note2 : Note2 :
Note1 :
Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced. specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
5-12
DSC-F828
ST-088 SW-410 SY-096
< TRANSISTOR > SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
*******************************
Q501 6-550-237-01 TRANSISTOR 2SC5658T2LQ/R
Q502 8-729-042-58 TRANSISTOR UN9111J-(K8).SO
Q503 8-729-053-57 TRANSISTOR RN1902FE(TPLR3)
Q504 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
Electrical parts list of the SY-096 board is
< RESISTOR > not shown.
R503 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W Pages from 5-14 to 5-18 are not shown.
R505 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W
R506 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W
R507 1-216-121-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/10W
R508 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W
R509 1-220-254-11 RES-CHIP 56 5% 1/4W

R510 1-220-254-11 RES-CHIP 56 5% 1/4W
R511 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10W
R512 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W
R513 1-218-943-11 RES-CHIP 150 5% 1/16W
R514 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

************************************************************
A-7078-878-A SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE

***********************
< CONNECTOR >
< RESISTOR >
R001 1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W

R002 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W
R003 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W
R004 1-216-823-11 METAL CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W
R005 1-218-867-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/10W
< SWITCH >
S001 1-786-179-11 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (OPEN(FLASH))

S002 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH)
S003 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MACRO)
S004 1-786-179-11 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY)
(FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL))
S005 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (METERING MODE)
S006 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (BURST/BRACKET)

S007 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD
(NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FRAMING)
************************************************************
5-13
DSC-F828
UA-003
A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
< CONNECTOR >
CN001 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P)
< DIODE >
D001 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0

D002 8-719-073-03 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0
D003 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
D004 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB001 1-500-444-11 FERRITE 0uH
< JACK >
J001 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AUDIO/VIDEO)
< LINE FILTER >
LF001 1-456-583-11 INDUCTOR 0uH
< RESISTOR >
R001 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0

R002 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0
R003 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W
R004 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0
R005 1-216-295-91 SHORT CHIP 0
R006 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W

************************************************************
5-19
DSC-F828
Checking supplied accessories.

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.
Power cord (Main lead) (1) AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A) A/V connecting cable (1)
(AEP, E model) 0 1-477-533-51 1-824-111-11
0 1-769-608-11
(AUS model)
0 1-696-819-11
(UK, HK model)
0 1-783-374-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1) NP-FM50 battery pack (1)
(US, CND model) (not supplied)
0 1-790-107-22 USB cable (1)
Power cord (Main lead) (1) 1-827-038-11
(JE, J model)
Lens cap (1)
0 1-790-732-12
X-3952-016-1
(KR model)
0 1-776-985-11
Power cord (Main lead) (1) String assy cap
(CH model) X-3953-980-1
2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
0 1-782-476-13 (JE model)
1-569-007-12
CD-ROM
(SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1)
(US, CND, J model)
3-087-331-01 Lens hood (1)
CD-ROM 3-086-481-01 2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
(SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1) (E model)
(AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS, 1-569-008-12
CH model)
3-087-330-01
S-houlder strap (1)

3-071-638-11
Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A)
CD-ROM 1-543-798-21
(Image Data Converter) (1)
3-087-661-01
Other accessories
3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH)
(US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK)
3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP)
• Abbreviation
3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) CND : Canadian model
(AEP,E,JE) AUS : Australian model
3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP) CH : Chinese model
3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE) KR : Korea model
(E,CH,JE,HK) JE : Tourist model
3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP) J : Japanese model
3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E)
3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR)
Note : Note :
3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par
3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW
(ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/ Replace only with part number Ne les remplacer que par une
PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/ specified. pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)
5-20E
DSC-F828
Sony EMCS Co. 2004D1600-1

9-876-279-31 ©2004.4
— 100 — Published by DI Technical Support Section
DSC-F828
Ver 1.1 2004. 04 SECTION 6 ADJ
Revision History ADJUSTMENTS
How to use
Acrobat Reader
Link
Before starting adjustment SERVICE MODE
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)
SERVICE MODE
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
INITIALIZATION OF DATA
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEW FINDER ADJUSTMENT
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note: Be sure to carry out “Data Save”.
Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual

CONTENTS LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3
1. SERVICE NOTE a ✕
2. DISASSEMBLY a ✕
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS OVERALL ✕
POWER
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND DD-204, LR-018, ST-088, SY-096 BOARD
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LS-067, MT-067, SI-037,
UA-003, LB-091, CF-097,
SW-410, AJ-007 BOARD
(TOP)/(MID)/(UNDER)
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST EXPLODED VIEWS ✕
ELECTRICAL PARTS a (SY-096 BOARD)
2004D1600-1
©2004.4
9-876-279-52 Sony EMCS Co. Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
DSC-F828
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. ADJUSTMENT 1-6. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 6-35
1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 6-1 1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments ············· 6-35
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ···· 6-2 2. LCD Initial Data Input ·················································· 6-35
3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-36
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 6-3 4. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-36
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ················· 6-3 5. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-37
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 6-3 6. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-37
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 6-4
1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply ····················· 6-4 6-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-38
1-1-4. Precaution ········································································ 6-6 2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) ············ 6-38
1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 6-6 2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS ················································· 6-38
2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 6-6 1. Connection ····································································· 6-38
3. Subjects ··········································································· 6-6 2. Operation ······································································· 6-38
4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ······························· 6-7 2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS ··········································· 6-38
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-8 2-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-39
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-8 1. Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 6-39
1. Initializing All Pages Data ··············································· 6-8 2. Bit value discrimination ················································ 6-39
2. Initializing Single Page Data ··········································· 6-8 3. Switch check (1) ···························································· 6-40
3. 2F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-8 4. Switch check (2) ···························································· 6-40
4. 4F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-8 5. Switch check (3) ···························································· 6-40
5. 6E Page Adjustment Address ·········································· 6-9 6. Switch check (4) ···························································· 6-41
6. 6F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-10 7. Switch check (5) ···························································· 6-41
7. 8E Page Adjustment Address ········································ 6-11 8. Switch check (6) ···························································· 6-41
8. 8F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-11 9. LED, Segment LCD check ············································ 6-41
10. Record of Use check ······················································ 6-42
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 6-12 11. Self Diagnostics Log check ··········································· 6-42
1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·········· 6-12
* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-43.
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 6-13 * AF illumination frame is shown on page 6-44.
1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments ········ 6-13
2. IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment ······································ 6-13
3. Flange Back Adjustment ··············································· 6-14
4. Flange Back Check ························································ 6-14
5. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450) ·································· 6-15
6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450) ································ 6-16
7. Color Shade Check ························································ 6-17
8. F No. Compensation ······················································ 6-18
9. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 6-18
10. Light Value Adjustment ················································· 6-19
11. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment ····························· 6-20
12. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode) ········· 6-22
13. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode) ·············· 6-23
14. CCD Linearity Check ···················································· 6-24
15. CCD White Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-26
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-27
17. Strobe Adjustment ························································· 6-28
18. AF Laser Output Adjustment ········································ 6-29
19. AF Laser Axis Check ···················································· 6-30
1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER

ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 6-31
1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments ············· 6-31
2. EVF Initial Data Input ··················································· 6-31
3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-32
4. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································ 6-32
5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-33
6. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-33
7. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-34
—2—
DSC-F828
SECTION 6
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board
is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) (Machine after a board is replaced)
PC PC
Save the EVR data Download the saved

to a personal computer. data to a machine.
Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board) (New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the

respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)
6-1
DSC-F828
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Replaced parts Board EEPROM
Block replacement Mounted Parts replacement replacement replacement
SY-096 board IC801 (LCD DRIVER)

LB-091 board D001 (EVF back light)
SY-096 board IC902 (EVF DRIVER)

SY-096 board IC301 (Camera DSP)
SY-096 board IC501 (Camera DSP)

Adjustment Adjustment
SY-096 board IC303 (Video amp.)

LCD block LCD unit (LCD901)
LS-067 board D001 (Laser unit)

EVF block LCD unit (LCD902)
Section
LB-091 board (COMPLETE)

LS-067 board (COMPLETE)
SY-096 board (COMPLETE)
(With built-in flash memory)

LCD block Back light unit
Lens device
Xenon tube
Initialization of data Initialization of data z z

Video Video output level adj. z z z z
Iris reset sensor adj. z z z
Flange back adj. z z z
Color shade check z z z
F No. compensation z z z
Mechanical shutter adj. z z z
Light value adj. z z z
Camera Linear matrix and AWB adj. z z z
Color reproduction check z z z
CCD linearity check z z z
CCD white defect compensation check z z z
CCD black defect compensation check z z z
Strobe adj. z z z z
AF laser output adj. z z z z z
EVF initial data input z z
VCO adj. z z z
Bright adj. z z z
EVF
Contrast adj. z z z z
V COM adj. z z z
White balance adj. z z z z z z
LCD initial data input z z
VCO adj. z z z
LCD Contrast adj. z z z z
V COM adj. z z z z
White balance adj. z z z z z
Table. 6-1-1.
6-2
DSC-F828
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
1-1-1. List of Service Tools

• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope • AC power adapter
• Calculator which can hexadecimal calculation
J-1 J-2 J-3

Clear chart for
Pattern box PTB-1450 pattern box 9 colors chart for
J-6082-557-A pattern box
or For PTB-1450:
Pattern box PTB-450 J-6020-560-A For PTB-1450:
J-6082-200-A For PTB-450: J-6020-562-A
J-6080-621-A
J-4 J-5 J-6

Color chart for
pattern box
For PTB-1450: Siemens star chart Mini pattern box

J-6020-559-A J-6080-875-A J-6082-353-B
For PTB-450:
J-6020-250-A
J-7 J-8 J-9
Personal computer
with Widows98/
98SE/ME/2000/ USB cable
Camera table XP installed
J-6082-384-A 1-823-932-11
and with two USB
ports
J-10 J-11 J-12

Application for
adjustment F828 C1 MATRIX
(SEUS) Background paper
Adjustment J-2501-130-A
and HASP key (Note)
(Note)
Note: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the application
for adjustment (SEUS), HASP key and F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment.
Fig. 6-1-1.
6-3
DSC-F828
1-1-2. Preparations
Pattern box
1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-4.
2) Set the MS/CF switch to MS (Memory stick).
3) Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS).
About 6cm (PTB-1450)
Note1: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)” About 20cm (PTB-450)
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 11.
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
The above procedure will enable the power (STILL mode) to
be turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP))
disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the
“Forced Power ON Mode”.
Front of the lens
Note2: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)”
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
The above procedure will enable the power (PALY mode) to be
turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP))
disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the
“Forced Power ON Mode”. Fig. 6-1-2.
Note3: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode”

3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply

The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged
with 200V to 300V voltage. When disassembling the unit, discharge
this voltage in order to protect service engineers from electric shock.
Discharge procedure
1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery).
2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 6-1-3. locally by
yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allow
ten seconds to discharge the voltage.
Short jig
(1kΩ /1W)
04
-2
DD
DD-204 board
Fig. 6-1-3.
6-4
DSC-F828
[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]
Personal computer
(with two USB ports)
HASP key USB2
USB1
USB
DC IN
AC power
AC IN
adaptor
Memory stick
Fig. 6-1-4.
6-5
DSC-F828
1-1-4. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform
adjustments.
Switch settings 6. EV .................................................................................... 0EV

1. Mode dial ............................................. STILL (P AUTO) (P) 7. FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO
2. ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end 8. USB CONNECT (SET UP setting) ....................... NORMAL
3. MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick) 9. VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC
4. MACRO ( ) .................................................................. ON
5. WHITE BALANCE ..................................................... AUTO
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450)

H
Yellow
Magenta
White
Cyan
Green
C C=D D
Red
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
White
Cyan
Blue
Red
Picture frame
V
A B A Fig. b LCD screen or under scan
A= B Enlargement monitor TV picture
2
Fig. a
Video terminal
output waveform Difference in level
Adjust the camera position and direction to

obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
A and the LCD screen or the monitor TV
display shown in Fig. b.
9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450)
A B A
A=B
C
B
C=
Green Yellow W14 3
C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment

Cyan White Red B
C14 Blue Magenta
C
Adjust the camera position and direction to
A
obtain the LCD screen or the monitor TV
Effective picture frame 2 Transparent window
display shown in Fig. c.
Fig. c LCD screen or under scan
monitor TV picture
Fig.6-1-5.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450) 3) Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust (PTB-450/PTB-1450)
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture Remove the color bar chart (PTB-450) or 9 colors chart (PTB-
frame) 1450) from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place.
2) 9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450) (Do not perform zoom operations during this time.)
When performing adjustments using the 9 colors chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture
frame)
6-6
DSC-F828
4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box

A dark room is required to provide an accurate strobe adjustment.
If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below;
1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.
woody board A (2 sheets) woody board B (2 sheets) woody board C (1 sheet)
400 mm 370 mm 700 mm
513 mm 513 mm 700 mm
730 mm 700 mm
Fig. 6-1-6.
2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.

3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.
4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side
of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-7.)
woody board A
woody board B
woody board A
woody board B
woody board C
Fig. 6-1-7.
6-7
DSC-F828
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF DATA 2. Initializing Single Page Data

By performing the following procedure, data of the page that you
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF DATA want to initialize will be initialized.
1. Initializing All Pages Data Initializing Method:

By performing the following procedure, data of all the pages will 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.
be initialized. 2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
SECTOR WRITE screen.
Initializing Method: 3) Check that the SET ID is “03”.
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 4) Click [All] of the option buttons of the target page. (Fig. 6-1-8. B)
2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS 5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of
SECTOR WRITE screen. the camera.
3) Check that the SET ID is “03”. 6) Wait for 2 sec.
4) Click [All] of the ALL SELECT buttons to select all pages. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.
(Fig. 6-1-8. A)
5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of Note: When 4F page or 8E page is initialized, perform “Modification of
the camera. 4F, 8E Page Data”. (Refer to “1. Initializing All Pages Data”.)
6) Wait for 2 sec.
7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. Processing after Completing Initializing of data
Order Page Address Data Procedure
Modification of 4F, 8E Page Data 1 20 00 29 Set the data.
If all page data have been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed 2 20 01 29 Set the data.
data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.
3 Check “Receive Paket Error” is
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. displayed on the SEUS screen.
2) Click [Page] on the SEUS screen, and input “4F” or “8E”. 4 Turn on the power of the camera.
3) Click [Address], and input the “Fixed data-2” address. 5 Click [Connect] on the SEUS
4) Click [Set], and input the new data. screen.
Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because they
are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the B
data built in the same model. If copy the data built in the different
model, the camera may not operate.
5) Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all data of the “Fixed data-2” addresses
are changed.
6) Click [Save] to write the changed data to the EEPROM of the
camera.
7) Wait for 2 sec.
Processing after Completing Initializing of data

1 20 00 29 Set the data.
3 Check “Receive Paket Error” is
displayed on the SEUS screen.
4 Turn on the power of the camera.
5 Click [Connect] on the SEUS A Fig. 6-1-8.
screen. 3. 2F Page Adjustment Address
Address Remark
Initial value
23 80 Test mode
Table. 6-1-2.
4. 4F Page Adjustment Address
Address Remark
Initial value
46 Fixed data-2
47 Fixed data-2
88 Fixed data-2
94 00 Recording counter
95 00 (Refer to “Record of Use check”
96 00 of “SERVICE MODE”(Page 6-42).)
97 00
A1 Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-3.
6-8
DSC-F828
5. 6E Page Adjustment Address

Address Remark
Initial value
Address Remark
Initial value 3C 00 AWB 3200K/5800K standard data
04 1D AWB 3200K/5800K standard data 3D 00 input
05 00 input 3E 00
06 07 3F 00
07 00 40 00
08 1B 41 00
09 00 42 00
0A 08 43 00
0B 00 44 00
0C 1D 45 00
0D 00 46 00
0E 07 47 00
0F 00 48 00
10 1B 49 00
11 00 72 0C Strobe adj.
12 08 73 00
13 00 74 10
14 1C 75 00
15 00 80 10 Linear matrix adj.
16 07 81 00
17 00 82 00
18 1B 83 00
19 00 84 00
1A 08 85 00
1B 00 86 00
1C 00 87 00
1D 00 88 00
1E 00 89 00
1F 00 8A 10
20 00 8B 00
21 00 8C 00
24 0E 8D 00
25 00 8E 00
26 0E 8F 00
27 00 90 00
28 0D 91 00
29 00 92 00
2A 0F 93 00
2B 00 94 10
2C 0E 95 00
2D 00 96 00
2E 0E 97 00
2F 00 98 00
30 0D 99 00
31 00 9A 00
32 0F 9B 00
33 00 9C 00
34 0E 9D 00
35 00 9E 10
36 0E 9F 00
37 00 Table. 6-1-4.
38 0D
39 00
3A 0F
3B 00
6-9
DSC-F828

Address Remark
Initial value
Address Remark
Initial value 46 46 Flange back adj.
06 40 Color shade check 47 47
07 00 48 48
10 40 AF laser output adj. 49 49
11 FF 4A 4A
12 FF 4B 4B
13 FF 4C 4C
14 00 4D 4D
15 3A 4E 4E
16 FF 4F 4F
18 00 Flange back adj. 50 50
19 00 51 51
1A 00 52 00
1B 00 53 00
1C 17 54 00 Auto focus illumination adj
1D 80 5E E0 IRIS reset sensor adj.
1E 00 5F 80
1F 00 60 00 F No. compensation
20 19 61 00
21 00 62 00
22 00 63 00
23 00 64 00
24 26 65 30 Light value adj.
25 26 66 FE
26 82 67 6D
27 08 6B FF F No. compensation/
28 03 6C 00 Mechanical shutter adj.
29 00 6D 00
2A 00 B8 09 Mechanical shutter adj.
2B 00 B9 AC
2C 00 BA 09
2D 00 BB B4
2E 00 BC 09
2F 00 BD BD
30 00 BE 09
31 00 BF A2
32 00 C0 09
33 00 C1 C3
34 00 C2 00
35 00 C3 00
36 00 C4 00
37 00 C5 00
38 00 C6 00
39 00 C7 37
3A 00 C8 2E
3B 00 C9 21
3C 00 CA 15
3D 00 CB 15
3E FF CC 80
40 40 Flange back adj. CD 88
41 41 CE 98
42 42 CF 90
43 43 D0 88
44 44 D1 00
45 45 D2 00
6-10
DSC-F828
6F page
Address Remark
Initial value
D3 00 Mechanical shutter adj.
D4 00
D5 00
D6 00
D7 14
D8 FF Strobe adj.
D9 FF
DA FF
DB 00
DC 00
DD 00
DE 00
DF 00
E0 00
E1 00
E2 00
E3 00
E4 00
E5 00
E6 00
E7 00
E8 00
E9 00
EA 00
EB 00
EC 00
ED 00
EE 00
EF 00
Table. 6-1-5.
7. 8E Page Adjustment Address
Address Remark
Initial value
C8 Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-6.
Address Remark
Initial value
23 80 VCO adj. (LCD)
24 76 V COM adj. (LCD)
28 90 White balance adj. (LCD)
2A 80
2C 72 Contrast adj. (LCD)
73 80 VCO adj. (EVF)
74 A4 V COM adj. (EVF)
75 8D Bright adj. (EVF)
78 90 White balance adj. (EVF)
7A 80
7C 38 Contrast adj. (EVF)
D0 80 Video output level adj.
Table. 6-1-7.
6-11
DSC-F828
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output.

Mode PLAY ( )
Signal No signal
Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack
(75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope
Adjustment Page 8F
Adjustment Address D0
Specified Value Sync level:
A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode)
A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode)
Burst level:
B=286 ± 30mV (NTSC mode)
B=300 ± 30mV (PAL mode)
Switch setting:
VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ......................................... (NTSC mode)
............................................ (PAL mode)
Adjusting method:
2 60 C1 Read the data, and check it is “01”.
4 8F D0 Change the data and set the sync
level (A) to the specified value.
5 Check that the burst level (B)
satisfies the specified value.
6 80 70 00 Write the data.
7 Save the data.
8 Wait for 2 sec.
Fig. 6-1-9.
6-12
DSC-F828
1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment

Measuring the iris reset sensor output voltage, and compensate the
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the dispersion of the reset position detecting voltage.
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)
satisfied. Subject Clear chart
1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: 5E, 6B
Measuring Instrument
Perform the following data setting before the camera system Adjustment Page 6F
adjustments. Adjustment Address 5E, 5F
Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.
So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off. Specified Value1 00
Order Page Address Data Procedure Specified Value2 80 to FF
Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
2 4F B7 01 Set the data. 01, and set data: 00.
3 2F 23 11 Set the data.
4 60 C1 Read the data, and check it is “02”. Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
6 60 6C 01 Set the data. Adjusting method:
7 60 2C 01 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
8 4F B9 Set Bit 0 of the data to “1”. 1 Check that “1. Data Setting
(Note2) during Camera System
9 7F 0E 20 Set the data. Adjustments” is performed.
10 7F 6A 20 Set the data. 2 Check the ZOOM is WIDE end.
11 Save the data. 3 60 01 6F Set the data.
12 Wait for 2 sec. 4 Wait for 5 sec.
5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is
Note2: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2-2. Bit “01”. (Note2)
value discrimination”.
6 Wait for 2 sec.
After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data 7 6F 6B Read the data, and check it
setting. satisfies the specified value 1.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 8 6F 5E Read the data, and check it
1 00 01 01 Set the data. satisfies the specified value 2.
2 4F B7 00 Set the data. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,
3 4F B9 Set Bit 0 of the data to “0”. address: 5E, 5F.
(Note2)
4 2F 23 80 Set the data. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
5 Save the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
6 Wait for 2 sec. 1 60 01 00 Set the data.
7 00 01 00 Set the data. 2 Turn off the power and back on.
3 Perform “Flange Back Adjustment”.
4 If finish the camera system
adjustments, release the data
setting.
(See “1. Data Setting during
Camera System Adjustments”.)
6-13
DSC-F828
3. Flange Back Adjustment 4. Flange Back Check

To adjust the flange back, compensate the dispersion of the zoom
position A/D value at WIDE end and TELE end. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Siemens star
Subject Arbitrary (1.0m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 24, 25, 3E (Luminance : 200 to 400 lux)
Measuring Instrument Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor
Adjustment Page 6F Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Address 18 to 3E, 40 to 53 Specified Value1 The lens is focused.
Specified value1 00 Specified Value2 Below 8% of diagonal length of the
TV monitor (Note)
Specified value2 0A to 40
Note: Below 40mm when a 21 inches TV monitor is used.
01, and set data: 00.
Switch setting:
Adjusting method: FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO
Order Page Address Data Procedure Checking method:
1 Check that “1. Data Setting Order Page Address Data Procedure
during Camera System
Adjustments” is performed. 1 Check that “1. Data Setting
2 60 00 37 Set the data. Adjustments” is performed.
3 60 01 37 Set the data. 2 Place the siemens star 1.0m
4 Wait for 4 sec. from the front of the lens.
5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is “01”. 3 60 2C 00 Set the data.
6 Wait for 2 sec. 4 60 8C 30 Set the data.
7 60 00 00 Set the data. 5 Shoot the Siemens star with the
8 60 01 00 Set the data. zoom TELE end (200).
9 Set the ZOOM to the WIDE end. 6 Check that center of the Siemens
10 60 01 13 Set the data. star is located in the center of
the TV monitor screen.
11 Wait for 1 sec.
7 Check that the lens is focused.
12 60 01 B1 Set the data.
8 60 2C 01 Set the data.
13 Wait for 1 sec.
9 For each of the zoom positions
14 60 02 Read the data, and check it is 135, 100, 70, 50 and 35, check
“01”. (Note2) that the lens is focused.
15 Set the ZOOM to the TELE end. 10 Shoot the Siemens star with the
16 60 01 13 Set the data. zoom WIDE end (28).
17 Wait for 1 sec. 11 Check that the lens is focused.
18 60 01 B3 Set the data. 12 Check that distance between the
19 Wait for 1 sec. center of the Siemens star and
20 60 02 Read the data, and check it is the center of the TV monitor
“01”. (Note2) screen satisfies the specified
value2.
22 Wait for 2 sec. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
23 6F 3E Read the data, and check it Order Page Address Data Procedure
satisfies the specified value 1. 1 60 8C 00 Set the data.
24 6F 24 Read the data, and check it 2 If finish the camera system
satisfies the specified value 2. adjustments, release the data
25 6F 25 Read the data, and check it setting.
satisfies the specified value 2. (See “1. Data Setting during
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, Camera System Adjustments”.)
address: 18 to 3E, 40 to 53
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1 Perform “Flange Back Check”.
setting.
6-14
DSC-F828
5. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450) Check on an oscilloscope
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) 1. Horizontal period

Subject Color bar chart and clear chart B
(Standard picture frame) A=C=
2
About 20cm from the front of the lens A C
Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack B
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=C=B/2, E=F
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Setting method:
1 Check that “1. Data Setting
Adjustments” is performed.
2 Shoot the color bar chart with
the zoom WIDE end.
3 Adjust the direction and distance
between the pattern box and
camera, and set the picture
frame to the specified position. Fig. 6-1-10.
4 Adjust the focus.
2. Vertical period
5 Remove the color bar chart and
set the clear chart. E E=F F
6 Check that the whole of the
screen is white. If not, adjust the
direction and distance slightly.
7 10 44 Read the data, and this data
named YH. V
Fig. 6-1-11.
named YL.
9 Perform the following Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
adjustments.
A B C
How to reset the focus when it deviated:
If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the following
method.
4 60 92 YL Set the data. (Note)
Color bar chart picture frame Effective picture frame
5 60 93 YH Set the data. (Note)
Fig. 6-1-12.
7 Wait until the movement of the
lens stops.
8 60 07 Read the data, and check it is “01”.
Note: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.
6-15
DSC-F828
6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450) Check on an oscilloscope
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) 1. Horizontal period

Subject 9 colors chart and clear chart A=B
(Standard picture frame) (Note1)
About 6cm from the front of the lens A B A
Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack
Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor
Specified Value A=B, C=B/3
Note1: Check that the transparent window is in the lower right.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Setting method:
2 Shoot the 9 colors chart with
the zoom WIDE end. Fig. 6-1-13.
3 Adjust the direction and distance
between the pattern box and 2. Vertical period
camera, and set the picture
frame to the specified position. C B C
4 Adjust the focus.
B
5 Remove the 9 colors chart and C=
3
set the clear chart.
6 Check that the whole of the V
screen is white. If not, adjust the
direction and distance slightly. Fig. 6-1-14.
named YH. Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
8 10 45 Read the data, and this data on the LCD screen
named YL.
B
9 Perform the following A=B C=
3
adjustments.
C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment
How to reset the focus when it deviated:
If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the following A B A
method.
Order Page Address Data Procedure C
during Camera System Green Yellow W14
3 60 91 00 Set the data. Cyan White Red B
4 60 92 YL Set the data. (Note2)
5 60 93 YH Set the data. (Note2)
C14 Blue Magenta
7 Wait until the movement of the C
lens stops.
A
2
9 60 01 00 Set the data. Effective picture frame
Transparent window
Note2: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.
Fig. 6-1-15.
6-16
DSC-F828
7. Color Shade Check 7-2. Color Shade Check

Compensate the color shade.
7-1. Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” Mode STILL (P AUTO) ( P )
Install the adjustment software “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” in the
Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450)
PC.
(Standard picture frame)
System requirements of the PC:
About 6cm from the front of the lens
OS : Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XP
RAM : Recommend 256MB or higher Adjustment Page 6F
USB : USB2.0 or USB1.1 (USB2.0 is recommended. Two USB Adjustment Address 06, 07
connectors are required.)
Note1: Check that there are no reflections on the clear chart.
Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”:
1) Extract “828matrix.zip” file and obtain “Setup.exe” file. Switch setting:
2) Start up the “Setup.exe” and install the “F828 C1 MATRIX ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
ADJ”.
Note1: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the Adjusting method:
“828matrix.zip” file. 1) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System
Note2: For “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” adjustment software’s operating, Adjustments” is performed.
the following two conditions need to be satisfied. 2) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.
• The application for adjustment (SEUS) is already installed in
3) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.
the PC.
• The PC is equipped with the HASP key. If the connection is normal, the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment
screen will be as shown in bellow, indicating the “connected”
state
4) Check that the picture frame is the standard picture frame.
5) Click [Color Shading Adjustment] on the F828 C1 MATRIX
Adjustment screen.
Fig. 6-1-16.
6) Color shading adjustment is performed automatically.
Fig. 6-1-17.
7) When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed.
Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-18.
8) If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting.
(See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)
6-17
DSC-F828
8. F No. Compensation 9. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment

Adjusted the dispersion of the iris to every to every F number, and Adjust the dispersion of the opening/closing time and the closing
compensate the exposure. loss rate of the mechanical shutter. and compensate the exposure.
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450)
(Standard picture frame) (Standard picture frame)
Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 6B Measurement Point Data of page: 6F, address: 6B
Measuring Instrument Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page 6F Adjustment Page 6F
Adjustment Address 60 to 64, 6B to 6D Adjustment Address 6B to 6D, B8 to D7
Specified value 00 Specified value 00
Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
01, and set data: 00. 01, and set data: 00.
Switch setting: Switch setting:

ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
1 Check that “1. Data Setting 1 Check that “1. Data Setting
during Camera System during Camera System
Adjustments” is performed. Adjustments” is performed.
2 Check the picture frame. If 2 Check the picture frame. If
deviated, perform “5. or 6. deviated, perform “5. or 6.
Picture Frame Setting”. Picture Frame Setting”.
3 60 01 BB Set the data. 3 60 01 AD Set the data.
4 Wait for 15 sec. 4 Wait until the movement of the
5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is shutter stops.
“01”. (Note2) 5 60 02 Read the data, and check it is
6 6F 6B Read the data, and check it “01”. (Note2)
satisfies the specified value. 6 6F 6B Read the data, and check it
satisfies the specified value.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,
address: 60 to 64, 6B to 6D. Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,
address: 6B to 6D, B8 to D7.
Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments:
1 60 01 00 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
2 If finish the camera system 1 60 01 00 Set the data.
adjustments, release the data 2 If finish the camera system
setting. adjustments, release the data
(See “1. Data Setting during setting.
Camera System Adjustments”.) (See “1. Data Setting during
6-18
DSC-F828
10. Light Value Adjustment

Adjust the standard LV value.
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450)
Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 0C, 0D
Measuring Instrument Data of page: 6F, address: 65
Adjustment Page 6F
Adjustment Address 65 to 67
Specified value1 0FE0 to 1020
Specified value2 40 to 60
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
2 Check the picture frame. If
deviated, perform “5. or 6.
Picture Frame Setting”.
3 60 01 0D Set the data.
4 Wait for 2 sec.
“01”. (Note2)
6 10 0C Read the data, and this data is
named D0C.
7 10 0D Read the data, and this data is
named D0D.
8 Calculate DLV using the
following equation
(Hexadecimal calculation)
DLV = D0C × 100 + D0D
10 Check that DLV satisfies the
specified value1.
11 6F 65 Read the data, and check it
satisfies the specified value2.

address: 65 to 67.

setting.
6-19
DSC-F828
11. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment 9) Acquisition of the reference data is performed automatically.
Note3: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the
11-1. Preparation (Get Reference Data) picture frame, and repeat from step 8).
In this work, acquire a reference data for the liner matrix adjustment
using a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally. And saves the
data in the inside of the PC. Therefore, if the same pattern box
and the same 9 colors chart are used, it is not necessary to
perform “Get Reference Data” again. The reference data
(GodRawData.CSV) is saved in the ProgramFiles\Sony\
F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive.
Subject 9 colors chart (PTB-1450)
Note1: When the reference data is acquired using a non-adjusted camera. Fig. 6-1-20.
The linear matrix adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
10) When the “Completion of get reference data” message is
Switch setting:
displayed. Click the [OK] button.
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
MACRO ............................................................................ ON
FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL
Adjusting method:
1) Prepare a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally, and this
Fig. 6-1-21.
camera is named a reference camera.
2) Remove the camera under adjustment and installed the
11) Remove the reference camera and installed the camera under
reference camera instead.
adjustment instead.
3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned.
4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer
to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”.
5) Adjust the focus..
6) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.
8) Click [Get Reference Data] of the file menu of the F828 C1
MATRIX Adjustment screen.
Note2: When the “File over write” message is displayed, a reference data
file (GodRawData.CSV) exists already in the Program Files\Sony\
F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive. If you want to save this
file, rename it or move it to other holder.
Fig. 6-1-19.
6-20
DSC-F828
11-2. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment 9) The following adjustments are performed automatically.
This adjustment does the following adjustment items automatically. Linear matrix adjustment
Linear matrix adjustment AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data input
Compensate the dispersion of the linear matrix vale of the AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input
CCD imager. Note: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the picture
AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data input frame, and repeat from step 7).
Acquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800K When the “File C:\ProgramFiles\Sony\F828C1MATRIX\
in monitoring mode. GodRawData.CSV can not be open” message is displayed, the
AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input reference data file (GodRawData.CSV) for the liner matrix
Acquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800K adjustment is not in the inside of the PC. Therefore, perform “11-1.
in capture mode. Preparation (Get Reference Data)”.
Adjustment Page 6E
Adjustment Address 80 to 9F (Linear matrix adjustment)
04 to 21, 24 to 49 (AWB 3200K/
5800K standard data input)
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
1) Install the camera for adjustment. Fig. 6-1-23.
2) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”
is performed.
3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned.
4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer
to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”.
5) Adjust the focus..
6) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.
8) Click [Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment] on the F828 C1
MATRIX Adjustment screen.
Fig. 6-1-24.
10) When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed.

Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-22.
Fig. 6-1-25.
11) If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting.
(See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)
6-21
DSC-F828
12. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode)

Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so that
proper color reproduction is produced.
For CAP-Normal mode
Color bar chart (PTB-450)
Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope
Specified Value Each center of six color luminance
points should settle within each color
reproduction frame.
Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC
Burst position
Adjusting method:
Fig. 6-1-26.
3 7A 18 Read the data, and memorize it.
4 7A 18 00 Set the data.
6 60 01 AB Set the data.
7 Wait for 1 sec.
8 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of
the vectorscope so that the burst
luminance point is set at the
specified position.
9 Check that each center of six
color luminance points is set in
each color reproduction frame.

2 7A 18 Set the data memorized at
“Adjusting method”.
3 Wait for 1 sec.
5 Perform “Color Reproduction
Check”.
If finish the camera system
setting.
6-22
DSC-F828
13. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode)

Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so that
proper color reproduction is produced.
For CAP-Real mode
Color bar chart (PTB-450)
Measuring Instrument NTSC vectorscope
Specified Value Each center of six color luminance
points should settle within each color
reproduction frame.
Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC Burst position
Adjusting method:
Fig. 6-1-27.
4 7A 24 Read the data, and memorize it.
5 7A 24 00 Set the data.
7 60 01 AB Set the data.
8 Wait for 1 sec.
9 Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of
the vectorscope so that the burst
luminance point is set at the
specified position.
10 Check that each center of six
color luminance points is set in
each color reproduction frame.

2 7A 24 Set the data memorized at
4 Wait for 1 sec.
6 Perform the next adjustment.
If finish the camera system
setting.
6-23
DSC-F828
14. CCD Linearity Check Checking method:

Data picking is done to keep output linearity of the CCD imager, Order Page Address Data Procedure
even if the input level of CCD imager changes.
1 Perform “Preparation” before
Mode STILL(P AUTO) (P) this adjustment.
Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) 2 60 01 F9 Set the data.
3 Wait for 2 sec.
Measurement Point Data of page: 10, address: 80, 81, 82, 83
4 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”.
5 10 80 Read the data, and this data is
Specified value1 97 to 103 (Note1) named D80.
Specified value2 94 to 106 (Note1) 6 10 81 Read the data, and this data is
Specified value3 92 to 108 (Note1) named D81.
Specified value4 97 to 104 (Note1) 7 Calculate DRG0 using the
Specified value5 94 to 109 (Note1) following equation
Specified value6 92 to 112 (Note1)
DRG0 = D80 × 100 + D81
Note1: Decimal number. 8 10 82 Read the data, and this data is
Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: named D82.
01, and set data: 00. 9 10 83 Read the data, and this data is
Note3: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2. 2. Bit
named D83.
value discrimination”.
10 Calculate DBG0 using the
Switch setting: following equation
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end (Hexadecimal calculation)
DBG0 = D82 × 100 + D83
Preparation: 11 60 01 00 Set the data.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 12 60 E1 00 Set the data.
1 Install the clear chart. 13 77 72 48 Set the data.
2 Check that “1. Data Setting 14 Wait for 2 sec.
during Camera System 15 60 01 F9 Set the data.
16 Wait for 2 sec.
17 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”.
Picture Frame Setting”. 18 10 80 Read the data, and this data is
named D80.
4 75 09 Read the data, and memorize it.
named D81.
6 77 F6 Read the data, and memorize it.
20 Calculate DRG1 using the
7 77 F6 Set Bit2 of the data to “0”. (Note3) following equation
8 77 F7 Read the data, and memorize it. (Hexadecimal calculation)
9 77 F7 Set Bit6 of the data to “1”. (Note3) DRG1 = D80 × 100 + D81
10 77 F2 Read the data, and memorize it. 21 10 82 Read the data, and this data is
named D82.
11 77 F2 Set Bit6 of the data to “0”. (Note3)
12 77 F2 Set Bit0 of the data to “0”. (Note3)
named D83.
13 77 72 Read the data, and memorize it.
14 60 14 90 Set the data. following equation
15 60 12 9F Set the data. (Hexadecimal calculation)
16 75 17 Read the data, and memorize it. DBG1 = D82 × 100 + D83
17 75 17 AA Set the data. 24 60 01 00 Set the data.
18 75 18 Read the data, and memorize it. 25 60 E1 00 Set the data.
19 75 18 00 Set the data. 26 77 72 0C Set the data.
20 75 19 Read the data, and memorize it. 27 Wait for 2 sec.
21 75 19 E8 Set the data. 28 60 01 F9 Set the data.
22 75 1A Read the data, and memorize it. 29 Wait for 2 sec.
23 75 1A 54 Set the data. 30 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”.
24 75 1B Read the data, and memorize it. 31 10 80 Read the data, and this data is
named D80.
25 75 1B 74 Set the data.
26 Wait for 2 sec.
named D81.
6-24
DSC-F828
Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure
33 Calculate DRG2 using the Linearity check of low
following equation luminance
(Hexadecimal calculation) 55 Check that R/G ratio (2) satisfies
DRG2 = D80 × 100 + D81 the specified value 2. (Decimal
34 10 82 Read the data, and this data is number)
named D82. 56 Check that B/G ratio (2) satisfies
35 10 83 Read the data, and this data is the specified value 5. (Decimal
named D83. number)
36 Calculate DBG2 using the Linearity check of very low
following equation luminance
(Hexadecimal calculation) 57 Check that R/G ratio (3) satisfies
DBG2 = D82 × 100 + D83 the specified value 3. (Decimal
37 60 01 00 Set the data. number)
38 60 E1 00 Set the data. 58 Check that B/G ratio (3) satisfies
39 60 12 A2 Set the data. the specified value 6. (Decimal
number)
41 Wait for 2 sec. Processing after Completing Adjustments:
42 60 01 F9 Set the data. Order Page Address Data Procedure
44 60 E1 Read the data, and check it is “08”. 2 60 E1 00 Set the data.
45 10 80 Read the data, and this data is 3 60 12 00 Set the data.
named D80.
5 75 09 Set the data memorized at
named D81.
“Preparation”.
47 Calculate DRG3 using the
6 77 F6 Set the data memorized at
following equation
“Preparation”.
DRG3 = D80 × 100 + D81 7 77 F7 Set the data memorized at
“Preparation”.
named D82. 8 77 F2 Set the data memorized at
“Preparation”.
named D83. 9 77 72 Set the data memorized at
“Preparation”.
following equation 10 75 17 Set the data memorized at
(Hexadecimal calculation) “Preparation”.
DBG3 = D82 × 100 + D83 11 75 18 Set the data memorized at
51 Convert DRG0, DBG0, DRG1, DBG1, “Preparation”.
DRG2, DBG2, DRG3 and DBG3 to 12 75 19 Set the data memorized at
decimal number, and obtain “Preparation”.
DRG0’, DBG0’, DRG1’, DBG1’, 13 75 1A Set the data memorized at
DRG2’, DBG2’, DRG3’ and DBG3’. “Preparation”.
52 Calculate R/G ratio (1), B/G ratio 14 75 1B Set the data memorized at
(1), R/G ratio (2), B/G ratio (2), “Preparation”.
R/G ratio (3) and B/G ratio (3),
15 Save the data.
using the following equations
(Decimal calculation) 16 Wait for 2 sec.
R/G ratio (1) = (DRG1’/DRG0’) × 100 17 Perform next adjustments.
B/G ratio (1) = (DBG1’/DBG0’) × 100 If finish the camera system
R/G ratio (2) = (DRG2’/DRG0’) × 100 adjustments, release the data
B/G ratio (2) = (DBG2’/DBG0’) × 100 setting.
R/G ratio (3) = (DRG3’/DRG0’) × 100 (See “1. Data Setting during
B/G ratio (3) = (DBG3’/DBG0’) × 100 Camera System Adjustments”.)
Linearity check of high
luminance
53 Check that R/G ratio (1) satisfies
the specified value 1. (Decimal
number)
54 Check that B/G ratio (1) satisfies
the specified value 4. (Decimal
number)
6-25
DSC-F828
15. CCD White Defect Compensation Check Processing after Completing Adjustments:
The positions of the white defective pixel are detected, and check Order Page Address Data Procedure
that the pixels can be corrected.
2 Wait for 1 sec.
Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450)
3 7D 64 Set the data memorized at
Measurement Point Data of page: 60, address: 55
4 7D 69 Set the data memorized at
Measuring Instrument “Adjusting method”.
Specified value 1 00 to 40 5 Save the data.
Specified value 2 00 6 Wait for 2 sec.
7 Perform next adjustments.
01, and set data: 00. If finish the camera system
Note2: The white defective pixels are influenced by temperature. adjustments, release the data
Therefore, perform adjustment after the power is turned on, and setting.
sufficient time passes, and the camera gets warm. (See “1. Data Setting during
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
3 7D 64 Read the data, and memorize
the data.
4 7D 64 1E Set the data.
5 7D 69 Read the data, and memorize the
data.
6 7D 69 28 Set the data.
7 60 01 8B Set the data.
8 Wait for about 20 sec.
10 60 55 Read the data, and check it
satisfies the specified value 1.
12 Wait for 1 sec.
13 7D 64 0F Set the data.
14 7D 69 C0 Set the data.
“01”.
6-26
DSC-F828
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check Processing after Completing Adjustments:
The positions of the black defective pixel are detected, and check Order Page Address Data Procedure
that the pixels can be corrected. And confirms that there is no trash
in the surface of the CCD imager, the optical filter and the inside of
the lens. 2 Wait for 1 sec.
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) 3 60 2C 00 Set the data.
Subject Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) 4 60 30 00 Set the data.
(Standard picture frame) 5 7D 65 Set the data memorized at
Measurement Point Data of page: 60, address: 55 “Adjusting method”.
Measuring Instrument 6 Save the data.
Specified value 1 00 to 30 7 Wait for 2sec.
Specified value 2 00 8 Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.
9 Perform next adjustments.
Note1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clear If finish the camera system
chart. adjustments, release the data
Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: setting.
01, and Set data: 00.
Switch setting:
ZOOM ....................................................................... 70 (mm)
Adjusting method:
3 7D 65 Read the data, and memorize it.
4 7D 65 0A Set the data.
6 Rotate ZOOM ring and set the
ZOOM to “70” position.
11 Wait for 1 sec.
13 Check that the whole of the
screen is white.
14 60 01 8D Set the data.
“01”.
If the data is “00”, proceed to
“Processing after Completing
Adjustments”
19 Wait for 1 sec.
20 7D 65 0E Set the data.
6-27
DSC-F828
17. Strobe Adjustment Processing after Completing Adjustments:

Adjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes. Order Page Address Data Procedure
Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) 1 60 01 00 Set the data.
Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A) 2 60 2C 00 Set the data.
(50cm from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: DC
Measuring Instrument Data of page 6E, address: 4F
Adjustment Page 6F 6E
Adjustment Address D8 to EF 72 to 75 adjustments, release the data
Specified Value1 03 to 09 setting.
Specified Value2 00 (See “1. Data Setting during
Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash
adjustment box.
Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.
Note3: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
FLASH ......................................................................... OPEN
Adjusting method:
3 60 92 FF Set the data.
7 Wait for 5 sec.
9 6E 4F FF Set the data.
10 60 01 B9 Set the data.
11 Check the flashing.
“01”. (Note5)
13 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”.
15 Wait for 5 sec.
16 60 ED Read the data, and check it is “02”.
17 Wait for 1 sec.
18 60 01 E7 Set the data.
19 Check the flashing.
21 6F D8 Read the data, and check it is “00”.
22 6F DC Read the data, and check it
23 6E 4F Read the data, and check it

address: D8 to EF, and to page: 6E, address: 72 to 75.
6-28
DSC-F828
18. AF Laser Output Adjustment

Adjust the AF laser output power.
Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A).
(50cm from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Data of page 6F, address: 13
Adjustment Page 6F
Adjustment Address 10 to 16
Specified Value 00
Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash
adjustment box.
Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
4 60 01 AF Write the data.
5 Check that the AF laser is lit.
6 Wait for 8 sec.
“01”. (Note3)
8 6F 13 Read the data, and check it

address: 10 to 16.

setting.
6-29
DSC-F828
19. AF Laser Axis Check

Check the AF laser optical axis.
Mode STILL(P AUTO) (P)
Subject Background paper (J-2501-130-A)
(1m from the front of the lens)
Measurement Point Monitor TV (under scan)
Specified Value All hologram patterns are within the
inspection frame.
Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room.
Preparations:
1) Take a copy of the AF Laser axis frame with a clear sheet.
(Reduce or enlarge the frame in same size as the effective picture
frame of the monitor TV.) Fig. 6-1-28.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments:
during Camera System 1 60 14 00 Set the data.
4 Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.
8 Wait for 3 sec.
9 60 07 Read the data, and check it is “01”. adjustments, release the data
10 60 01 00 Write the data. setting.
11 60 22 05 Set the data. (See “1. Data Setting during
12 60 23 0A Set the data. Camera System Adjustments”.)
13 Check that all hologram patterns
are within the inspection frame.
(Fig. 6-1-15.)
14 Set the ZOOM to TELE end.
18 Wait for 3 sec.
21 60 14 8A Set the data.
23 Check that all hologram patterns
are not unfocused.
6-30
DSC-F828
1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER 2. EVF Initial Data Input

ADJUSTMENT Mode PLAY ( )
Signal Arbitrary
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages
caused by static electricity. Adjustment Page 8F
Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Control Adjustment Address 70, 71, 73 to 78, 7A, 7C
switch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A. Adjusting method:
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF. 2) Select page: 8F, and set the data in the following table.
2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00. 3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2sec.
Switch setting: 5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.
FINDER/LCD .......................................................... FINDER Address Data Remark
70 53 Fixed data
1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments
Perform the following data setting before the EVF system 71 96 Fixed data
adjustments. 73 80 VCO adj.
Note: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released. 74 A4 V COM adj.
So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off. 75 8D Bright adj.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 76 40 Fixed data
1 00 01 01 Set the data. 77 00 Fixed data
2 80 70 01 Set the data. 78 90 White balance adj.
7A 80 White balance adj.
After completing the EVF system adjustments, release the data
7C 38 Contrast adj.
setting.
2 Save the data.
3 Wait for 2 sec.
6-31
DSC-F828
3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) 4. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
be blurred. value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
Mode PLAY ( ) (whitish).
Subject Arbitrary Mode PLAY ( )
Measurement Point Data of page: 80, address: 02 Subject Arbitrary
Measuring Instrument Measurement Point Data of page: 80, address: 02
Adjustment Address 73 Adjustment Page 8F
Specified Value 01 Adjustment Address 75
Specified Value 01
Note1: A memory stick must be inserted.
Adjusting method:
Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjusting method:
during EVF System 1 Check that “1. Data Setting
Adjustments” is performed. during EVF System
2 8F 84 2F Set the data. Adjustments” is performed.
3 80 00 00 Set the data. 2 8F 88 9F Set the data.
4 80 02 00 Set the data. 3 80 00 00 Set the data.
8 80 02 Read the data, and check it is 7 Wait for 1 sec.
9 Wait for 1 sec. “01”. (Note2)
10 If finish the EVF system 9 Wait for 1 sec.
adjustments, release the data 10 If finish the EVF system
EVF System Adjustments”.) (See “1. Data Setting during
EVF System Adjustments”.)
Note2: If the data is other than “01”, adjustment has errors. See the
following table. Note2: If the data is other than “01”, adjustment has errors. See the
following table.
Data of page: 80,
Contents of adjustment error
address: 02 Data of page: 80,
01 Normally finished address: 02
10 Reached an upper limit 01 Normally finished
20 Reached a lower limit 10 Reached an upper limit
30 Time out 20 Reached a lower limit
40 Out of adjustment range 30 Time out
50 Adjustment is impossible 40 Out of adjustment range
50 Adjustment is impossible
6-32
DSC-F828
5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) 6. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board)

Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated specified value.
(whitish). If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
Mode PLAY ( ) conspicuous vertical lines.
Adjustment Address 7C Adjustment Page 8F
Specified Value 01 Adjustment Address 74
Specified Value 01
Adjusting method:
during EVF System 1 Check that “1. Data Setting
Adjustments” is performed. during EVF System
2 8F 89 44 Set the data. Adjustments” is performed.
3 80 00 00 Set the data. 2 8F 8C 03 Set the data.
10 If finish the EVF system 9 Wait for 1 sec.
adjustments, release the data 10 If finish the EVF system
EVF System Adjustments”.) (See “1. Data Setting during
following table.
Data of page: 80,
Contents of adjustment error Data of page: 80,
address: 02 Contents of adjustment error
address: 02
01 Normally finished
01 Normally finished
10 Reached an upper limit
10 Reached an upper limit
20 Reached a lower limit
20 Reached a lower limit
30 Time out
30 Time out
40 Out of adjustment range
40 Out of adjustment range
6-33
DSC-F828
7. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board)

Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
Mode PLAY ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Measurement Point Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page 8F
Adjustment Address 78, 7A
Specified Value The EVF screen should not be
colored.
Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.

Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC902
Adjusting method:
during EVF System
5 8F 7A 80 Set the data.
6 8F 78 Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
proceed to step 10.
7 8F 78 Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
8 8F 7A Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
9 8F 7A If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 7 to 9.
11 Save the data.
12 Wait for 2 sec.
13 If finish the EVF system
setting.
6-34
DSC-F828
1-6. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 2. LCD Initial Data Input
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages Mode PLAY ( )
caused by static electricity.
Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Control Signal Arbitrary
switch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data. Adjustment Page 8F
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A.
Adjustment Address 20, 21, 23 to 28, 2A, 2C
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF. Adjusting method:
2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00. 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 8F, and write the data in the following table.
Switch setting: 3) Save the data.
FINDER/LCD ................................................................. LCD 4) Wait for 2sec.
1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments
Address Data Remark
Perform the following data setting before the LCD system
adjustments. 20 A5 Fixed data
Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released. 21 19 Fixed data
So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off. 23 80 VCO adj.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 24 76 VCOM adj.
27 63 Fixed data
After completing the LCD system adjustments, release the data 28 90 White balance adj.
setting.
2A 80 White balance adj.
2C 72 Contrast adj.
2 Save the data.
3 Wait for 2 sec.
6-35
DSC-F828
3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) 4. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
be blurred. value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
Mode PLAY ( ) (whitish).
Adjustment Address 23 Adjustment Page 8F
Specified Value 01 Adjustment Address 2C
Specified Value 01
Adjusting method:
during LCD System 1 Check that “1. Data Setting
Adjustments” is performed. during LCD System
2 8F 34 1D Set the data. Adjustments” is performed.
3 80 00 00 Set the data. 2 8F 39 80 Set the data.
10 If finish the LCD system 9 Wait for 1 sec.
adjustments, release the data 10 If finish the LCD system
LCD System Adjustments”.) (See “1. Data Setting during
LCD System Adjustments”.)
following table.
Data of page: 80,
address: 02 Data of page: 80,
01 Normally finished address: 02
10 Reached an upper limit 01 Normally finished
20 Reached a lower limit 10 Reached an upper limit
30 Time out 20 Reached a lower limit
40 Out of adjustment range 30 Time out
50 Adjustment is impossible 40 Out of adjustment range
6-36
DSC-F828
5. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) 6. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board)

Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the Correct the white balance.
specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines. Mode PLAY ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Mode PLAY ( )
Subject Arbitrary
Adjustment Page 8F
Adjustment Address 28, 2A
Adjustment Page 8F
Specified Value The LCD screen should not be colored.
Adjustment Address 24
Specified Value The brightness difference between the Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.
section A and section B is minimum. Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
Note: A memory stick must be inserted. 1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC801
Adjusting method:
during LCD System Adjust-
ments” is performed.
during LCD System Adjust-
2 80 71 76 Set the data. ments” is performed.
3 8F 41 23 Set the data. 2 80 71 52 Set the data.
4 8F 24 Change the data so that the 3 80 84 02 Set the data.
brightness of the section A and
that of the section B is equal.
5 8F 2A 80 Set the data.
6 8F 28 Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
7 Save the data. proceed to step 10.
8 Wait for 2 sec. 7 8F 28 Change the data so that the LCD
9 If finish the LCD system adjust- screen is not colored.
ments, release the data setting. 8 8F 2A Change the data so that the LCD
(See “1. Data Setting during screen is not colored.
9 8F 2A If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 7 to 9.
11 Save the data.
B A
12 Wait for 2 sec.
13 If finish the LCD system
A B
setting.
B A (See “1. Data Setting during
A B
Fig. 6-1-16.
6-37
DSC-F828
6-2. SERVICE MODE 2. Operation
2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) • Page change

To change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enter
The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used for changing the
the page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimal
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The SEUS
notation.
performs bi-directional communication between the personal
computer (PC) and the unit using the USB signal. The resultant
• Address change
data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-
To change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screen
volatile memory.
and enter the address to be changed. Or click [B] to increase
the address, click [b] to decrease the address. The address is
2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS
displayed in hexadecimal notation.
Switch setting:
MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick)
• Data change
1. Connection
To change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enter
1) Connect the HASP key to the USB port of the PC.
the data. Or click [v] to increase the data, click [V] to decrease
2) Connect the camera to another USB port of the PC.
the data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation.
3) Insert a memory stick to the camera.
This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatile
4) Confirm that the camera starts in the USB mode.
memory. If you want to write the changed data, click [Save] to
5) Start the SEUS on the PC.
write it.
6) Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is
normal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-2-1,
• Data saving
indicating the “connected” state.
Note: The SEUS will go in “disconnect” state, if the camera is turned off To write the all changed data to the nonvolatile memory,
(for instance, by resetting the unit). In such a case, click [Connect] click [Save] on the SEUS screen. and wait for 2 sec.
on the SEUS screen to restore the “connected” state. Note: Even if [Write] or [Store] on the SEUS screen is clicked, the
data can not be write to the nonvolatile memory.
• Data reading
The data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values at
the time when the pages and addresses were set, and they are
not updated automatically. To check the data change, click
[Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data.
2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS

Mishandling of the SEUS may erase the correct adjustment data at
times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data
be saved before beginning adjustments.
1) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen.

2) Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved.
Fig. 6-2-1.
3) Click [Read] to read the data to be saved from the camera.
4) Click [File] and save the data to the PC.
6-38
DSC-F828
2-2. SERVICE MODE 2. Bit value discrimination

Bit values must be discriminated using the hexadecimal data for
1. Setting the Test Mode following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value
Page 2F Address 23 is “1” or “0”.
Hexadecimal data
Data Function
80 Normal
11 Forced STILL mode power ON
12 Forced PLAY mode power ON
04 Forced MOVIE mode power ON
• Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and set bit3 to bit0 discrimination
data: 01. bit7 to bit4 discrimination
• For page 2F, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory
by saving data. In this case, take note that the test mode will
not be exited even when the main power is turned off. Display on the Bit values
• After completing adjustments/repairs, release the data setting .
adjustment bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
remote or or or or
2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and set data: 80.
commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec. 0 0 0 0 0
5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. 1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
A 8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
A (A) 1 0 1 0
B (b) 1 0 1 1
C (c) 1 1 0 0
D (d) 1 1 0 1
B E (E) 1 1 1 0
F (F ) 1 1 1 1
Examples: If the hexadecimal data is “8E”, the bit values for bit7 to bit4
are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0
are shown in the B column.
6-39
DSC-F828
3. Switch check (1)

Page 20 Address 80
Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0

0 POWER switch (XPWER ON) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF ON
Using method:
1) Select page: 20, address: 80.
2) Read the data. By discriminating the bit value of the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
4. Switch check (2)

Page 20 Address 90 to 96
Using method:
1) Select page: 20, address: 90 to 96.
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Data
Address
00 to 0B 0C to 26 27 to 47 48 to 72 73 to A4 A5 to DC DD to FF
Control button Control button DISPLAY WINDOW WHITE COMPACT MEMORY
90 DOWN UP BACKLIGHT BALANCE EXPOSURE FLASH STICK
(KEY AD0) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(IC401 J6 ) block (MID)) block (MID)) block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER))
S008 S006 S003 S004 S005 S006 S006
Control button Control button Control button
91 RIGHT LEFT CENTER AE LOCK MENU
(KEY AD1) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch No key input
(IC401 H6 ) block (MID)) block (MID)) block (MID)) block (MID)) block (MID))
S003 S010 S007 S012 S002
QUICK REVIEW DIGITAL ZOOM SELF TIMER SCREEN STATUS FINDER LCD
92 (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(KEY AD2) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER))
(IC401 G6 ) S005 S004 S003 S002 S001 S001
93 OPEN (FLASH) FLASH METERING MODE MACRO BURST/BRACKET FOCUS AUTO FOCUS MANUAL
(KEY AD3 ) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board)
(IC401 J7 ) (S001) (S002) (S005) (S003) (S006) (S004) (S004)
NIGHT SHOT/
94
NIGHT FRAMING
(KEY AD4) No key input
(SW-410 board)
(IC401 H7 )
(S007)
Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial
95
STILL (AE-S) STILL (AE-A) STILL (MANUAL) STILL (SCN) MOVIE
(MODE DIAL 0) No key input
(Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(IC401 J8 )
block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (TOP))
Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial Mode dial
96
STILL (AUTO) STILL (P AUTO) PB SET UP
(MODE DIAL 1) No key input
(Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
(IC401 J9 )
block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (TOP)) block (TOP))
5. Switch check (3)

Page 60 Address B9
Function When data = 11 When data = 01

FLASH OPEN DETECT switch (LS-067 board S001) Close Open
Using method:
1) Select page: 60, address: B9.
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
6-40
DSC-F828
6. Switch check (4)

Page 80 Address 13
Function When data = 00 When data = 01 When data = 02

Shutter button (XAE LOCK SW) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF ON ON
Shutter button (XSHTR ON SW) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF OFF ON
Using method:
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switches can be discriminated.
7. Switch check (5)

Page 80 Address 14
Function When data = 00 When data = 01

CF COVER switch (Control switch block (CENTER)) Open Close
Using method:
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
8. Switch check (6)

Page 80 Address 15
Using method:
2) By discriminating the data, the rotation of the control dial can be discriminated.
Control dial (Control switch block (CENTER)) Data

When rotated in the left direction. 01
When rotated in the right direction. 02
9. LED, Segment LCD check

Page 20 Address 04
Page 80 Address 12
Page 8E Address FE
Using method:
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, set data: 01.
3) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 20.
6) Check that all LED (Power, Charge, Tally, Access, Segment LCD back light) are lit.
8) Check that all segment of the segment LCD are lit.
11) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 00.
6-41
DSC-F828
10. Record of Use check

Page 4F Address 94 to 97
Address Function Remarks

94 Recording counter 1000000-digit and 1000000-digit
95 (Hexadecimal) 1000000-digit and 10000-digit
96 1000-digit and 100-digit
97 10-digit and 1-digit
Using method:
1) The recording counter data is displayed at page: 4F, addresses: 94 to 97. These data are named D94, D95, D96 and D97 respectively.
2) Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation)
N = D97 + D96 × 100 + D95 × 10000 + D94 × 1000000
11. Self Diagnostics Log check

Page 20 Address B0 to B8
Address Initial value Function

B0 00 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
B1 00 “Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
B2 00 “Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
B3 00 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
B4 00 “Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B5 00 “Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
B6 00 “Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
B7 00 “Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
B8 00 “Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
*1: “C” t “01”, “E” t “03”
Using method:
1) The self diagnostics log is displayed at page: 20, addresses: B0 to B5.
Note: These data will be erased when the lithium battery (LR-018 board) is removed.
6-42
DSC-F828
〈FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉
For CAP-Normal mode
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR

REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.
✂
For CAP-Real mode
✂
— 43 —
DSC-F828
〈AF ILLUMINATION FRAME〉
Take a copy of AF
ILLUMINATION FRAME
with a clear sheet for use.
✂
— 44E —

Sony DSC-F828 Service Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Sony DSC-F828 Service Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

DSC-F828

SERVICE MANUAL LEVEL 1

SPECIFICATIONS SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ORNAMENTAL PARTS

• INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document.

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following

[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]

Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error

• The type of memory stick that cannot be

LCD window adhesive sheet

Checking supplied accessories.

S-houlder strap (1)

Sony EMCS Co. 2003L1600-1

Getting started ________________________

Shooting still images __________________

Digital Still Camera Viewing still images ___________________

Operating Instructions Deleting still images ___________________

Owner’s Record Advanced still image shooting____________

Enjoying images on your computer ______

Additional information ___________________

Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking

Notice for the customers in the

A MENU button (47, 137) J Mode dial (27)

• Use the ACC (accessory) jack to connect an

2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it

To remove the battery pack

• The available shooting time on the display

If no tasks are performed for about three AF Mode:

lamp power the camera, the Auto Power Off

Shooting still images

“Memory Stick” Microdrive/

Terminal side Label side

Shooting still images

To remove the Microdrive/CF card

card eject lever so that the Microdrive/CF 3:2

You can choose image size (number of Image size Examples

Shooting still images

want to shoot. paper used.

The number of images that can be saved in a “Memory Stick”3)

80 min 8M FINE 101

Shooting still images

AE/AF lock indicator

Shooting still images

The Auto Focus function may be difficult to

Shooting still images

To cancel the digital zoom

80 min 8M 101 80 min 8M 101

Shooting still images

• We recommend that you use Flexible Spot AF

80 min 8M 101 80 min 8M FINE 101 Flash emitter

Shooting still images

Twilight mode Twilight portrait mode Landscape mode Portrait mode

Shooting still images

To cancel the Scene Selection

• When the shutter speed becomes slower than

Viewing still images

101-0008 2004 1 1 10:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY

101-0003 2004 1 1 10:30PM SINGLE DISPLAY

To return to the single-image screen

Viewing still images

• Turn off both the camera and the TV before

80 min 8M 80 min 8M 80 min 8M